Home

Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual

1. 4 IN SERVICE AVAILABLE CBIP 5 IN SERVICE AVAILABLE LIIP The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e LINK Shows the value of the link_id parameter for that link as configured using the MTP_LINK command in the config txt file e L2_STATUS Layer 2 status possible values are e IN SERVICE OUT OF SERVICE PROCESSOR OUTAGE ALIGNED READY INITIAL ALIGNMENT ALIGNED NOT RDY e L3_STATUS Layer 3 status possible values are AVAILABLE UNAVAILABLE CONGESTED DEACTIVATED the link has been deactivated by the user or DOWN_NOHOST the link has be taken down as there are no available hosts e L3_ BLOCKING_STATUS L3 Blocking Status possible values are e INHR The Link is remotely inhibited e INHL The Link is locally inhibited e BLKR The Link is Remotely Blocked e COIP Changeover is in progress e CBIP Changeback is in progress e LIIP Local Link inhibiting is in progress e LUIP Local Link unhibiting is in progress 6 13 19 STSRP SIGTRAN Route Status This command displays the status of SIGTRAN routes Syntax STSRP SNRT Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Routes gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STSRP STSRP SNRT 3 Output Format Status SIGTRAN Routes Print SNRT NC DPC SG RT_STATUS GW_STATUS 1 NC3 401 2 AVAILABLE AVA
2. Signaling Server Host Configuration Change SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS BACKUP_HOST OPTIONS MIN_HOSTS DMHOST SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 1 BACKUP_HOST NONE OPTIONS 0 MIN_HOSTS 1 DMHOST 0 Signaling Board Configuration x SS7_BOARD BPOS BRDTYPE OPTIONS SS7_BOARD BPOS 0 BRDTYPE SS7MD OPTIONS 0x00000001 SS7_BOARD BPOS 1 BRDTYPE SS7MD OPTIONS 0x00000001 T1 E1 PCM network interface trunk Configuration LIU_CONFIG PORTID PCM LIUTYPE E1 LC HDB3 FF G704 CRC_MODE NONE BUILDOUT 0 OPTIONS 0 LABEL LIU_CONFIG PORTID PCM LIUTYPE T1 LC B8ZS FF ESF CRC_MODE NONE BUILDOUT 1 OPTIONS 0 LABEL LIU_CONFIG PORTID 0 PCM 0 3 LIUTYPE E1 LIU_CONFIG PORTID 1 PCM 0 4 LIUTYPE E1 LIU_CONFIG PORTID 2 PCM 1 3 LIUTYPE T1 LIU_CONFIG PORTID 3 PCM 1 4 LIUTYPE T1 LIU_CONFIG PORTID 4 PCM 0 1 LIUTYPE T1 383 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines LIU_CONFIG PORTID 5 PCM 1 1 LIUTYPE T1 en e R MT MT MT MT l MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MT MTP3 Options Configuration MTP_CONFIG NC NC0O OPTIONS 0 options bits 8 10 and 11 set to 1 it is ANSI operation options bit 9 if set to 1 pe is 24 bit else it is 14 16 bit options bit 20 if set to 1 pc is 16 bit if bit 9 not set P_CONFIG NC NC0O OPTIONS 0x00010000 P
3. CNSLE SS7 Link End CNSLI SS7 Link Initiate CNSLP SS7 Link Configuration CNSMC Configuration SNMP Manager Change CNSME Configuration SNMP Manager End CNSMI Configuration SNMP Manager Initiate CNSMP SNMP Manager Configuration CNSNP SNMP Configuration CNSNS Configuration SNMP Set CNSRE SIGTRAN Route End CNSRI SIGTRAN Route Initiate CNSRP SIGTRAN Route Configuration CNSSE SCCP Subsystem Resource End CNSSI SCCP Subsystem Resource Initiate CNSSP SCCP Subsystem Resource Configuration CNSTE SIGTRAN Link End CNSTI SIGTRAN Link Initiate CNSTP SIGTRAN Link Configuration 155 Chapter 6 Management Commands CNSWP System Software Configuration CNSYP System Configuration CNSYS Configuration System Set CNTDP Time and Date Configuration CNTDS Configuration Time and Day Set CNTMP Trace Masks Configuration CNTMS Configuration Trace Mask Set CNTPE Configuration Network Time Protocol Server End CNTPI Configuration Network Time Protocol Server Initiate CNTPP NTP Server Configuration CNURC Configuration Update Resources Change CNURE Configuration Update Resources End CNURI Configuration Update Resources Initiate CNUSC Configuration SNMP User Change CNUSE Configuration SNMP
4. TQUIESCE TWARNING CNOBS OBJIDX TUP TDOWN TINACTIVE TIMPAIR TRESTART TQUIESCE TWARNING Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Traps gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The DSMI agent must be enabled Only one state trap can be specifed per command States can be set to CREATE DESTROY ALL NONE or CHANGE Example CNOBS OBJ GRP 7 OB ECT 2 TDOWN all This will cause a TRAP to be generated whenever an SS7 link is created in the Down state or destroyed while in the Down state or when the link enters the Down state 6 3 52 CNPCE PCM End This command removes an PCM Note PCMs are dynamically removed by first deleting the PCM from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the PCM from the system Syntax CNPCE PORTID Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt PCMs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The PCM Port has been initiated The PCM Port is not present in the config txt file 189 Chapter 6 Management Commands The PCM is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The PCM is present in th
5. The meaning of each field in the output is as follows DESTID The Destination Index DEST The Destination Table ID DESTDEQ The row identifier within the destination table TXMSU Messages transmitted to the destination for this row entry TXOCT Number of octets in Messages transmitted to the destination PERIOD Measurement collection period 11 6 MSDHP DTS Host Measurements A new MMI command provides measurements on a per DTS host basis It is defined as follows Synopsis This command displays measurements for configured DTS Hosts The user can optionally reset the measurements Syntax MSDHP RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt DTS Hosts gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MS DHP MSDHP RESET Y 271 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format DTS Host Measurements HOSTID RXMSG TXMSG RXDISCARD TXDISCARD IDLG ODLG IBILL PERIOD 0 5 5 0 0 0 0 30 00 00 30 1 332 5 65665 0 0 545 45 00 00 30 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows HOSTID DTS Host ID RXMSG Number of messages received from the network sent to the host TXMSG Number of outgoing data messages from the host transmitted to the network RXDISCARD Number of messages received from the network that were destined for this host but discarded TXDISCARD Number of outgoing data messages from the host that were discar
6. Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt GTT Translations gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SCCP GTT Translation ID has been initiated The SCCP GTT Translation is not present in the config txt file The SCCP GTT Translation is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SCCP GTT Translation is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNGTE GTPID 1 6 3 29 CNGTI SCCP GTT Translation Initiate This command adds a new SCCP GTT Translation Note SCCP GTT Translations are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system 174 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Syntax CNGTI GTPID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt GTT Translations gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SCCP GTT Translation ID has not been initiated The SCCP GTT Translation is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration e
7. cc cececeeeeee eee ee eee sneer eee eaes 206 6 3 79 CNSSP SCCP Subsystem Resource Configuration cceeeee eect eeee eee 207 6 3 80 CNSTE SIGTRAN Link End cece rere erent eee e neat e Een entre eared 207 6 3 81 CNSTI SIGTRAN Link Initiate ccc cee cece reer teat ee eee ee tea teeeaneateneaeene es 208 6 3 82 CNSTP SIGTRAN Link Configuration cece eee eee eee eee teeta ead 208 6 3 83 CNSWP System Software Configuration cccceeeee eee eee eee ee eee ee nena ened 209 6 3 84 CNSYP System Configuration 0 ccc cece ee te eaten 210 6 3 85 CNSYS Configuration System Set cece ete teeta eaed 210 6 3 86 CNTDP Time and Date Configuration ccececee cece eee e ee eee eee teen e nannies 211 6 3 87 CNTDS Configuration Time and Day Set cc ceecece eee eee eee e neta eee eae 211 6 3 88 CNTMP Trace Masks Configuration cceceee cece e eee ee eee e nena ee eee ened 212 6 3 89 CNTMS Configuration Trace Mask Set ce cece eeee eect eee ee eee eee eee a eee eaed 212 6 3 90 CNTPE Configuration Network Time Protocol Server End ccseeeeeeeeeenees 213 6 3 91 CNTPI Configuration Network Time Protocol Server Initiate cccceeee 214 6 3 92 CNTPP NTP Server Configuration c cece eee eee ee eee eee teen eaed 214 6 3 93 CNURC Configuration Update Resources Change ccccececseseeeeeeeateneeeeaees 215 6 3 94 CNURE Configura
8. cece eee ee cence eee ete eee nena ened 174 6 3 29 CNGTI SCCP GTT Translation Initiate essees ereere errereen rennene 174 6 3 30 CNGTP SCCP GTT Translation Configuration sssssessessisrsresrrerrrsrrresrirre 175 6 3 31 CNHSP Host Configuration cece eect netted 176 6 3 32 CNLAE SIGTRAN Local Application Server End cececeeeeeee teeta tented 176 6 3 33 CNLAI SIGTRAN Local Application Server Initiate cece eerie 177 6 3 34 CNLAP SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration eeeeees 178 6 3 35 CNLCP Software License Capability Configuration ccceeeeeee eee ee eee ee 178 6 3 36 CNLDE SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration End ccceceeeee eect ee ee eee 179 6 3 37 CNLDI SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration cccceecee cece ee ee eee eee ee en ed 179 6 3 38 CNLDP SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration cececeeeeeeeeeeee eee eater ened 180 6 3 39 CNLSE SS7 Link Set ENG sasian eip E LE ET eater need 181 6 3 40 CNLSI SS7 Link Set Initiate eee eerie 181 6 3 41 CNLSP SS7 Link Set Configuration cece 182 6 3 42 CNLTE SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration End cccceceeeeeeee teeter eae 182 6 3 43 CNLTI SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration cececeeeeeee eee ee eet eee ened 183 6 3 44 CNLTP SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration cccceeeeeeeee ee ee eee ee ee ee ened 184 6 3 45 CNMLE SS7 Monito
9. e OPTIONS This is a 16 bit value used to specify run time options This field is reserved for future use and should be set to 0 SIGTRAN Binds configuration is viewed using the CNSBP MMI command After startup additional Binds can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNGLI command Binds are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNGLE MMI command 99 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 7 9 SCTP_TIMER SCTP Timer Configuration Synopsis The SCTP_TIMER command provides the ability to configure the SCTP protocol timers from the configuration file Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCTP_TIMER NC NCO0 TIMID TSEC TMSEC Example SCTP_TIMER TIMID RMAX TMSEC 1600 NC lt nc_id gt SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that the SCTP timer is being configured for Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 and NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed TIMID A text identifier for the timer to be configured It should be set to one of the following RMIN RMAX RINIT CK HBT T11 T21 SACKD TSEC The timer value specified in seconds TMSEC The timer value specified in milliseconds Any timers not explicitly configured continue will be set to the default values shown in the following table Mnemonic Default Granularity SCTP Timeout Rmin 200m
10. A M2PA identifier in the range 0 to one less than the maximum number of M2PA links supported Used for M2PA configuration only e RIP1 The primary IP address on which the Signaling Server will attempt to communicate with the remote unit May be an IPV4 address or IPTOKEN that references a Pv4 or IPV6 address An rip1 value of 0 0 0 0 cannot be specified RI P2 The secondary IP address on which the Signaling Server will attempt to communicate with the remote unit May be an IPV4 address or IPTOKEN that references a IPv4 or IPV6 address END Identifies whether the Signaling Server end of the SIGTRAN link acts as a CLIENT or a SERVER LPORT Local Signaling Server SCTP port in the range 1 to 65535 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e RPORT Remote SCTP port in the range 1 to 65535 OPTIONS This is a 16 bit value used to specify run time options Bit Description 0 Secure Mode When set to 1 the SIGTRAN link will not come into service if it receives a message from an IP address not associated with the SIGTRAN link 1 For a M3UA SIGTRAN link communicating with a Remote Signaling Gateway when set to 1 a DAUD message will be sent when the link comes into service and periodically thereafter When not set DAUD message will not be generated Not applicable for M2PA 2 For M3UA set to 1 when the RSG parameter value will be used Not applicable f
11. CRC_MODE NONE BUILDOUT 0 OPTIONS 0 LABEL LIU_CONFIG PORTID PCM LIUTYPE T1 LC B8ZS FF ESF CRC_MODE NONE BUILDOUT 1 OPTIONS 0 LABEL 391 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines LIU_CONFIG PORTID 0 PCM 0 1 LIUTYPE E1 LIU_CONFIG PORTID 1 PCM 0 2 LIUTYPE E1 LIU_CONFIG PORTID 2 PCM 0 3 LIUTYPE E1 LIU_CONFIG PORTID 3 PCM 0 4 LIUTYPE E1 ATM Cell Stream Configuration ATM_CELL_STREAM CELLSTR BPOS L2ID PORTID OPTIONS 0x0006 DEFVPI DEFVCI ATM_CELL_STREAM CELLSTR 0 BPOS 0 L2ID 0 PORTID 0 DEFVPI 1 DEFVCI 6 ATM_CELL_STREAM CELLSTR 1 BPOS 0 L21ID 1 PORTID 1 DEFVPI 1 DEFVCI 6 ATM_CELL_STREAM CELLSTR 2 BPOS 0 L2ID 2 PORTID 2 DEFVPI 1 DEFVCI 6 ATM_CELL_STREAM CELLSTR 3 BPOS 0 L2ID 3 PORTID 3 DEFVPI 1 DEFVCI 6 MTP3 Options Configuration MTP_CONFIG NC NC0O OPTIONS 0 MTP_CONFIG NC NCO OPTIONS 0x0002 MTP_CONFIG NC NC1 OPTIONS 0x0002 o SS7 Link Set Configuration MTP_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET OPC APC NLINKS 2 SSF 0x8 OPTIONS 0 LABEL MTP_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET 0 OPC 1 APC 3 MTP_LINKSET NC NC1 LINKSET 1 OPC 2 APC 3 K SS7 Link Configuration MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE ATM LINKSET REF SLC BPOS BLINK OPTIONS 0x00000006 CELLSTR VPI
12. Hard disk drive failure A disk drive in the RAID array is unavailable for use The drive should be replaced using a genuine spare part from Dialogic 67 69 CMOS Bat Low Insufficient hosts WRN CRT The CMOS back up battery has discharged Replace CMOS battery Communications failure has occurred the number of available SIU hosts is below the minimum threshold All signaling links will have been taken out of service until a host becomes available Check configuration connectivity and remote equipment 70 46 SDP congestion CRT Resource exhaustion has occurred within the SDP High throughput to a remote subscriber database caused exhaustion of an internal resource Reduce traffic level or report to Dialogic support Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Alarm IDs Severity Description and Clearance Actions Continued CODE TITLE ID SEVERITY DESCRIPTION ALARM CLEARANCE ACTION 71 File sys Diagnostic WRN The underlying file system has detected warning code an issue that could not be corrected during normal startup of the system This error can usually be cleared by a restart of the unit that causes the file system to be checked In a suitable maintenance window perform a hard restart of the unit If alarm persists contact Dialogic support 72 DB unavail Identity of the MAJ Communications failure has occurred a datab
13. MATRI MATRC MATRE MAP MT SMS Rx Profile MATRP MAP MT SMS Rx Profile Print MATTI MATTC MATTE MAP MT SMS Tx Profile MATTP MAP MT SMS Tx Profile Print IPHNI IPHNE IP Host Configuration PHNP IP Host Configuration Print MAULI MAULC MAULE MAP Update Location MAUPI MAUPC MAUPE MAP USSD Profile MAUPP MAP USSD Profile Print 233 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 7 1 MAHRI MAHRC MAHRE MAP HLR Rx Profile Synopsis Commands to initiate change and end configurations associated with MAP Receive HLR service profiles Syntax MAHRI PROFILE NAME NC HLRNP HLRTON HLRADDR RCOPT OPTIONS MAHRC PROFILE NAME HLRNP HLRTON HLRADDR RCOPT OPTIONS MAHRE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt HLR gt HLR Rx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service The HLR address must be unique within the network context Examples MAHRI PROFILE 0 NAME HLRADDR_RECV_0 HLRADDR 32331545 MAHRC PROFI LE 0 HLRADDR 32331545 MAHRE PROFI LE 0 6 7 2 MAHRP MAP HLR Rx Profile Print Synopsis Command to display the configuration associated with MAP Receive HLR service profiles Syntax MAHRP PROFI LE Web Management Location System
14. OPTIONS 0x00000000 RIID 0 250 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 8 MMI Commands MMLOI MMI Logoff Initiate Maintenance Commands Maintenance Commands 6 8 1 MMLOI MMI Logoff Initiate This command ends the current log on session Syntax MMLOI Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Example MMLOI 6 9 Maintenance Commands MNINE Maintenance Uninhibit Initiate MNINI Maintenance Inhibit Initiate MNRSI Maintenance Restart Initiate MNSSI Maintenance Snapshot Initiate 6 9 1 MNI NE Maintenance Uninhibit I nitiate This command activates an SS7 signaling link SIGTRAN M3UA link host RSI link or circuit group The command is also used to uninhibit an SS7 signaling link and to unblock a newly installed hard disk drive following hard disk drive failure Important In order to maintain RAID array hard disk drive integrity it is important follow the correct procedure as detailed in the operators manual when unblocking hard disk drives Syntax MNINE LINK NHIBIT N HOSTID GID SNLINK DRIVE Web Management Location LINK System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Links gt Status HOSTID System Administration gt Hosts gt Hosts gt Status GID System Administration gt Call gt Circuit Groups gt Status 251 Chapter 6 Management Commands SNLINK System Administr
15. SEVERITY MAJ DESCRI PTI ON ALARM CLEARANCE ACTI ON The input PCM signal contains a bit error rate BER in excess of 1 in 100 000 indicating background errors on the PCM interface Check physical connectivity check clocking ensure there are no frame slips and monitor LIU measurements BER3 PORTI D MAJ The input PCM signal contains a BER in excess of 1 in 1 000 indicating unacceptable errors on PCM interface Check physical connectivity configuration and remote equipment PSU failure PSUID CRT Power supply has failed Check the external power connection and check to ensure that power is switched on If this fails to restore the fault replace the power supply unit SS7 link fail LINK MAJ Communications failure has occurred SS7 signaling link has failed Check configuration connectivity and remote equipment 10 SS7 linkset lost LINKSET MAJ Communications failure has occurred all signaling links in an SS7 signaling link set have failed Possibly caused by incorrect configuration point codes or signaling timeslots connectivity fault or inactive signaling terminal at the remote end Check configuration connectivity and remote equipment 12 13 SS7 link cong Fan fail LINK FAN MNR CRT Traffic throughput exceeds per link capacity Reduce traffic load and investigate capacity of remote end or add additional
16. SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration STN_LAS NC NCO LAS OPC RC TRMD LS OPTIONS 0 LABEL STN_LAS LAS 1 OPC 3 RC 1 SIGTRAN Link Configuration STN_LINK NC NCO SNLINK SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 RIP2 LIP1 L1IP2 END S LPORT 2905 RPORT 2905 OPTIONS 0 RSG NA LABEL 389 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines STN_LINK SNLINK 1 SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 192 168 17 200 LIP1 192 168 17 201 END S LPORT 2905 RPORT 2905 OPTI ONS 0x0006 RSG 1 STN_LINK SNLINK 2 SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 192 168 17 200 LIP1 192 168 17 201 END S LPORT 2906 RPORT 2906 OPTI ONS 0x0006 RSG 1 E SIGTRAN Route Configuration STN_ROUTE NC NC0 SNRT DPC OPTIONS 0 LABEL STN_ROUTE SNRT 1 DPC 2 SIGTRAN Gateway List Configuration STN_RSGLIST GLID SNRT RSG OPTIONS 0 STN_RSGLIST GLID 1 SNRT 1 RSG 1 SIGTRAN Bind Configuration STN_LBIND BIND LAS RAS RSG OPTIONS 0 STN_LBIND BIND 1 LAS 1 RSG 1 SIU to Remote Application Server IPSP Operation Example configuration of an SIU in IPSP operation using 4 links to connect with 2 Remote Application Servers M3UA config to connect SIU to 2 RAS IPSP using 4 LINKS Signaling Server Host Configuration Change x SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS BACKUP_HOST OPTIONS MIN_HOSTS DMHOST SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 1 BACKUP_HOST NONE OPTIONS 0 MIN_HOSTS
17. Syntax MNINI LINK NHIBIT Y HOSTID GID SNLINK DRIVE Web Management Location LINK System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Links gt Status HOSTID System Administration gt Hosts gt Hosts gt Status GID System Administration gt Call gt Circuit Groups gt Status SNLINK System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Links gt Status DRIVE System Administration gt Server Management gt Disk Drives gt Status 252 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Prerequisites If the link is to be inhibited it must be active The last link in a SS7 signaling linkset cannot be inhibited The circuit group must be already configured and activated Only M3UA SIGTRAN links may be deactivated The Disk drive must be active and not in the RESTARTING state Example MNINI LINK 4 MNINI LINK 4 INHIBIT Y MNINI HOSTID 1 MNINI GID 4 MNINI DRIVE 1 6 9 3 MNPCS Maintenance PCM Control Set This command allows specific conditions to be applied to an E1 T1 PCM interface for diagnostic purposes Typically this command is used during type testing of the E1 T1 interface This command allows the user to control the generation of AIS Blue alarm to activate various diagnostic loopback modes and to activate generation of PRBS test sequences If the system is restarted any active control actions will be
18. The service center address must be unique within the network context Example MARTI PROFILE 0 NAME READYSM_TRANS_0 SCADDR 23323121 HLRADDR 1121212 MARTC PROFILE 0 HLRADDR 1121212 MARTE PROFILE O 240 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 7 10 MARTP MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile Print Synopsis Command to display configurations associated with MAP Ready for SM service profiles Syntax MARTP PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt Ready for SM gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MARTP PROFI LE 0 Output Format MAP Ready for SM service profile PROFILE NAME READYSM_TRANS_0 NC NCO SCTON International SCNP ISDN SCADDR 666666666666 HLRTON International HLRNP ISDN HLRADDR 666666666666 RCOPT N NSUBP N RIID 0 241 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 7 11 MASPI MASPC MASPE MAP Subscriber Profiling Profile Synopsis Commands to initiate change and end configurations associated with MAP Subscriber service profiles Syntax MASPI PROFILE NAME GWADDR NC J GWNP GWTON DSTTON DSTNP RCOPT OPTIONS RIID MASPC PROFILE NAME GWNP GWTON GWADDR DSTTON DSTNP RCOPT OPTIONS RII D MASPE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt Subscriber gt Sub
19. This is a 16 bit value used to specify run time options Bit O Enables SLS bit rotation When set the SLS field is bit rotated after Signaling Gateway selection and prior to MSU transmission Bit 1 Enables 8 bit SLS bit rotation When set 8 bit SLS rotation will be used when not set default SLS rotation based on MTP label format will be used The setting of this bit is only applicable if Bit O is also set to enable SLS bit rotation All other bits are reserved for future use e SHARE The Signaling Server support M3UA operation in multiple Network Contexts The lt share gt parameter allows the user to specify the percentage in the range 1 100 of the SIU or SWS license capability that should be allocated to the specific Network Context identified by this command The total value of lt share gt for all Network contexts should not exceed 100 7 2 STN_LAS SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration Synopsis This command initiates a local application server An application server is a logical entity representing a SS7 end point Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax STN_LAS NC NCO LAS OPC RC TRMD LS OPTIONS 0 LABEL Examples STN_LAS NC NC2 LAS 1 OPC 1200 RC 1 TRMD LS STN_LAS LAS 2 OPC 1300 RC 3 TRMD OR Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Parameters The STN_LAS command has the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context
20. for more information 2 Check the latest distribution file available for the SS7G41 from the Dialogic Signaling and SS7 Products download web site http www dialogic com support helpweb signaling 3 If a download is required then store the distribution file in an empty directory of your hard drive 4 Follow steps below to update the system software 2 2 5 Updating System Software Unit software may be updated by FTP or SFTP transfer or from USB Current information and file downloads for the units can be found at the following URLs SS7G41 Signaling Server http www dialogic com support helpweb signaling BorderNet DSH http www dialogic com products diameter signaling controller bordernet diameter services helix aspx Although updating the software is not a requirement and units are expected to function well with the software supplied with them it is recommended that you use the latest version of the software available 25 Chapter 2 Licensing Installation and Initial Configuration Updating the Software by FTP or SFTP Transfer Note Secure FTP users will by default log into the parent directory of siguser and will then need to change to the ftpuser directory before commencing the following operation Most Secure FTP clients provide an option to configure the default initial directory If available users may choose to use this instead of manually changing to the ftpuser subdirectory The procedure to update t
21. 5 NCO 10 37 LSS 253 RSS 2 8 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command SCCP_CONC_SSR for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 15 CNDRE DTS Host Route End This command removes an DTS Host Route Note DTS Routes are dynamically removed by first deleting the DTS Route from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the DTS Route from the system Syntax CNDRE DRID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt DTS Route Requests gt Configuration 165 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The DTS Route has been initiated The DTS Route is not present in the config txt file The DTS Route is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The DTS Host Route is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNDRE DRI D 1 6 3 16 CNDRI DTS Host Route Initiate This command adds a new DTS Host Route DTS Routes are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNDRI DRI D Web Management Loca
22. ATM Cell Stream End CNACI ATM Cell Stream Initiate CNACP ATM Cell Stream Configuration CNBOP Board Configuration CNBOS Board Set CNCGE Circuit Group End CNCGI Circuit Group Initiate CNCGP Circuit Group Configuration CNCRE SS7 Route End CNCRI SS7 Route Initiate CNCRP SS7 Route Configuration CNCSE SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource End CNCSI SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource Initiate CNCSP SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource Configuration CNDRE DTS Host Route End CNDRI DTS Host Route Initiate CNDRP DTS Host Routing Resource Print CNDUP Dual Operation Configuration CNGAE SCCP GTT Address End CNGAI SCCP GTT Address Initiate CNGAP SCCP GTT Address Configuration CNGLE SIGTRAN Gateway List End 153 Chapter 6 Management Commands CNGLI SIGTRAN Gateway List Initiate CNGLP SIGTRAN Remote Signaling Gateway List Configuration CNGPE SCCP GTT Pattern End CNGPI SCCP GTT Pattern Initiate CNGPP SCCP GTT Pattern Configuration CNGTE SCCP GTT Translation End CNGTI SCCP GTT Translation Initiate CNGTP SCCP GTT Translation Configuration CNHSP Host Configuration CNLAE SIGTRAN Local Application Server End CNLAI SIGTRAN Local Application Server Initiate CNLAP SIGTRAN Local Application Server Confi
23. DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 3 67 CNSLP SS7 Link Configuration This command displays the configuration data for SS7 signaling links Syntax CNSLP LINK Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNSLP Output Format SS7 Link Configuration LINK LINKSET REF SLC BPOS BLINK STREAM TS OPTIONS IFTYPE VPI VCI LABEL 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0x00000006 TDM 1 1 1 1 1 T 0 2 0x00000006 TDM 2 1 2 2 1 2 0 3 0x00000006 TDM 3 1 3 3 1 3 0 4 0x00000006 TDM 4 1 3 3 1 1 1 0x00000006 ATM 0 1 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command MTP_LINK for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 68 CNSMC Configuration SNMP Manager Change This command allows changes to the configured SNMP Manager For SNMP v3 TRAPs an engine identifier can be optionally specified for use with a particular remote SNMP manager The engine identifier is configured with the ENGINE parameter If an ENGINE identifier is not specified then the system will use its default ENGINE identifier the value of which can be auto discovered and can be viewed using the SNMP Configuration command For most use cases the default ENGINE identifier should be used rather than configuring an explicit ENGINE ID with this command Syntax CNSMC MNGR I
24. DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Contents 1 OVGIVICW oiue ii avig ett nists eteae heen ae ee eet ed ad ee 14 Ted PMEFOCUCH OM ise cati celts cava cidaeasier bir ieia kid A wien T ee rises 14 121 1 Related nfonmationi c28 ccceeeieid incite es Revie ered aaa a Mere cas 15 LLZ Applicabile a eens berate E E ered eee eae 15 T2 Capacity ooann a anda acada taeda anladanh A 16 1 2 1 SS7G41 Common Capabilities eee eee tetera ee 16 1 2 2 SS7G41 Capacities SIU Mode cece netted 17 1 2 3 SS7G41 Capacities SWS Mode ice etter 17 2 Licensing Installation and Initial Configuration ccccccceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeneenees 19 2 1 Software LICensingssHss caiistveds etss ced A ERARE se EE beanie ena 19 2 1 1 Purchasing Software LICENSES cece eee eee eee ee ee ene eet e teeters 19 2 1 2 SUPPOKtEMILICCNSES inini eei ai rE oaae E A EIEE EOE EEEE EED 20 2 13 Cumulative LiG NSiMG isa ena e a Eia a EERE ER 21 21 4 Temporary Licenses ii cicecis ius sadisacentiedneerseiteesiarencieneeieiaieuehiberagni R EANN Ei 21 2 1 5 Evaluation Mode cece ninani ini ni o naia 22 22 JAnStallation pieren i n Wk wets beeen led ean E EPOE eee deeds 22 2 2 1 Connecting a VT100 Terminal ccc eee eee een anata eee 22 2 2 2 Connecting via Telnet rirerire sinrin riie e EEO EEEE DEE ai 23 2 2 3 Initial P Confi UratiON riirii naniii un nai eiiiai a 24 2 2 4 SoftWare Download rrr arnee aa u reren
25. Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access 286 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example MSHRP MSHRP PAGE 2 MSHRP PROFILE 2 MSHRP RESET Y Output Format MAP HLR Rx Services Measurements Page 1 of 2 MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD Rx_Send_Routing_Info_for_SM 0 0 01 29 16 Rx_Report_Delivery_SM 0 0 01 29 16 Rx_Atomic_Mobile_Term_TX_Req 0 0 01 29 16 Rx_Get_IMSI 0 0 01 29 16 Rx_Location_Request 3434 0 01 29 16 Rx_Subscriber_State_Reqs 1231 0 01 29 16 MAP HLR Rx Services Measurements Page 2 of 2 PROFILE MAP_ SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 Rx_Send_Routing_Info_for_ SM 0 0 01 29 16 0 Rx_Report_Delivery_SM 0 0 01 29 16 0 Rx_Atomic_Mobile_Term_TX_Req 0 0 01 29 16 0 Rx_Get_IMSI 0 0 01 29 16 0 Rx_Location_Request 3434 0 01 29 16 0 Rx_Subscriber State Reqs 1231 0 01 29 16 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with a MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 287 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 11 24 MSHTP MAP HLR Tx Measurements Command to display traffic measurements for Transmit MAP HLR Services Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP service When a profile is specified Page 2 measureme
26. SIGTRAN Link Measurement 0 cece cece eee eee ee eee eee teen eee ead 284 6 11 22MSSYP System MeaSureMentS c cece eee ee eee eee tenner e at eae e eae es 285 6 11 23 MSHRP MAP HLR Rx MeaSurementtS cceeeee etcetera 286 6 11 24MSHTP MAP HLR Tx Measurements cccecce cece ee eect eee eee nett eee en eenae nies 288 6 11 25 MSORP MAP MO SMS Rx Measurement cc cece eee e eee ee ete eee eaten ates 289 6 11 26MSOTP MAP MO SMS Tx Measurement cceeeee eee eee eee eee ea ees 290 6 11 27MSRTP MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile Measurements cceceeeeeeenteee ee en ees 291 6 11 28MSSPP MAP Subscriber Profiling Measurements 0 ceeeeeeee ee ee rre 292 6 11 29MSTRP MAP MT SMS Rx MeaSurementS cceceee eset teens eee eae teens eae eae eae 293 6 11 30MSTTP MAP MT SMS Tx Measurements c ceceee teens eee eee ne eat eee teen e eee e enna 295 6 11 31 MSUPP MAP USSD Measurement ccece eee eee entree etna teeta teat eae te ened 296 Reset Command Sirico eO etek T EAT EE neva E EE aE teense hia dein ad 297 6 12 1 RSBOI Restart Board Initiate sessssssrrrrrnrenrrrrrrnrirrursrrrrrrrrrsrnrrrrrrrrre 297 Contents 10 6 13 Status Commands ti iic eerie vei dees eae e et deel elated eae ese fia 298 6 13 1 STBOP Board Status iiei ate See ee i ee ee 299 6 13 2 STCGP Circuit Group Status ce ere teeta ed 299 6 13 3 STCRP SS7 Route Status 2 0
27. TUP SNMP Trap actions in the UP state Parameter Range ALL Any event when the object is in this state will result in a trap NONE No event when the object is in this state will result in a trap CREATE Configuration events resulting in a transition to this state will result in a trap CHANGE Change events in this state will result in a trap DESTROY Configuration change events in this state will result in a trap TWARNING SNMP Trap actions in the WARNING state Parameter Range ALL Any event when the object is in this state will result in a trap NONE No event when the object is in this state will result in a trap CREATE Configuration events resulting in a transition to this state will result in a trap CHANGE Change events in this state will result in a trap DESTROY Configuration change events in this state will result in a trap TXTPREF Whether the receipt of text is preferred Y over SMS network headers N TYPE Classification of the alarm into an alarm type from the following list communicationsAlarm 2 qualityOfServiceAlarm 3 processingErrorAlarm 4 equipmentAlarm 5 and environmentalAlarm 6 TZONE The timezone If set to UTC_ Offset the UTC_OFFSET parameter will be used to set the offset time from UTC If set to another value the local time will be set based on the city selected If UTC_Offset is used then automatic daylight saving time adjustments are not performed If
28. Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt IP Gateways gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Prerequisites If the IP gateway ID is specified it must already have been initiated Example IPGWP Output Format IPGW GATEWAY IPNW 0 172 28 148 1 24 DEFAULT 1 192 168 1 1 24 172 16 1 0 6 6 8 IPLGE IP Log End This command removes a rule to log specific IP data Syntax IPLGE IPLG Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt IP Log gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Security Access Prerequisites The IP Log ID has been initiated 226 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example IPLGE PLG 1 6 6 9 IPLGI IP Log Initiate This command defines a rule to log specific IP data Syntax PLGI 1PLG LGTYPE LGDATA Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt IP Log gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Security Access Prerequisites The IP Log ID has not been initiated Example PLGI 1PLG 1 LGTYPE SCTP 6 6 10 IPLGP IP Log Configuration This command displays display the type of data being output to the IP log Syntax PLGP Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt IP Log gt Configuration Applicability Operatin
29. rounded down to the nearest 1000 OOSDUR the total amount time the link was out of service in multiples of 100ms OOSDUR the total amount time the link was out of service in multiples of 100ms NOOS the number of times the link went out of service NDISCARD the number of messages due to be transmitted that were discarded PERIOD the time period over which these statistics have been gathered in hours minutes and seconds 6 11 19 MSSLP SS7 Link Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for SS7 links When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Note Page 1 and Page 2 Link statistics are reset using the RESET parameter Note Page 3 Link statistics report Link utilization For TDM links the percentage utilization is expressed as a percentage of the available bandwidth For M2PA links this figure is expressed as the number of link equivalents Syntax MSSLP RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Links gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSSLP MSSLP RESET Y 282 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format SS7 Link Measurements Page 1 of 3 LINK OOSDUR RXNACK RXMSU RXOCT TXMSU TXOCT RTXOCT NCONG PERIOD 0 0 0 375 8220 16320 124306 0 0 00 12 00 t 0 0 392 8624 17036 141860 0 0 00 12 00 SS7 link m
30. 3 and 4 are reserved 77 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 78 If it is necessary to match VPI VCI address combinations outside these ranges then the address bit masks can be rearranged provided that the maximum number of mask bits used is not exceeded This can result in matching non contiguous VCI or VPI address ranges For example VPI mask 0x09C will allow handling the following VPIs 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 128 132 136 140 144 148 152 and 156 In addition to the VPI VCI address mask requirements the following prerequisites should also be observed Non ATM signaling links cannot be associated with LIUs timeslots used by an ATM cell stream Up to 128 ATM signaling links can be associated with a SS7MD card MTP Signaling Link configuration is viewed using the CNSLP MMI command and its status and measurements read using the STSLP an MSSLP MMI commands After startup additional Signaling Links can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNSLI command Signaling Links are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNSLE MMI command 6 4 MTP_ROUTE MTP Route Synopsis The MTP_ROUTE command configures a route for use with one of more user parts Each remote signaling point must have a corresponding MTP_ROUTE entry in the configuration file which must be entered after the MTP_LINKSET command Using the lt flags gt and lt second_Is gt parameters th
31. 6 13 22STSWP System Software Status ccc cece een eee e eee eee e eee ee eae 316 6 13 23STSYP SystemiS tatusis a covert aed yee ie aie eee cape te 316 6 13 24STTDP TCAP Dialogue StatuS cee eee e eterna 317 6 13 25STTPP NTP Server Status rinan cece eter eee eee eee nee eee e ee 318 6 13 26STTRP TCAP Resource Status cece teeter ee eee eee e etter nent nein 319 6 13 27STUAP User Account StatuS asrau cece eee eee eee nent E a a oi 319 6 14 Command Parameters anoc ana eurini a n eee eases tenants 320 Configuration Guidelines 0c rennet ne net 367 Pads ONGIVIOW jc c ever Gides A nana se tendoe rasa teh role a aa kiead toutes Moa eda ded nee an thot ae ede 367 T2 IPs Port BONING wi tates eet pitas ican ets aint eet eed deel 367 7 3 Sharing Licensed Throughput Between Protocols and Networks eceeeeeeeee ee eee 368 7 4 Configuring Multiple Network Contexts 0 cc cecece eect eee teen e ee ea ene naa 368 7 4 1 Multiple Network SUPPOFt nett entered 368 7 4 2 Support for Multiple Local Point Codes cecececeee eee e eee e etna ea eaed 369 7 4 3 Protocol Handling for Multiple Network Contexts ccceceece eens eee ee 370 TAA RMM pirar aa hands deg ao a waded Ghote s E AA Maal radon Sina eae gee 371 TAD gt MU Poetic vecceaetes E eee ta eer ee a aa aed eae aaa 371 TAO IM BUA sce ict ett ica Ne Aen teeh ed Seth eet ath a MEER el dade itl gaa dental aad 371
32. 6 7 1 MAHRI MAHRC MAHRE MAP HLR Rx Profile 234 6 7 2 MAHRP MAP HLR Rx Profile Print sssssssssssrsessesrrnrrrserrrrrrnrrrrrrrrrrrerrrnrns 234 6 7 3 MAHTI MAHTC MAHTE MAP HLR Tx Profile lanac 235 6 7 4 MAHTP MAP HLR Tx Profile Print 00 ceee eect eee eee eee eater need 236 6 7 5 MAORI MAORC MAORE MAP MO SMS RX Profile lnc 237 6 7 6 MAORP MAP MO SMS Rx Profile Print ccececee eee eee eect teeta ea ener aed 237 6 7 7 MAOTI MAOTC MAOTE MAP MO SMS Tx Profile ccnn 238 6 7 8 MAOTP MAP MO SMS Tx Profile Print cee eeeeeee cere nets ernennen ea ed 239 6 7 9 MARTI MARTC MARTE MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile c eeeeee eee 240 6 7 10 MARTP MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile Print errereen 241 6 7 11 MASPI MASPC MASPE MAP Subscriber Profiling Profile 08 242 6 7 12 MASPP MAP Subscriber Profiling Profile Print ccecceee tees teense eee ened 242 6 7 13 MATRI MATRC MATRE MAP MT SMS Rx Profile nnc 243 6 7 14 MATRP MAP MT SMS Rx Profile Print cececeee eee eee teeta eater need 244 6 7 15 MATTI MATTC MATTE MAP MT SMS Tx Profile 245 6 7 16 MATTP MAP MT SMS Tx Profile Print ccecee eee ee nents ee eee eee eae ea ea ened 246 6 7 17 MAULI MAULC MAULE MAP Update Location cceeee cece nent eee teed 247 6 7 18 IPHNI IPHNE IP Host Configuration cece cece ee eee eee eee eee eee
33. 7 10 SIGTRAN M2PA Signaling 7 10 1 Overview The Signaling Server supports the SIGTRAN M2PA protocol compatible with IETF RFC 4165 M2PA peer to peer operation can be employed as the network transport layer providing services normally provided by MTP2 for SS7 signaling links SS7 signaling traffic can be conveyed over SIGTRAN network facing links to a signaling gateway or other signaling point employing M2PA In dual configuration an M2PA link can be used as the Signaling Server interlink to carry SS7 data between the two units Using the STN_LINK command you can configure up to 256 M2PA links The STN_LINK command should appear before the MTP_CONFIG command in the config txt file Having configured an M2PA link you can associate this with an SS7 link using the MTP_LINK command 7 10 2 M2PA License Before M2PA network facing links can be configured the unit must be equipped with an M2PA license as listed in Section 2 1 3 Temporary Licenses on page 15 The M2PA license is not required for configuration of M2PA interlinks employed in Signaling Server dual configuration With the license installed the CNSYP command will display the M2PA parameter set to Y Without a license the CNSYP command will not display the M2PA parameter 7 10 3 SS7 over M2PA An SS7 link is associated with the M2PA link using the MTP_LINK command SS7 MSUs will then be carried over SIGTRAN as opposed to MTP2 An SS7 link can only be associated with on
34. Evaluation Mode Signaling Server protocols are available on the unit for 1 hour in an unlicensed evaluation mode After this period the system will automatically re boot and return to normal operation supporting only the capabilities that are licensed on the system To activate an evaluation mode the unit should be restarted as follows MNRSI RESTART EVALUATION SYSTYPE SIU Or MNRSI RESTART EVALUATION SYSTYPE SWS The Evaluation mode alarm will be active whenever the system is operating in this mode 2 2 Installation Caution The Signaling Server should only be installed by suitably qualified service personnel Important safety and technical details required for installation are given in the appropriate system hardware manual In order to complete the installation of the Signaling Server unit proceed as follows 1 Optionally connect a VT100 terminal to the unit see Section 2 2 1 or connect to the system using telnet and default IP address see section Section 2 2 2 Set the IP addresses of the unit see Section 2 2 3 3 Check whether a software download and upgrade is required see Section 2 2 4 4 Install any additional protocol software option licenses that you may have purchased see Section 2 2 5 Check that the system is the correct operating mode SIU or SWS for the SS7G41 or DSH for the BorderNet DSH This is achieved using the MMI command CNSYP The resulting output s
35. SNMPUSER AUTH AUTHPASS PRI V PRI VPASS LABEL 217 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Users gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The DSMI Agent must be enabled If AUTH is specified the AUTHPASS must be provided If PRIV is specified then PRIVPASS must be provided PRIV and PRIVPASS cannot be specified if AUTH and AUTHPASS are not already specified Example CNUSI SNMPUSER 1 AUTH MD5 AUTHPASS aBcDeFgHiJ kL _LABEL user1 6 3 99 CNUSP SNMP User Configuration This commands displays configuration of SNMP V3 User Accounts Syntax CNUSP SNMPUSER Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Users gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Prerequisites If specified the user must be configured Example CNUSP SNMPUSER 3 CNUSP Output Format CNUSP SNMP User Configuration SNMPUSER AUTH AUTHPASS PRIV PRIVPASS LABEL t MD5 KKKKKKKK DES ee aoe ie ae eae userl 2 NONE NONE user2 6 4 Database Commands DBSVP Subscriber Database Service Configuration DBSVS Subscriber Database Service Change 218 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 4 1 DBSVP Subscriber Database Service Configuration This command d
36. This command defines a remote sub system known to the Signaling Server Signaling Server Each entry contains the signaling point code and sub system number Multiple SCCP_SSR entries may be included in the file The presence of an RSS command causes the SCCP to generate sub system test SST messages for the sub system Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCCP_RSS NC NCO SSRID SPC SSN OPTIONS 0 LABEL Example SCCP_RSS NC NC1 SSRID 4 SPC 1234 SSN 0x67 Parameters The SCCP_RSS command includes the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that the SSR is being configured for When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e SSRID A unique value in the range 0 to 2047 that is used to identify the SSR 512 SSRIDs are allowed per Network Context The same SSRID cannot be used in configuration of any other LSS RSP or RSS e SPC The point code where the remote sub system is implemented Note For correct operation lt remote_spc gt must always have its own SCCP_RSP entry in addition to any SCCP_RSS entries There must also be an MTP_ROUTE defined for this signaling point e SSN The remote sub system number as defined by the SCCP protocol 129 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands OPTIONS A 16 bit value where each bit enables or disables additional features of the remote sub system The meaning for ea
37. eect eee eee eee cee eee eee eee S tee 300 6 13 4 STDDP Disk Drive StatuS tener 301 6 13 5 STDBP Subscriber Database Service Status ccc cece eee eee eee eee ened 301 6 13 6 STDEP Circuit Group Device StatuS cece eee eee need 302 6 13 7 STDHP Status DTS Host Print cece eee teeter need 303 6 13 8 STFEP Flow Environment Status cece eee e nent eee ernie 304 6 13 9 STHPP Diameter Peer StatuS ccc cece een eet e need 305 6 13 10STHLP Host Link Statys iss a eterna 305 6 73 11 STI PP P Node StatuSicnice ch educa ata ie i es Gece 306 6 13 12STLCP Software License Capability Status cece eee eee eee eee eae 307 6 13 13STMLP SS7 Monitor Link Status cece te ened 308 6 13 14STNIP Network Interface Status cece eee e netted 309 6 13 15S 1TPCR PEM Status s osetia staan bee ease een E aad Anis ee 310 6 13 16STRAP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Status ccceeeee eect eee tees 311 6 13 17STRLP Remote Server Link StatuS c cece eee eee e eee teenie 312 6 13 18STSLP SS 7 Link Status pini i edad ended a A ANTEE aA Daa oE aaa 312 6 13 19STSRP SIGTRAN Route StatuS sssssssssirrrrrrrrrrrsrrrrrtrrrrrrrrrrrnsssrirrrrrrenns 313 6 13 20STSSP SCCP Subsystem Resource StatuS sssssseesssrrrrerrrrrsrrrrrrrrrrrrres 314 6 13 21STSTP SIGTRAN Signaling Link Status sssssesssssirsrresrrrrerrerrnrrrrrrrrernr 315
38. inconsistent command format Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax MTP_ROUTE NC NC0O C7RT DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 LABEL Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example MTP_ROUTE ROUTE 1 DPC 567 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0008 LABEL To_London Parameters The MTP_ROUTE command includes the following parameters NC SS7 Network Context This parameter identifies the SS7 network in which the route exists The Network Context must match that of the link set s in the route Supported values are NCO NCI NC2 or NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed e C7RT A unique value in the range 0 to one less than the number of routes supported to identify the MTP route e DPC The remote destination signaling point code for the route e LS1 The logical identity of the link set in the range 0 to one less than the maximum number of link sets supported This value is set for each configured link set in the MTP_LINKSET command UPMASK A 16 bit value with bit n in the range 3 to 15 set to allow the route to be used for messages with Service Indicator SI n For each user part supported the bit corresponding to the Service Indicator for that user part should be set For example to enable SCCP routing which uses an SI of 3 a value of 0x0008 should be used To enable both SCCP 3 and ISUP 5 a value of 0x0028 should be used e OPT
39. links The system has detected a failure of one or more or its cooling fans leading to inadequate airflow Replace the faulty fan s 42 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Alarm IDs Severity Description and Clearance Actions Continued CODE TITLE ID SEVERITY DESCRIPTION ALARM CLEARANCE ACTION 14 Fan warning FAN MAJ The system has detected either the failure of one of the cooling fans or that a fan is likely to fail The cooling will remain adequate during this condition but the fan should be replaced at the next convenient opportunity Check that airflow ducts are free from blockage If the fault persists replace cooling fans 16 Temperature 0 CRT The internal temperature is above a preset threshold indicating that either an internal fault or failure of the cooling arrangements Inspection should take place immediately Check for obstructions to cooling vents check that the ambient temperature is within the specified range check operation of the cooling fans and conduct a general inspection to identify the cause 17 Host link fail HOSTID CRT Communications failure has occurred SIU Host Ethernet link has failed Check configuration connectivity and remote equipment 18 Partner link 0 CRT Communications failure has occurred fail the Inter Signaling Server link over Ethernet to the partner unit has failed Check configuration connectivity and
40. maximum of 5MB with support being provided for up to 10 files When configured trace messages will be logged to files of the name trace log in the syslog trace sub directory of the user account Just as event alarm and MMI logs logs of these files are limited to be a maximum of 5MB with support being provided for up to 10 files Finally trace messages for M3UA and MTP3 may also be logged in PCAP file format producing files of the name trace pcap in the same manner as above PCAP logging is selected using the TRACEFMT parameter in the CNSYx MMI command Upon restart the Signaling Server also backs up the existing system configuration and generates additional diagnostic files These files together with the maintenance and optionally trace log files may aid the support channel in the analysis of events and errors occurring on the Signaling Server These logs can be collected together into a single file using the MNSSI MMI command This command is also available on the Operations table on the Web Interface Once executed a copy of these log files together with a snapshot of the system status will be stored in a snapshot tgz file in the ftpuser ftp account directory The file can then be copied of the system using FTP or SFTP for offline inspection 39 Chapter 4 System Management 4 3 Automatic MMI Logging To allow for audit of user MMI sessions all user dialogues are logged to a rolling log file to permit subsequent revi
41. 12 35 33 4 0 0 01 00 00 3 2 3 53 55 4 0 0 0 01 00 00 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e PORTID Port ID as configured in config txt file e PCM PCM on a board e FMSLIP Frame Slip count e OUTSYN Out sync transitions e ERRSEC Errored Seconds count e SEVSEC Severely Errored Seconds count 279 Chapter 6 Management Commands BITERR A count of the actual number of bit errors detected by the framer device for the LIU The precise meaning of this parameter varies depending on the operating mode of the framer For El operating modes it is the number of errors detected in the frame alignment word For T1 interfaces operating in D3 D4 frame format it is the number of framing bit errors For T1 interfaces operating in ESF format it is the number of CRC6 errors Note In general the user should use the errored_seconds and severely_errored_ seconds parameters instead since these parameters provide normalized values that have the same meaning for all modes of operation e CV A count of all the line code violations detected on the interface e PERIOD Time since measurements on the port were last reset 6 11 16 MSRAP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for Remote Application Servers When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSRAP RAS RESET Web Management Location System Administration
42. 123456 ORGADDR 24333 MAOTE PROFI LE 0 6 7 8 MAOTP MAP MO SMS Tx Profile Print Synopsis Command to display the configuration associated with MAP Transmit MO SMS service profiles Syntax MAOTP PROFI LE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MO SMS Tx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MAOTP PROFI LE 0 Output Format MAP MO SMS Tx Profile PROFILE NAME MOSMS_TRANS_0 NC NCO MSCTON International MSCNP ISDN MSCADDR 666666666666 ORGTON International ORGNP ISDN ORGADDR 666666666666 239 Chapter 6 Management Commands DSTSCTON International DSTSCNP ISDN DSTSCADDR 666666666666 RCOPT N OPTIONS 0x00000000 RIID 0 6 7 9 MARTI MARTC MARTE MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile Synopsis Commands to initiate change and end configurations associated with MAP Ready for SM service profiles Syntax MARTI PROFILE NAME SCADDR HLRADDR NC SCTON J SCNP HLRTON HLRNP RCOPT NSUBP RIID MARTC PROFI LE NAME SCTON SCNP SCADDR HLRTON HLRNP HLRADDR RCOPT NSUBP RIID MARTE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt Ready for SM gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service
43. 133 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands e OPTIONS Specifies TCAP protocol options as defined for the TCAP Configuration Request message in the TCAP Programmer s Manual DLG_ HUNT The hunt mode used in the case of multiple TCAP hosts to determine which TCAP group is selected whenever a new incoming dialog arrives It should be set to 0 1 or 2 for the following hunt modes 0 Cyclic Selection Each new incoming dialog is allocated to the next TCAP group 1 Load Balanced Selection Each new incoming dialog is allocated to the group with the least number of active incoming dialogs 2 Sequential Selection Each new incoming dialog is allocated to the group containing the first inactive incoming lt dialogue_id gt e ADDR_FMT The format of messages used by TCAP Possible values are 0 The address format is determined by the setting of bit 1 of the lt options gt field If bit 1 of the lt options gt field is set to indicate ANSI TCAP PDU formats then ANSI format 24 bit point codes are selected If bit 1 of the lt options gt field is not set ITU T TCAP PDU formats and 14 bit point codes are selected 1 ITU T format 14 bit point codes 2 ITU T format 24 bit point codes 3 ANSI format 14 bit point codes 4 ANSI format 24 bit point codes Note 16 bit point codes are not supported 5 13 2 TCAP_NC_CONFIG TCAP Network Context Configuration Synopsis The TCAP_NC_CONFIG command
44. 18 32 21 NTP Y OFFSET 5 30 6 3 88 CNTMP Trace Masks Configuration This command displays the current trace masks and whether or not the tracing is enabled Syntax CNTMP Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Trace gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNTMP Output Format MODULE IMASK OMASK MMASK ACTIVE MTP 0x00000001 0x00000001 Ox0001fffe N ISUP 0x00000001 0x00000001 0x00000038 Y 6 3 89 CNTMS Configuration Trace Mask Set This command activates or deactivates tracing of different protocols and sets the associated trace masks Configured values are maintained after system reset The IMASK OMASK and MMASK parameters determine which Input Output or Management messages are traced by the module Default IMASK OMASK or MMASK values are restored using the DEFAULT token 212 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Note Definitions of the IMASK OMASK and MMASK trace mask parameters for a specific protocol are documented in the associated protocol programmer s manual By default when tracing is activated on the SIU messages are logged to file in the syslog subdirectory of the siuftp account This log is maintained as a rolling log of up to tem 5MB files containing trace messages The most recent trace log file will have the name trace log the next most recent trace log 1 and then trace log 2
45. 4 5 NCO 0x11 17476 0 0x001104 55 1023 NC1 0x11 21845 0 0x001104 00 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 22 CNGLE SIGTRAN Gateway List End This command removes an SIGTRAN Gateway List Note SIGTRAN Gateway Lists are dynamically removed by first deleting the Gateway List from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the Gateway List from the system Syntax CNGLE GLI D Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Gateways gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN Gateway List ID has been initiated The SIGTRAN Gateway List is not present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN Gateway List is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNGLE GLI D 1 6 3 23 CNGLI SI GTRAN Gateway List I nitiate This command adds a new SIGTRAN Gateway List Note SIGTRAN Gateway Lists are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system 17
46. 5 SIU_DUAL DUAL SIU Configuration Synopsis Command to configure the operating mode MODEA or MODEB and remote IP address when operating as a dual redundant pair of Signaling Servers This command should be omitted if the Signaling Server is not in a dual resilient configuration When the command is not present in config txt the parameters may also be configured via MMI When configured using config txt MMI configuration is disabled Configuration that has been configured using the command in config txt will persist after it has been removed from the file and the system restarted In this circumstance MMI can be used to change configuration Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SIU_DUAL MODE REMOTE_TPADDR Example SIU_DUAL MODE MODEA REMOTE_IPADDR 192 268 0 2 63 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Parameters This command includes the following parameters MODE This parameter is used to select the operating mode of the unit and should be set to MODEA or MODEB When two units are deployed in a dual resilient configuration one unit should operate as MODEA and the other as MODEB Changes to the parameter value require a system restart in order to take effect e REMOTE_ I PADDR The IP address of the partner Signaling Server The IP Address may be either an I Pv4 IP address or an IPTOKEN String configured to map to an PV4 or IPV6 Address Signaling Server dual configuration is viewed usi
47. 6 SCCP_GTT_PATTERN Global Title Translation Pattern cceeeeee eres 123 5 10 7 SCCP_RSP SCCP Remote Signaling Points usasse eee tetrad 126 5 10 8 SCCP_LSS SCCP Local Sub SySteEMS cece cece teeta eee a eae ed 127 5 10 9 SCCP_RSS SCCP Remote Sub SySteEMS cceccce eee eee 129 5 10 10SCCP_CONC_SSR SCCP Concerned Sub Systems Configuration 130 5 11 DTS Configuration Commands cc enna ea etre nae 131 5 12 The DTS configuration commands include the following ceeeeee ee eeeeeee eaten ees 131 5 12 1 DTS_CONFIG Distributed Transaction Server Configuration 131 5 12 2 DTS_ROUTE Configuration DTS Route Initiate 132 5 13 TCAP Configuration COMMANAS cece een teen Enna 133 5 13 1 TCAP_CONFIG TCAP Configuration ceceeeee ee ee rere ee ee nett ete een ieee tated 133 5 13 2 TCAP_NC_CONFIG TCAP Network Context Configuration eeee 134 5 13 3 TCAP_CFG_DGRP TCAP Dialog Group Configuration eeeeeeeee eee ee 135 5 13 4 TCAP_TIMER TCAP Timer Configuration ccecceeee eens eee e eee e neta eee ened 136 5 14 MAP Configuration COMMAMNGS cc enna e ae ne nena 137 5 14 1 MAP_CONFIG MAP Configuration citer rere iinet 137 5 14 2 MAP_NC_CONFIG MAP Configuration ccceeeeeee etre renter reer renee need 138 5 15 1541 Configuration Commands cece tenner nena 138 5 16 INA
48. Administration gt MAP Services gt HLR gt HLR Rx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access 234 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example MAHRP PROFI LE 0 Output Format MAP HLR Rx Profile PROFILE NAME HLRADDR_RECV_O NC NCO HLRTON International HLRNP ISDN HLRADDR 666666666666 RCOPT N OPTIONS 0x00000000 6 7 3 MAHTI MAHTC MAHTE MAP HLR Tx Profile Synopsis Commands to initiate change and end the configuration associated with MAP Transmit HLR service profiles Syntax MAHTI PROFI LE NAME HLRADDR NC HLRNP HLRTON RCOPT OPTIONS RIID MAHTC PROFI LE NAME HLRNP HLRTON HLRADDR RCOPT OPTIONS RIID MAHTE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt HLR gt HLR Tx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service The HLR address must be unique within the network context 235 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example MAHTI PROFILE 0 NAME HLRADDR_TRANS_0 HLRADDR 32331545 MAHTC PROFI LE 0 HLRADDR 32331545 MAHTE PROFI LE 0 6 7 4 MAHTP MAP HLR Tx Profile Print Synopsis Command to display the configuration associated with MAP Transmit HLR service profiles Syntax MAHTP PROFI LE Web Man
49. Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Output Format IP Web Service Configuration WEBSERV HTTPPORT HTTPSPORT HTTPSCERT MGMT 80 443 NONE WSAPI 81 442 NONE 6 6 19 IPWSS Configuration Web Service Set This command configures parameters for web services It allows HTTP and HTTPS Port numbers and the type of Certificate for HTTPS to be specified Syntax IPWSS WEBSERV MGMT WSAPI I HTTPPORT HTTPSPORT HTTPSCERT 232 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Web Servers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Example IPWSS WEBSERV MGMT HTTPPORT 0 HTTPSPORT 443 6 7 MAP Services Commands MAHRI MAHRC MAHRE MAP HLR Rx Profile MAHTI MAHTC MAHTE MAP HLR Tx Profile MAHTP MAP HLR Tx Profile Print MAORI MAORC MAORE MAP MO SMS Rx Profile MAORP MAP MO SMS Rx Profile Print MAOTI MAOTC MAOTE MAP MO SMS Tx Profile MAOTP MAP MO SMS Tx Profile Print MARTI MARTC MARTE MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile MARTP MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile Print MASPI MASPC MASPE MAP Subscriber Profiling Profile MASPP MAP Subscriber Profiling Profile Print MASPP MAP Subscriber Profiling Profile Print
50. DSH Syntax STN_RSGLIST GLID SNRT RSG OPTIONS 0 Examples SSTN_RSGLIST GLID 0 SNRT 1 RSG 1 OPTIONS 0x0001 STN_RSGLIST GLID 1 SNRT 2 RSG 1 OPTIONS 0x0001 STN_RSGLIST GLID 2 SNRT 3 RSG 1 OPTIONS 0x0001 Parameters The STN_RSGLIST command has the following parameters e GLID Logical identifier for a SIGTRAN Route to Signaling Gateway relationship The valid range is 0 6399 SNRT Logical reference for a SIGTRAN Route The valid range is 0 255 e RSG Remote Signaling Gateway A Signaling Gateway can be associated with a route only once The Signaling Gateway must have at least 1 snlink associated with it The valid range is 0 255 e OPTIONS This is a 16 bit value used to specify run time options Bit 0 When set the Signaling Server will consider the route via the specified server to be available without waiting for a destination available DAVA message All other bits are reserved for future use SIGTRAN Route Gateway List configuration is viewed using the CNGLP MMI command After startup additional Route Gateway Lists can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNGLI command Route Gateway Lists are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNGLE MMI command Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 7 8 STN_LBIND SIGTRAN Local Bind Configuration Synopsis This command associates the local application ser
51. EE EEE EEN EE EEEE EEEN RERET ESPEN 25 2 2 5 Updating System Software ssssessrssssrssrerrrserrtstrstrerstrertrneransrrnrirnernerere 25 2 2 6 Installing Software Licenses sssssrsssersrrsrsrssrnrrererrnrrrseretsrrerrenerrerererrene 27 2 3 CONMQUKAUON enren E E EIn ahi a AE E E DRENE 28 3 Access Control and Security urute tinutin tunar nnr rn n ArAAENA NEE AEEAEEEN NEE EEEEE EEEn 29 Sil CONCEDES seciveniscisseniateaniatiensbactidansni E A E R EA E EEEE Rennik 29 3 2 Systemi POl Cy tasinssswnese idea pr n R E AA a A eed eneedaene 29 3 3 Access CONO ssrin ea agin EE EEE E A A 29 34 Access RIGNKS sausicdatentsic arte niievduactdeasianned A E A A A A E A EA 29 3 4 1 User AccOUNt Mana gemMents s ssrseeiissa rnini mnn nia E TEE 30 3 4 2 User Access Protiles ii csccccisacresiiayeadiieidea eN a a a 30 39 SECUN snae A E A Ea AEAT a ETO AED 31 35 1 HTTP ACCESS iria naa A T AEAEE A EAA 31 332 Firewall ssenari e E lax aeniatnin eine eds vies aoen 31 353 SSH E se a as vat ea ie ae Rae eee i ee 32 3 5 4 Configuring Public Key Authentication for SSH cecceeee cece ee eee teeta e etna 32 3 5 5 SSH Tunneling for RSI s cicsapsiaceees isada entidaceanec te A AA 33 4 System Management icici ciscsciscciccseetesstes EANAN E A EDA a TAAA ERA EE Dai 35 4 1 Web Interface susina sn ea E R a a E a N N EARNS 35 4 1 1 DSH Flow Management Menu s sssssrssssssrrrrerrerersrrnrsrsernnrererrnnrrrerersrrnrrerera 37 4 2 D
52. ID System Reference 0 Contact ition ID N re Log FILE e Format DUAL Share A Share 25 Configuration Status Stats MNR O MAJ 8 CRT 5 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The Status bar provides a summary of the system status and includes the system ID the current time on the Signaling Server and a count of the number of Minor Major and Critical Alarms On the Navigation and Control bar there are a number of entries that provide the following functionality System Administration The System Administration field allows a user to navigate to a particular object such as PCMs SIGTRAN links etc which when selected will change the page to a table presenting configuration status and measurements where available Session Options The session options allow the user activate deactivate the following particular capabilities for the lifetime of a session Help When activated hovering the mouse above any command parameter will result in a popup help window offering further information Compressed Format By default parameter names are longer and more easily understandable than the MMI equivalents Setting compressed format changes the names to the MMI version Files When activated a new element on the Navigates and control bar is created files Once active if a user has permission to read the ftp user directory they can then use the files menu to navigate to a particular file su
53. IPFWP IP Firewall Configuration cece eee ee eee eee eee e nena ened 224 6 6 5 IPGWE IP Gateway End ec netted 225 6 6 6 IPGWI IP Gateway Initiate 0 0 eee ened 225 6 6 7 IPGWP IP Gateway Configuration cccceceee teeter eee e eee eater 226 6 0 8 PLOGE I PALOGsENds kain a a eanal tong atskeretas eee a Ra ENEA ETE 226 6 6 9 PLGI FP Log linitidte icc ew neta eis ie Ea eee Na 227 6 6 10 IPLGP IP Log Configuration c cece cece nee te eee nena eee ened 227 6 6 11 IPNIC IP Network Interface Configuration Change cececeeeeeeeeeee teens 228 6 6 12 IPNIE IP Network Interface Configuration End cccceceeeee sete eee eee eae 229 6 6 13 IPNII IP Network Interface Configuration ccccece cece eee ee teeta eee ee eae 229 6 6 14 IPNIP Network Interface Configuration cece eeeee eect eee ee eee teen e teen ed 230 6 6 15 IPHNTKE IP Host NameToken Configuration End cceceeee eee eree 230 6 6 16 IPHNIPTKI IP Host NameToken Configuration cececceeeee ee eee eee ee en ee 231 6 6 17 IPHNIPTKP IP Host NameToken Configuration cccecceeeeee ee eee ee ee ee en ed 231 6 6 18 IPWSP IP Web Server Configuration c cceceeeee cece erent eee nett tena a ened 232 6 6 19 IPWSS Configuration Web Service Set cc cece eee eee teeta eae ee neta 232 MAP Services COmmands sss teri a akea a aa aa ber an ei d taidkd Motes 233
54. LOADAVG1 28 81 LOADAVG5 2 28 LOADAVG15 1 35 ALMSYS 1 ALMPCM ALMSIG ALMCLA2 ALMCLA3 0 1 ALMCLA1 2 0 0 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows 6 13 Thi CPU A string identifying the CPU type and speed MEMORY The amount of RAM in the system UPTIME The length of time the application software has been running NRESTART The number of times the system has restarted since factory installation LOADAVG1 The load average measurement taken over 1 minute LOADAVGS5 The load average measurement taken over 5 minutes LOADAVG15 The load average measurement taken over 15 minutes ALMSYS The number of system alarms ALMPCM The number of PCM alarms SIG The number of signaling alarms ALMCLA1 The number of minor alarms ALMCLA2 The number of major alarms ALMCLA3 The number of critical alarms 24 STTDP TCAP Dialogue Status s command allows the user to read the status of TCAP Syntax STTDP DLGID RANGE Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt TCAP Dialogs gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STTDP DLGI D 122 RANGE 2 317 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format TCAP Dialogue Status DLGID DHA TSM DCS INVK LTRID RTRID 123 ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE 5 0000C040 0000C080 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows DHA TCAP dialog handler st
55. Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MT SMS Rx gt Configuration 243 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service The service center address must be unique within the network context The profile cannot be ended if it is still associated with MAP Update Location configuration Example MATRI PROFILE 0 NAME MTSMS_RECV_0 SCADDR 123456789 MATRC PROFILE 0 SCADDR 123456789 MATRE PROFI LE 0 6 7 14 MATRP MAP MT SMS Rx Profile Print Synopsis Command to display the system configurations associated with MAP Receive MT SMS service profiles Syntax MATRP PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MT SMS Rx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MATRP PROFILE 0 Output Format MAP MT SMS Rx Profile PROFILE 0 NAME MTSMS_RECV_0O NC NCO SCTON International SCNP ISDN 244 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 SCADDR 666666666666 TXTPREF Y RCOPT N OPTIONS 0x00000000 6 7 15 MATTI MATTC MATTE MAP MT SMS Tx Profile Synopsis Commands to initiate change and end configurations associated with MAP Transmit MT SMS service profiles Syntax MATTI PROFI LE NAME SCADDR ORGADDR NC SCTON S
56. MI MTP MT MT MT SS7 Link Configura MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE LINKSET REF SLC BPOS MTP_LINK LINK 0 IFTYPE TDM MTP_LINK LINK 1 IFTYPE TDM MTP route Configura MTP_ROUTE NC NCO C7RT MTP_ROUTE C7RT 0 DPC 300 1 MTP_ROUTE C7RT 1 DPC 500 1 MTP_ROUTE C7RT 2 DPC 600 1 380 CONFIG P_LINKSI tion tion SS7 Link Set Configuration ET NC NCO LINKSET OPC APC NLINKS 2 SSF 0x8 OPTIONS 0 LABEL P_LINKSET LINKSET 0 OPC 300 APC 300 NLINKS 1 OP P_LINKSET LINKSET 1 OPC 300 APC 500 NLINKS 1 OP1 TIONS 0x8000 LABEL To_Partner TIONS 0x0000 LABEL To_Network LINKSET 0 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 1 ST LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 2 ST BLINK STREAM TS OPTIONS 0x00000006 LABEL DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 LS1 0 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0000 1 J REAM 3 TS 1 OPTIONS 0x00000006 REAM 0 TS 16 OPTIONS 0x00000006 LABEL LABEL To_Partner LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0001 LS2 0 LABEL To_DPC500 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0001 LS2 0 LABEL 1 To_DPC600 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Figure 6 Example Configuration to an Adjacent STP Pair Single Point Code Point Link Set id 1 Code 400 Inter SIU Link Set ry 1 link_id 1 sl
57. MNMODE The mode of operation for a Node within a Multi Node cluster The parameter takes the following values STANDALONE System operating as a Standalone Node MASTER System operating as Master of a Multi Node Cluster SEC_MASTER System operating as a Secondary Master of a Multi Node Cluster GROUP_MEMBER System operating as a Group Member of a Multi Node Cluster e IPHOST_NAME A name that is used in a system configuration to represent an Pv4 IPv6 address 61 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 62 4 4 SIU_HOSTS SIU Host Settings Configuration Synopsis Command to configure settings for SIU hosts It is used to specify the number of hosts that the Signaling Server will configure and activate as well as the host backup mode the minimum number of hosts and the default management host When the command is not present in config txt the parameters may also be configured via MMI When configured using config txt MMI configuration is disabled Configuration that has been configured using the command in config txt will persist after it has been removed from the file and the system restarted In this circumstance MMI can be used to change configuration Applicability SIU SWS Syntax SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 0 SIU HOSTS NUM_HOSTS BACKUP_HOST OPTIONS MIN_HOSTS DMHOST Examples SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 0 SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 10 BACKUP_HOST NONE OPTIONS 0 MIN_HOSTS 1 DMHOST 0 Parameters The SIU_HOSTS co
58. MODULE Protocol module name Parameter Range MTP M3UA ISUP SCCP DTS TCAP 1S41 INAP MAP MSL WSI 343 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued MTP2_TIM_TBL MTP2 Timer table Parameter Range ALL 8 Setting applies to all MTP2 timer tables ITU 0 Setting only applies to the MTP2 ITU T 64k link timer table ANSI64K 1 Setting only applies to the MTP2 ANSI 64k link timer table ANSI56K 2 Setting only applies to the MTP2 ANSI 56k link timer table ITU48K 3 Setting only applies to the MTP2 ITU T 48k link timer table ANSIT1 4 Setting only applies to the MTP2 ANSI T1 link timer table ANSIE1 5 Setting only applies to the MTP2 ANSI E1 link timer table ITUT1 6 Setting only applies to the MTP2 ITU T T1 link timer table ITUE1 7 Setting only applies to the MTP2 ITU T E1 link timer table MWS Whether Y or not N the user has Management web server access NA Network Appearance Parameter Range Number between 0 to 4294967295 NASP The number of ASP SIGTRAN Links required in load sharing mode Parameter Range Number between 0 to 256 NC Network context NCO to NC3 If not specified default NC is considered which is NCO Parameter Range NCO Network Context 0 NC1 Network Context 1 NC2 Network Context 2 NC3 Network Context 3 344 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 T
59. MRDEI Message Router Destination Initiate MRDEP Message Router Destination Configuration MROGE Message Router Origin Configuration MROGI Message Router Origin Configuration MROGP Message Router Origin Configuration MRRKI Message Router Routing Key Initiate MRRKE Message Router Routing Key End MRRKI Message Router Routing Key Initiate MRRKP Message Router Routing Key Configuration 6 10 1 MRCEE Message Router Concerned Entity End The command removes a new Concerned Entity Note Configuration may be dynamically removed by 1 Deleting a configuration command MRF_CE entry from the config txt file 2 Executing the MRCEE MMI command to unload it from the system Syntax MRCEE CONCID 255 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Concerned Entity gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The Concerned Entity has been initiated The Concerned Entity is not present in the config txt file The Concerned Entity is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Concerned Entity is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config tx
60. MTP TRANSFER REQ intended for a MTP or M3UA network the message should be sent to a network specific Resilient MTP Manager RMM module rather than directly to MTP3 or M3UA The RMM module in turn will ensure that the message is routed to the network via local MTP3 M3UA when available or the MTP3 M3UA on the partner Signaling Server if no local route is available The per Network Context RMM modules are NCO 0x32 NC1 OxC2 NC2 0xE2 NC3 OxF2 Applicability SIU Syntax MTP_USER_PART lt NC gt lt SI gt lt USER_ID gt Example P_USER_PART 0x0a 0x2d P_USER_PART NCO 0x0a 0x2d MT MT 84 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Parameters The MTP_USER_PART command includes the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context within which this service indicator to user part association is to apply Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed e SI The service indicator for the user supplied user part in the range 3 to 15 e USER_ID The module ID of the user process that receives MTP transfer indications with the specified service indicator value 5 6 9 MONITOR_LINK Monitor Link Synopsis The MONITOR_LINK command allows the user to configure a signaling resource e g blink to monitor signaling operating between two external Switches The type of interface being listened to is identified by the mon
61. Maintenance Inhibit Initiate command before removing and replacing the disk with a blank unformatted disk Refer to hard disk drive removal instructions in the Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Hardware Manual Once the disk has been replaced it should be activated using the MNINE Maintenance Uninhibit Initiate command at which time the system will attempt to perform a synchronization function copying all software to the newly installed disk drive The disk unavailable alarm will persist until both disk drives are synchronized The disk unavailable alarm will persist even if a failed disk drive is removed and not replaced Spare hard disk drives for the SS7G41 system are available as on orderable part Refer to the Dialogic DSI SS7G41 Signaling Servers Product Data Sheet navigate from the following for part number information http www dialogic com products signalingip_ss7components signaling_servers_and_gateways htm Important Although the RAID management software has been designed to be robust it is important to follow the removal and replacement procedures described above in order for RAID array hard disk drive integrity Warning USB storage devices should not be connected to the Signaling Server during hard disk drive removal and replacement Verify that all attached USB storage devices are removed before performing HDD removal replacement and re activation Disk drive replacement should be performed during a sc
62. Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Routes gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSCRP MSCRP RESET VY Output Format ot a e RXOCT TXMSU TXOCT PERIOD 0 0 0 375 8220 16320 124306 00 12 00 T 0 0 392 8624 17036 141860 00 12 00 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows C7RT SS7 route OOSDUR Duration that the route was not in service This field is not currently supported NOOS Number of times the route went out of service RXMSU Number of message signaling units octets received RXOCT Number of signaling Information Field SIF and Service Information Octet SIO octets received TXMSU Number of message signaling units octets transmitted TXOCT Number of SIF and SIO octets transmitted PERIOD The measurement period 6 11 4 MSDBP Subscriber Database Service Measurements This command displays measurements associated with Subscriber Database Services Syntax MSDBP RESET Y 269 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt Subscriber Database gt Services gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSDBP Output Format Subscriber Database Service Measurements DBSVCID DBSVCTYPE NSERV CURSERV PEAKSERV NS5M NS1H NS1D NCONG NFAIL COUNT1 COUNT2 PERIOD 0 MNP 0 2 150 5 7 1501 5 4000 200 00 12 00 The meaning of each field
63. NC1 NC2 and NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed TIMID A text identifier for the timer to be configured It should be set to one of the following Tack Tr Tdaud Tbeat TSEC The timer value specified in seconds TMSEC The timer value specified in milliseconds 102 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Any timers not explicitly configured continue will be set to the values shown in the following table Mnemonic Default Granularity M2PA Timeout Tack 2s 100ms Peer response timeout Tr 1s 100ms Recovery timer for inactive ASPs Tdaud 30s 1s DAUD generation timer Tbeat 30s 1s M3UA heartbeat timer 5 8 Message Router Configuration Commands The ISUP commands include e MRF_OG Message Router Origin Configuration e MRF_DE Message Router Destination Configuration e MRF_RK Message Router Routing Key Configuration e MRF_CP Message Router Custom Profile Configuration e MRF_CE Message Router Concerned Entity 5 8 1 MRF_OG Message Router Origin Configuration Synopsis The MRF_OG command initiates a Message Router Origin An Origin identifies the point from which an incoming message is received An Origin is specified by the DOMAIN Application Server Network or User Part Network Context and Service Indicator Each origin must be assigned a Routing Key table identifier to indicate which set of Routing Keys
64. Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNSTE SNLINK 1 6 3 81 CNSTI SIGTRAN Link Initiate This command adds a new SIGTRAN link Note SIGTRAN links are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNSTI SNLINK Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN link has not been initiated The SIGTRAN link is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN link is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNSTI SNLINK 1 6 3 82 CNSTP SIGTRAN Link Configuration This command displays the configuration of SIGTRAN links Syntax CNSTP SNLINK J SNTYPE PAGE 208 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt Software gt System Software gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNSTP Output Format SIGTRAN Link Configuration Page 1 of 2 SNLINK SNTYPE RIP1 RIP2 LIPL LIP2 LABEL M3UA 10 22 131 1 1
65. PADDR TPORT TFORMAT TCOM JI SNMPUSER ENGI NE LABEL Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Managers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access 199 Chapter 6 Management Commands Prerequisites The DSMI agent must be enabled The manager must be configured If an SNMP V3 user is specified the user must already be defined Engine can only be specified if the user is set or has been previously set TFORMAT can only be set to a value other than NONE if the user and engine are not set TFORMAT must be set to NONE if the user is set A manager cannnot be changed to or from SNMP V3 Example CNSMC MNGR 1 ENGINE 0a0bccff 110d0e99 6 3 69 CNSME Configuration SNMP Manager End This command removes SNMP manager configuration Syntax CNSME MNGR Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Managers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The DSMI agent must be enabled The manager must be configured 6 3 70 CNSMI Configuration SNMP Manager Initiate This command allows the administrator to define up to 32 TRAP destinations i e remote SNMP manager stations Each manager is defined by its IP address Additionally the type of TRAP to be dispatched to the SNMP manager is specified with
66. Range G704 1 E1 double frame E1 only CRC4 2 E1 CRC4 multiframe E1 only F4 3 F4 4 frame multiframe T1 only D3D4 4 D3 D4 Yellow alarm bit 2 in each channel T1 only ESF 7 ESF Yellow alarm in data link channel T1 only SLC96 8 F72 SLC96 72 frame multiframe T1 only J1 9 J1 frame format The LIU type must be T1 329 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued FTP Whether Y or not N the user has FTP and Telnet over SSH access FTPSER FTP Server access Set to Y to allow access or N to disable access GATEWAY Address of IP gateway Set to 0 0 0 0 to indicate that no gateway is present Parameter Range IP Address of the form w x y z where w x y and z are between 0 255 GID The unique logical identifier of the circuit group within the SIU This parameter is in the range 0 to one less than the maximum number of circuit groups that SUP processes as set by the parameter in the ISUP configuration command Parameter Range Number between 0 to 2047 GLID Identifier that associates a Remote Signaling Gateway with a SIGTRAN Route Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65279 GTAID Identifier for a Global Title Address Parameter Range Number between 0 to 1023 GTPID Identifier for a Global Title Pattern Parameter Range Number between 0 to 1023 GTTSRC Identifier for the source to which the Global Title Translati
67. Range Hex number between 0 to ffffffff MMI PORT MMI Port Identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 4 MNGR A logical reference for an External SNMP Manager Parameter Range Number between 1 to 31 MNGR_IPADDR SNMP Manager IP address Parameter Range An IP address entered as one of the following An PV4 Address An PV6 Address MNGT_HOST The Host ID for management messages Parameter Range Number from 0 to 127 MNID The Node ID for nodes within a Multi Node cluster Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued MNMODE The mode of operation for a Node within a Multi Node cluster The parameter takes the following values STANDALONE System operating as a Standalone Node MASTER System operating as a Master of Mutli Node Cluster SEC_MASTER System operating as a Secondary Master of a Multi Node Cluster GROUP_MEMBER System operating as a Group Member of Multi Node Cluster MODE This parameter is used to select the operating mode of the unit A unit that is operating as a standalone unit should be operated in A mode When two units are used in a dual resilient configuration one unit should operate in A mode and the other should operate in B mode Changes to the parameter value require a system restart in order to take effect Parameter Range MODEA System operating in A Mode MODEB System operating in B Mode
68. SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 3 39 CNLSE SS7 Link Set End This command removes an SS7 Link Set Note SS7 Link Sets are dynamically removed by first deleting the SS7 Link Set from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the SS7 Link Set from the system Syntax CNLSE LINKSET Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Link Sets gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SS7 Link Set has been initiated The SS7 Link Set is not present in the config txt file An MTP linkset cannot be removed if it contains MTP links or is used on any MTP route There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SS7 Link Set is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNLSE LINKSET 1 6 3 40 CNLSI SS7 Link Set I nitiate This command adds a new SS7 Link Set Note SS7 Link Sets are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNLSI LINKSET Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Link Sets gt Configuration 181 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Mode
69. SSRID SSR NC Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt SCCP SSRs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNSSP Output Format SCCP Subsystem Resource Configuration SSRID NC SSR SPC SSN USER_ID OPTIONS PCMASK LSSPROT RIID LABEL 1 NCO LSS 8 Oxld 0x00000 MAP 2 NCO RSP 16381 0x00000 0x00000000 0 To_SGW_RSP See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt commands SCCP_LSS SCCP_RSS and SSCP_RSP for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 80 CNSTE SIGTRAN Link End This command removes an SIGTRAN link Note SIGTRAN links are dynamically removed by first deleting the SIGTRAN link from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the SIGTRAN link from the system Syntax CNSTE SNLINK Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN link has been initiated The SIGTRAN link is not present in the config txt file The SIGTRAN link is not used in any other configuration 207 Chapter 6 Management Commands There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN link is present in the config txt file
70. Service Indicator specified will replaced the Service Indicator in the message the profile is being applied to This parameter is optional and defaults to NONE LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional 108 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 8 5 MRF_CE Message Router Concerned Entity Synopsis The MRF_CE command defines a Concerned Entity defines entities that need to be notified in the event of the accessibility of the DPC changing Syntax MRF_CE NC CONCID DPC CONC_DOMAIN CONC_NC CONC_ENT ALIAS Example MRF E CONCID 1 DPC 2322 CONC_DOMAIN NETWORK CONC_ENT 256 F_CE MRF_CE NC NCO CONCID 2 DPC 653 CONC_DOMAIN AS CONC_NC NCO CONC_ENT 1 Parameters NC SS7 Network Context This parameter identifies the SS7 network in which the Destination Point Code exists Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 Defaults to NCO if not specified CONCID Logical identifier for the concerned relationship in the range 0 4095 DPC The Destination Point Code who s status the concerned point code needs to be informed about If set to ANY the Concerned Point Code will be concerned about all point codes in the network context If explicitly configured the DPC must have already been configured as one of the following e A DPC associated with an MTP Route e A DPC associated w
71. Signaling Server should be connected to the Ethernet network using an RJ 45 10 100 1000 BASE T cable The Signaling Server is configured with a default IP address of 192 168 0 1 If this address is not suitable for access then the user should connect to the server using a vt100 session see section 2 2 1 The Ethernet connection should be verified by attempting to ping the Signaling Server from a computer connected to the same Ethernet network using the following command ping 192 168 0 1 If the Signaling Server is connected correctly it responds to the ping and the host machine displays a message confirming communication with the Signaling Server the exact format and response of this message is operating system dependent Once ping shows that the Ethernet connection is valid it should be possible to access the management interface This is achieved by establishing a telnet session to port 8100 8101 8102 or 8103 Note It is not possible to telnet to the standard telnet port 23 For example on a typical host console the following command starts a telnet session to an Signaling Server with an IP address of 192 168 0 1 telnet 192 168 0 1 8100 A password is mandatory for access to the MML interface Initially the system is configured with a single user account siguser and for initial login the password siguser is required Once logged in new accounts may be created and passwords set See section Access Control and S
72. TAD NSUP sisceceseacsscesersscts e a toners eeyaend E ats seeearabeds geynees eeetenns 372 TAB SCOP ce ueta iid lahat Midis iu aueds aunt wel hontaads tamed cp be E wlaadlis teu ol 372 7 4 9 DTS rarer epre ea a AA geet ca Reon Maes aed ae eee See 373 7AE LO TEAR E te derek one aaa cet Vie dates cadet Sd chs hark dade eit casas u add 373 TAPD MAP rea a veaes eaa a A tuai ae eet eeeeeascepaetenenbev aes debe dies depend 374 FAD 2 SA Viren criti adeaaanded ned sbeieedati eee ered Ai Aina nein eideetats A opiate 374 TAII NAP wear ten ceased aaa ba Bee a eet Beedi tise ie Use waetes hey sha itv DE ah deen ek tea 375 7 5 Dual Resilient Signaling Server Operation cece eee cece eee ee ee eee eee teeta natn 375 7 5 1 Configuring a Dual Signaling Server Pair ccc eee eee eee eee e teeter eaed 376 7 5 2 Hardware Requirement ccc eee neta 376 745 3 System Configuratio M e a ets eave vids eevehds Aleve ah thaede tata r eiveneeds eee eaaa 377 7 5 4 Changes to the config txt Parameter File ccceceee cece eee ee eee ee eee teeter eae 377 7 5 5 Configuring a Dual Resilient System cece eee eee ete eee 385 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 13 7 14 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Configuring an ANSI SySteMm eaea ee ne eee eee tenant ed 385 Specifying Default ROUtES ccc eee tena teeta 386 Dynamic HOSt ACtiVatiOn cassis dee ea E saal noes eyes A ENEE Ea AEA 386 Dynami
73. TT Other values are undefined spares or reserved Bit 2 PC Indicator A 1 indicates that Point Code is used in addressing Bit1 SSN Indicator A 1 indicates that SubSystem Number is used in addressing e SPC The point code This is ignored if bit 0 of lt addr_indicator gt is not set e SSN The subsystem number This is ignored if bit 1 of lt addr_indicator gt is not set e GT The global title excluding the global title address information specified as a string of hexadecimal octets starting with Ox except when the lt addr_indicator gt see above indicates that no GT is present when a value of 0 zero should be used e GTAI_PATTERN The pattern of global title address information to match specified as a string of hexadecimal digits digit Oxe is reserved in left to right order i e the pairs of digits are not swapped as would be the case for a BCD string 125 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands As well as hexadecimal digits this string can contain the following characters Character Function Padding ignored Wildcard matches any number of digits Wildcard matches exactly one digit Separator used to split the pattern into sections Each section can be processed differently as specified by the lt mask gt parameter in the SCP_GTT command NOTE The wildcard is not greedy It matches the shortest possible string of digits that is a pattern such as 12 6
74. The STREAM_XCON command controls the cross connect switch on the signaling boards enabling the cross connection of timeslots between the two PCM ports on each signaling board or a fixed pattern to be generated on specified timeslots The PCM ports on a board are referenced by a fixed logical stream number This command is only supported for the SS7LD board Applicability DSH Syntax STREAM_XCON lt BPOS gt lt OUT_STREAM gt lt IN_STREAM gt lt XCON_MODE gt lt TSMASK gt lt OUTPUT_PATTERN gt Example STREAM_XCON 3 2 3 3 Oxfffefffe 0 Parameters The STREAM_XCON command includes the following parameters e BPOS The board position of the cross connect switch to be controlled There must be a valid board at this position previously defined by an SS7_BOARD command e OUT_STREAM A reference to the 2 Mbps stream for the output of the connection or the fixed data pattern There must be a valid PCM port at this position previously defined by a LIU_CONFIG command Valid values are 0 to 3 e IN_STREAM A reference to the 2 Mbps stream for the input of a simplex connection mode 2 or one half of a duplex cross connection mode 3 In other modes this field should be set to zero There must be a valid PCM port at this position previously defined by a LIU_CONFIG command Valid values are 0 to 3 XCON_MODE Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Indicates the requested cross connect switch fun
75. This command displays traffic measurements for SIGTRAN links The first page displays traffic measurements at the SCTP level and the second page display measurements for M3UA links When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSSTP SNLINK PAGE SNTYPE RESET 284 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Links gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSSTP SNLINK 4 Output Format SIGTRAN Link Measurements Page 1 of 2 SNLINK SNTYPE RXCK TXCK RTXCK NOOS OOSDUR PERIOD 4 SCTP 4117 4875 0 0 0 01 17 45 SIGTRAN Link Measurements Page 2 of 2 SNLINK SNTYPE RXPKT TXPKT NOOS PERIOD 4 M3UA 4343 4444 0 01 17 45 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e SNLINK the SIGTRAN link identifier e SNTYPE the type of link measurements SCTP M3UA e RXCK SCTP Data chunks received e TXCK SCTP Data chunks transmitted e RTXCK SCTP Data chunks retransmitted e NOOS number of times the SCTP M3UA link is out of service down e OOSDUR total seconds the SCTP links was out of service e RXPKT M3UA Packets received e TXPKT M3UA Packets transmitted e PERIOD measurement collection period 6 11 22 MSSYP System Measurements This command displays system related measurements for load and congestion taken over a peri
76. a MAP Receive MT SMS service profile Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP service When a profile is specified Page 2 measurements are displayed 293 Chapter 6 Management Commands When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSTRP RESET PAGE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MT SMS Rx gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSTRP MSTRP PAGE 2 MSTRP PROFI LE 2 MSTRP RESET Y Output Format MAP MT SMS Rx Measurements Page 1 or 2 MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD Mobile_Term_RX_Req 23 1 01 29 16 MAP MT SMS Rx Measurements Page 2 or 2 PROFILE MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 Mobile_Term_RX_Req 23 1 01 29 16 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with the MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 294 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 11 30 MSTTP MAP MT SMS Tx Meas
77. a Signaling Gateway the message router commands MRF_CE MRF_OG MRF_DE MRF_RK and MRF_CP are used to configure the routing model The configuration parameters for the telephony user part are entered using the SUP_CONFIG ISUP Configuration or CONFIG command as appropriate Circuit groups are configured using the xxx_CFG_ CCTGRP commands This allows a number of circuits to be configured with common attributes Circuit groups are assigned unique logical identifiers or group IDs GID A single gid must not be used by more than one telephony user part The Circuit Identification Code CIC of the first circuit in the group is defined for each circuit group Further circuits may be included in the group providing that the CIC of the last circuit is no more than 31 greater than the first CIC 55 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 56 The SCCP protocol is configured using the SCCP_CONFIG SCCP Configuration and SCCP_LSS SCCP Local Sub System Resources SCCP_RSP SCCP Remote Signaling Point SCCP_RSS SCCP Remote Sub System Resources commands Subsystems are assigned using SCCP_ SSR Concerned subsystems are configured using SCCP_CONC_SSR SCCP Concerned Sub Systems Configuration The SCCP protocol is configured using the SCCP_CONFIG SCCP Configuration and SCCP_LSS SCCP Local Sub System Resources SCCP_RSP SCCP Remote Signaling Point SCCP_RSS SCCP Remote Sub System Resources commands Subsystems are assigned using SCCP_ SSR Con
78. a list of M3UA links to a remote application server STN_ROUTE Define SIGTRAN routes STN_RSGLIST Attach a list of signaling gateways to a SIGTRAN route 57 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 58 Table 1 Command Summary Continued Command Summary STN_LBIND Associate the local application server with a remote application server or remote signaling gateway identifying the route to reach the destination SCTP_TIMER Configure SCTP Timers M2PA_TIMER Configure M2PA Timers M3UA_TIMER Configure M3UA MTP_CONFIG Set global parameters for MTP MTP_NC_CONFIG Set global MTP parameters for an SS7 Network Context MTP_LINKSET Define link sets MTP_LINK Define signaling links MTP2_TIMER Configure MTP2 link timers MTP3_TIMER Configure MTP3 timers QSAAL TIMER Configure QSAAL timers MTP_ROUTE Configure MTP3 routing MTP_USER_PART Specify a user supplied user part MTP2_TIMER Configure MTP2 link timers MTP3_TIMER Configure MTP3 timers QSAAL_TIMER Configure QSAAL timers MONITOR_LINK Define LSL HSL Monitor links MRF_CE Configure Message Router Concerned Entities MRF_CP Configure Message Router Custom Profiles MRF_DE Configure Message Router Destinations MRF_RK Configure Message Router Routing Keys MRF_OG Configure Message Router Origins ISUP_CONFIG Set global ISUP operating parameters ISUP_TI MER Configure ISUP timers ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP Configure I
79. and MTP_USER_PART commands that are not in the default Network Context NCO 4 6 M3UA 7 4 6 1 Applications Since there is one instance of M3UA for each Network Context messages that are destined for a specific network must be sent to the correct M3UA module ID as shown in the figure above In most SIU configurations M3UA is not the highest protocol layer and the sending of messages to the correct module is handled by the higher layer modules without further user interaction If an application requires routing at MTP level it is recommended that the application route via the RMM module rather than directly to M3UA 371 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines 7 4 6 2 Configuration The STN_CONFIG config txt command described in can be used to configure M3UA in each applicable Network Context The STN_ CONFIG command is required for M3UA in all Network Contexts NCO must be configured before NC1 NC2 and NC3 can be configured The STN_LINK STN_LAS STN_RAS STN_ ROUTE and MTP_USER_PART commands support the Network Context Specific NC parameter This parameter must be specified for all _LINK STN_LAS STN_RAS STN_ ROUTE and MTP_USER_PART commands that are not in the default Network Context NCO 7 4 7 ISUP 7 4 7 1 Applications ISUP applications do not need modification the config txt parameters are sufficient to identify the Network Context 7 4 7 2 Configuration The ISUP Circuit Group Configuration command SUP_CFG_CCTGRP
80. and so on A user may change the destination of trace messages through use of the TRACELOG parameter on the system configuration command A user also can select either that messages are logged to FILE default HOST where they are transmitted to the management module id on the configured management host or DUAL where they are both logged to file and sent to host MTP3 and M3UA traces may also be logged in PCAP file format In a similar manner to the above text log files the system supports up to ten 5MB PCAP log file named trace pcap trace pcap 1 trace pcap 2 etc storing them in the syslog subdirectory of the siuftp account Logging in TEXT or PCAP format is selected by using the TRACEFMT parameter in the CNSYx MMI command Activation of tracing under high load conditions may reduce overall throughput of the SIU Syntax CNTMS MODULE IMASK OMASK MMASK ACTI VE Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Trace gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Example CNTMS MODULE I SUP IMASK 1 OMASK 2 MMASK 3 CNTMS MODULE ISUP ACTIVE yY CNTMS MODULE ISUP ACTIVE N CNTMS MODULE I SUP I MASK DEFAULT Prerequisites The protocol should be licensed and active before attempting to configure a trace mask for it 6 3 90 CNTPE Configuration Network Time Protocol Server End This command removes a specified Network Time Protocol Serve
81. can be removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNCSE MMI command 5 11 DTS Configuration Commands 5 12 The DTS configuration commands include the following e DTS CONFIG Distributed Transaction Server Configuration e DTS_ROUTE Configuration DTS Route Initiate 5 12 1 DTS_CONFIG Distributed Transaction Server Configuration Synopsis The DTS_ CONFIG command is an optional command that defines the global configuration parameters for DTS Its principal function is to allow users to specify more than 16 TCAP hosts Applications that operate on more than 16 TCAP hosts require a slightly different TCAP configuration from those that operate with 16 or less as the transaction id tid requires more of its bits to be used to identify the TCAP instance This command allows users to configure DTS on the SIU so that DTS matches TCAP configuration on the host Applicability SIU Syntax DTS_CONFIG lt NUM_HOSTS gt lt OPTIONS gt Example DTS_CONFIG 20 0x0001 131 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Parameters The DTS_ CONFIG command includes the following parameters e NUM_HOSTS The number of SIU hosts which will receive traffic from DTS When the DTS_ CONFIG command is not used this parameter default to 16 hosts Note For routing by BillinglD the number of the hosts should be set accurately to optimize the routing algorithm e OPTIONS Set bit 0 to enable routing by Billingl D DTS_OPT_RT_O
82. config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log 204 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example CNSRI SNRT 1 6 3 76 CNSRP SIGTRAN Route Configuration This command displays the configuration of SIGTRAN routes Syntax CNSRP Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Routes gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNSRP Output Format SIGTRAN Route Configuration SNRT NC DPC OPTIONS LABEL 1 NC3 401 0x0000 41 NC3 1019 0x0000 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command STN_ROUTE for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 77 CNSSE SCCP Subsystem Resource End This command removes an Sub System Resource Note Sub System Resources are dynamically removed by first deleting the Resource from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the Resource from the system Syntax CNSSE SSRID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt SCCP SSRs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access 205 Chapter 6 Management Commands Prerequisites The Sub System Resource has been initiated The Sub System Resource is not present in the config txt file The Sub System Resource is not
83. configuration of ATM Cell Streams In terms of configuration ATM Cell Streams sit above LIUs and are referred to by MTP or Monitor ATM links Applicability DSH Syntax ATM_CELL_STREAM CELLSTR BPOS L2ID PORTID OPTIONS 0 DEFVPI DEFVCI Example ATM_CELL_STREAM CELLSTR 0 BPOS 1 L2ID 0 PORTID 0 OPTIONS 0x06 DEFVPI 1 DEFVCI 6 Parameters The ATM_CELL_STREAM command includes the following parameters e CELLSTR The logical Cell Stream ID from the ATM module s perspective BPOS The board position of the signaling processor allocated for this ATM link 69 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 70 Only boards of type SS7MD may be associated with ATM Cell Streams L2I D The Layer 2 ID of the Cell Stream within the board In the range of 0 to one less than the maximum number of Cell Streams supported per board LIU ports logical identifier s to be used by the cell stream The parameter is subject to the following pre requisites LIU port specified may not be associated with any other cell stream LIU port or ports must be associated with the board Note The associated timeslot bitmap of active timeslots within TDM streams for E1 is Oxfffefffe and for T1 J1 is 0x01fffffe as per G 804 OPTIONS A 16 bit value containing additional flags for the ATM link The bit significance is as follows Bit 0 Enable payload scrambling Bit 1 Use ATM coset in HEC calcu
84. discarded Syntax MNPCS PORTID AISGEN LOOPMD PRBSGEN Web Management Location This diagnostic command is not available on the browser interface Applicability Operating Modes ALL Permissions System Maintenance Access Prerequisites he action must be supported by the particular board type Example MNPCS PORTID 4 AISGEN 2 MNPCS PORTID 4 _LOOPMD 3 MNPCS PORTID 4 PRBSGEN 3 253 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 9 4 MNRSI Maintenance Restart I nitiate This command will restart the entire system The current log on session will be terminated If system type is set the system type will change after restart Note To install a new mode software license or software distribution for the first time the software or license must be loaded onto the system and system re booted before the new mode can be entered If RESET yY all configuration and log files in the syslog directory will be removed during restart If not resetting after restart no change to the system configuration will occur and the state of all links will automatically be restored If DEFBMC Y Configuration related to Lights Out Management will be reset to its default values This include the IP Address and login password for Lights Out Management Only users with System Administration Access can set this parameter Syntax MNRSI SYSTYPE RESTART RESET yY DEFBMC yY Web Management Location System Administration gt Software gt System
85. dual resilient pair is also possible Figure 2 Multiple Network Contexts with an STP Pair Link Set 0 r Point Code 1 STPA Point f J Code 4 S N NG n Remote Node B SIU PointCode3 f a N STP 8 Ka i Point ee NC1 Code 5 Point Code 2 J Link Set 3 O J 7 4 3 Protocol Handling for Multiple Network Contexts The figure below shows the use of multiple Network Contexts from an application perspective and provides examples of the module IDs for the various application layers Figure 3 Module I Ds for Use with Multiple Network Contexts ISUP TCAP DTS 0x23 0x14 0x30 ES g SCCP NCO SCCP NC1 i SCCP NC2 0x33 0x36 0x37 RMM NCO RMM NC1 RMM NC2 RMM NC3 0x32 OxC2 OxE2 OxF2 MTP3 M3UA MTP3 M3UA MTP3 M3UA MTP3 M3UA NCO NCO NC1 NC1 NC2 NC2 NC3 NC3 0x22 0xD2 0x82 0xD6 0x92 0xD7 0xB2 0xD8 370 7 7 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 4 4 RMM MTP3 and M3UA can be active in the same Network Context at the same time A Destination Point Code must however be unique across all MTP Routes SIGTRAN Routes and SIGTRAN Remote Application Servers On the Signaling Server ISUP and SCCP do not communicate directly with MTP3 and M3UA Instead they route through a Resilient Management Module RMM As well as selecting the correct protocol MTP3 or M3UA based on DPC RMM will attempt to route traffic over the inter unit RSI link to the partner Si
86. dynamically added by 1 Entering an additional configuration command MRF_CP in the config txt file 2 Executing the MRCPI MMI command to load that configuration Syntax MRCPI CP Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Custom Profile gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The Custom Profile has not been initiated The Custom Profile is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Custom Profile is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log 258 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example MRCPI CP 1 6 10 6 MRCPP Message Router Custom Profile Configuration This command displays all configured Message Router Custom Profiles Note See the individual parameter definitions of the config txt command MRF_CP defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters supported Syntax MRCPP CP Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Custom Profile gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MRCPP Output Format Message Router Custom Profile Configuration CP OPC DPC NI SI LABEL 0 NONE 2332 0 NONE 1 123233 NONE NONE NONE 6 10 7
87. ea ea ed 248 6 7 19 IPHNP IP Host Configuration Print cc ceceee cece eee eee e nena ead 248 6 7 20 MAUPI MAUPC MAUPE MAP USSD Profile 249 6 7 21 MAUPP MAP USSD Profile Print cece cette teeter need 250 MMI COMMANA Senan eae ed oa nesta aie ET Ao A tie E E VETE A ae NA 251 6 8 1 MMLOI MMI Logoff Initiate 0 00 eee eee neeeraed 251 Maintenance COoMMandS cette nent 251 6 9 1 MNINE Maintenance Uninhibit Initiate cee eee eee eee eee ened 251 6 9 2 MNINI Maintenance Inhibit Initiate eee eee eee eee eae 252 6 9 3 MNPCS Maintenance PCM Control Set ccc cece eee erent ee tee e ee neta ened 253 6 9 4 MNRSI Maintenance Restart Initiate 0c eee eee eee eee ee neta 254 6 9 5 MNSSI Maintenance Snapshot Initiate eee eee eee etter eae 254 6 10 6 11 6 12 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Message Router COMMAMNACS sssssssssrssrerrsrersrrtrtts erunt tretun neru eee teen e eats 255 6 10 1 MRCEE Message Router Concerned Entity End ccceeeeeeeee eect eee eee aee 255 6 10 2 MRCEI Message Router Concerned Entity Initiate eee eee eee 256 6 10 3 MRCEP Message Router Concerned Entity Configuration ceeee 257 6 10 4 MRCPE Message Router Custom Profile ENd cccccsecseeee eee eeeeaeeateneeeenees 257 6 10 5 MRCPI Message Router Custom Profile Initiate eerren 258 6 10 6 MR
88. in the user manual for a full description of the parameters supported Syntax CNDUP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Dual Operation gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNDUP 167 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format Dual Operation Configuration MODE MODEA REMOTE_TPADDR 192 168 0 1 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command S IU_DUAL for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 19 CNGAE SCCP GTT Address End This command removes an SCCP GTT Address Note SCCP GTT Addresses are dynamically removed by first deleting the Gateway List from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the Gateway List from the system Syntax CNGAE GTAI D Web Management Location Administration gt Transaction gt GTT Addresses gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SCCP GTT Address ID has been initiated The SCCP GTT Address is not present in the config txt file The SCCP GTT Address is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SCCP GTT Address is present in the config txt file Note Circuit
89. in POSIX style which has positive signs west of Greenwich e g Montreal CANADA 5 00 USA 5 00 UNITED KINGDOM 0 00 GERMANY 1 00 New Delhi INDIA 5 30 Beijing CHINA 8 00 Sydney AUSTRALIA 10 00 Parameter Range Case sensitive string of length 0 to 9 Must not contain any spaces Output Mask Trace Mask for signaling messages leaving a protocol module Parameter Range Hex number between 0 to ffffffff OPC The originating point code Parameter Range Number between 0 to 16777215 OPTIONS OPTIONS2 Configuration Options Parameter Range Null or Hex number between 0 to ffffffff Additional Configuration Options Parameter Range Null or Hex number between 0 to ffffffff OR1D Percentage 1 day peak link receive utilization in a 10s period OR1H Percentage 1 hour peak link receive utilization in a 10s period OR5M Percentage 5 minutes peak link receive utilization in a 10s period ORGADDR Originating Address digits Parameter Range Case sensitive string containing 7 BIT ASCII characters of length 1 to 30 Must not contain any spaces 347 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued ORGNP Originating Numbering Plan Parameter Range Unknown ISDN Reserved2 Data Telex ServiceCentreS pecific5 ServiceCentreS pecific6 Reserved7 National Private ERMES Reserved11 Reserved12 Reserved13 Reserved14 Reserved O
90. in the output is as follows DBSVCID the Service ID DBSVCTYPE the Service Type NSERV total number of service requests CURSERV current number of active service requests PEAKSERV peak number of active service requests NS5M peak rate of service requests during the last 5 minutes requests second NS1H peak rate of service requests during the last hour requests second NS1D peak rate of service requests during the last day requests second NCONG number of congestion events NFAIL number of failed service requests COUNT1 service specific counter 1 For MNP the number of requests that returned a ported number COUNT2 service specific 2 For MNP the number of badly formatted service requests received PERIOD the period over which the measurements were taken 6 11 5 MSDEP Message Router Destination Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for Message Router Routing Keys When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero 270 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Syntax MSDEP DESTID RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Destination gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSDEP DESTID 4 Output Format Message Router Destination Measurements DESTID DEST DESTSEQ TXMSU TXOCT PERIOD 4 q 2 2540 23323 01 17 45
91. is a sample initial view of the Flow Design and Management option from the Flow Management menu OSH 2014 09 30 09 53 21 BorderNet Diameter Services Helix Operations Flow Restore points Informaten Flow group l Log level Unknown v Parameters for default Valdabon statusNot validated Cescnpten Default flow Prorkty o Active status Not active Flow group Last updstedTue Sep 02 09 56 03 2014 v Conditons Subfiow Select o valve gt gt 1 Source host present A gt 2 Local port present A v Steps Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 4 2 Diagnostics Alarms and Logs The Signaling Server supports built in real time logging to disk of activity on the MMI interface events and errors and the selective logging to disk of diagnostic traces Logging to disk of MMI activity events and errors by default allows a user to capture any management information at the point a failure occurs Selective logging to disk of traces completes the capture of all the information that may be required to investigate particular issues Although activation of trace logging has a performance impact on a system customers who do not require the full performance capabilities of the Signaling Server may choose to activate selective tracing thus ensuring the full capture of any significant information required for problem analysis To activate selective tracing the user should first configure
92. is the default IP Gateway Parameter Range DEFAULT or Number between 1 to 31 335 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued IPHOST_ NAME A name that is used in system configuration to represent a Pv4 IPv6 address Parameter Range Null or String of length 0 to 80 Must not contain any spaces IPLG A logical reference for and entry in the IP Log filter list DEFAULT is the default rule and the other rules are applied on top of the default rule Note The default rule cannot be deleted only its action modified Parameter Range Number between 1 to 4 IPNW An IP network identifier Parameter Range Null or IP address entered as one of the following An IPV4 Address An IPV6 Address May be set to DEFAULT IPNW An IP network identifier Parameter Range Null or IP Address of the form w x y z where w x y and z are between 0 255 IPSRC A source IP address or network identifier Parameter Range Null or ANY command specific or IP address entered as one of the following An IPV4 Address An IPV6 Address IPSVC System IP Server Ports Parameter Range Null or ALL TELNET Telnet MML Server ports SSH SSH Server port FTP FTP Server port WMGMT Web Management Server ports WSAPI Web Server API ports REMOTE Port communicating with the Remote System HOST Ports communicating with hosts applications SCTP SCTP Ports SNMP Ports used
93. is to be conveyed over M2PA the blink parameter identifies the SNLINK link_id When the SS7 link is to be conveyed over ATM this is the layer 2 link id e STREAM A reference to the logical PCM highway from which the signaling processor is to insert the signaling This must be in the range 0 to 3 Set to 0 if the MTP link is associated with an M2PA link Valid values are shown in the following table Stream Port 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 e TS The timeslot on the STREAM that should be used for signaling For a T1 port the range is 1 to 24 For an E1 port the valid range is 1 to 31 The timeslot must not have been previously assigned another MTP or Monitor link Set to zero if the MTP link is associated with an M2PA link For HSL links the timeslot parameter should be set to Oxff to indicate that the link is attached to an LIU configured with the LIU_CONFIG command HSL signaling may not use timeslots already configured for signaling or data e OPTIONS A 32 bit value each bit enabling or disabling additional run time options Bit 0 is used to signify override automatic selection of proving period When set to 1 bit 3 is used to determine whether to use the EMERGENCY or NORMAL proving procedures If set to 0 the appropriate proving period in accordance with the SS7 protocol is used Bit 1 when set to 1 causes a signaling link test to be performed on link activation restoration If set to 0 a signaling
94. link test is not performed This bit should normally be set to 1 Bit 2 when set to 1 enables a periodic signaling link test When set to 0 periodic signaling link tests are not automatically performed This bit should normally be set to 1 Bit 3 when set to 1 forces NORMAL proving otherwise EMERGENCY proving is used If Bit 0 is set to 0 then the appropriate proving period in accordance with the SS7 protocol is used and Bit 3 has no influence Bit 7 selects the LSSU length indicator If set to 1 the unit sends two octet LSSU messages If set to 0 the unit sends one octet LSSU messages Bit 8 selects the error correction method used by this link If set to 1 Preventative Cyclic Retransmission PCR is used If set to 0 the basic error correction method is used PCR is typically only used over transmission links where the transmission delay is large such as satellite links Bits 10 and 11 select either 64 56 or 48 Kbps operation and are used when a link operates over a T1 or E1 timeslot Use of these bits is as follows Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Bit 11 Bit10 Rate Timeslot Usage 0 0 64 Kbps Set both to zero for E1_FRAMED and T1_FRAMED operation HSL framed operation uses these bits in a similar manner to single timeslot signaling to select 64 Kbps 56 Kbps or 48 Kbps operation that applies to all timeslots within the HSL link 0 1 48 Kbps bits 7 amp 8 not
95. measurements are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSORP RESET PAGE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MO SMS Rx gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSORP MSORP PAGE 2 MSORP PROFILE 2 MSORP RESET yY Output Format MAP MO SMS Rx Measurements Page 1 or 2 MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD Mobile_Orig_RX_Req 23 1 01 29 16 Alert_SC 0 0 01 29 16 289 Chapter 6 Management Commands MAP MO SMS Rx Measurements Page 2 or 2 PROFILE MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 Mobile_Orig_RX_Req 23 1 01 29 16 0 Alert_SC 0 0 01 29 16 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with the MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 6 11 26 MSOTP MAP MO SMS Tx Measurements Command to display traffic measurements associated with MAP Transmit MO SMS Services Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP service When a profile is
96. message before the Routing Key entry is considered a match The parameter is optional and defaults to ANY CIC_RANGE The CIC range specifies a subset of ISUP BICC CICs that a message should contain before the Routing Key is considered a match The CIC range is a compound parameter of the form lt base range gt where lt base gt is the base or first CIC in the range and lt range gt is the number of CI Cs in the range If not specified CIC_RANGE defaults to ANY HUNT The Hunting Method for the Destination determined by the Routing Key The parameter is optional and defaults to FIRST Possible values are e FIRST The first available Destination will be selected e CIRCULAR The next available Destination will be selected from the Destination table in a round robin manner each time a new message is routed e BALANCE Currently only valid for SI 5 or 13 Each time a new call arrives the Destination will be selected from the Destination table in a round robin manner Subsequent messages for the same call circuit will be routed to the same Destination e SHARE1 A destination from a destination table will be selected based on the SLS field in the received message If the destination is not available the next available destination will be selected based on the SLS and the number of remaining destinations DEST The Destination table determined by the Routing Key 107 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands CP Logical identifier f
97. messages are sent instead to host 32 and vice versa When the link recovers normal routing resumes The ability to configure backup hosts allows management and or signaling messages to be redirected to a backup host application in the event of primary host failure When using ISUP for example this mechanism allows continued use of circuits if the primary host for a circuit group were to fail Once the primary host link has been recovered messages are again sent to it from the Signaling Server Backup hosts can be employed when configured for ISUP Backup hosts may also be used for SCCP operation however they may not be used in configurations that utilize DTS DTC You should ensure that both primary and backup hosts are configured and active e OPTIONS A 32 bit value each bit of which enables or disables additional configuration options Bit 0 When set received MTP Transfer Indications will be evenly distributed across all available hosts The distribution will be in a Round Robin manner such that the subsequent message gets routed to the next available host All other bits are reserved and should be set to zero e MIN_HOSTS The minimum number of hosts required before Network Side SIGTRAN or TDM links enter service DMHOST The host_id of the default management host SIU host configuration is viewed using the CNHSP MMI command and status and measurement for SIU host links read using the STHLP and MSHLP commands 5 4
98. monitoring applications T1 protective monitoring point for monitoring applications Note Use of the Buildout parameter is not relevant when monitoring Users are required to set it to a value of O when the liu type is configured for high impedance or as a protective monitoring point e LC The line coding technique The following table shows the permitted values and their meaning Value Description 1 HDB3 E1 only 2 AMI 4 B8ZS T1 only FF The frame format The following table shows the permitted values and their meaning Value 1 2 Description E1 double frame E1 E1 CRC4 multiframe E1 3 F4 4 frame multiframe T1 SS7MD only 66 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Value Description 4 D3 D4 Yellow alarm bit 2 in each channel T1 7 ESF Yellow alarm in data link channel T1 8 F72 SLC96 72 frame multiframe T1 SS7MD only 9 J1 frame format T1 SS7MD only CRC_MODE The Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC mode of operation The following table shows the permitted values and their meaning Value Description 1 CRC generation disabled 2 CRC4 enabled frame_format must be set to 2 4 CRC6 enabled frame_format must be set to 7 BUILDOUT Specifies the range of build out settings for a T1 interface The parameter is required for SS7MD b
99. port of the first signaling board the configuration Figure 6 would be For Signaling Server A MTP3 Options Configurat x MI MTP ion P_CONFIG NC NCO0 OPTIONS 0 CONFIG SS7 Link Set Configuration MT MT MT SS7 Link Configura tion BLINK STREAM TS OPTIONS 0x00000006 LABEL P_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET OPC APC NLINKS 2 SSF 0x8 OPTIONS 0 LABEL P_LINKSET LINKSET 0 OPC 300 APC 300 NLINKS 1 OP1 P_LINKSET LINKSET 1 OPC 300 APC 400 NLINKS 1 OP1 TIONS 0x8000 LABEL To_Partner TIONS 0x0000 LABEL To_Network J TS 1 OPTIONS 0x00000006 TS 16 OPTIONS 0x00000006 LABEL MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE LINKSET REF SLC BPOS MTP_LINK LINK 0 IFTYPE TDM LINKSET 0 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 1 STREAM 3 MTP_LINK LINK 1 IFTYPE TDM LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 2 STREAM 0 MTP route Configuration MTP_ROUTE NC NCO0O C7RT DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 MTP_ROUTE C7RT 0 DPC 300 LS1 0 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0000 LABEL To_Partner MTP_ROUTE C7RT 1 DPC 400 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0001 LS2 0 LABEL To_DPC400 MTP_ROUTE C7RT 2 DPC 600 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0001 LS2 0 LABEL To_DPC600 For Signaling Server B MTP3 Options Configuration P_CONFIG NC NC0 OPTIONS 0
100. retransmission timeout CWND the current congestion window for the peer address SRTT the current calculated smoothed round trip time for the peer address in milliseconds PMTU the current Path MTU for the peer address IPADDR the remote IP address for the path 315 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 13 22 STSWP System Software Status This command provides an overall summary of the software operating on the system Syntax STSWP Web Management Location System Administration gt Software gt System Software gt Status Operations gt Home Footer gt Home Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STSWP Output Format System Summary SYSTYPE SIU SOFTWARE SS7G40 SIU Release 1 0 0 Build 1001 UNITID 000423a683bd NODE sysnode SYSID SYSREF 0 UPTIME 00 00 15 WARNING 2 MINOR 2 MAJOR 0 CRITICAL 0 6 13 23 STSYP System Status This command provides a summary of the load uptime and alarms on the system Syntax STSYP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt System gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STSYP 316 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format System Status Cc M U PU_MODEL 1 X Intel R Xeon R CPU E5504 2 00GHz EMORY 3072MB PTIME 09 04 02 NRESTART 5
101. specified Page 2 measurements are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSOTP RESET PAGE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MO SMS Tx gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSOTP MSOTP PAGE 2 MSOTP PROFILE 2 MSOTP RESET VY 290 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format MAP MO SMS Tx Measurements Page 1 or 2 MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD Mobile_Orig_TX_Req 23 1 01 29 16 MAP MO SMS Tx Measurements Page 2 or 2 PROFILE MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 Mobile_Orig_TX_Req 23 1 01 29 16 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with the MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 11 27 MSRTP MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile Measurements Command to display traffic measurements associated with MAP Ready for SM Services Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP s
102. specifies Network Context specific configuration for TCAP and overrides configuration specified by the TCAP_CONFIG command This command should only be used when a TCAP_CONFIG command is present Applicability SIU DSH Syntax TCAP_NC_CONFIG lt NC gt lt OPTIONS gt lt ADDR_FMT gt Examples TCAP_NC_CONFIG NCO 0x0000 0 134 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Parameters The TCAP_NC_CONFIG command includes the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that TCAP is being configured for Supported values are NC1 NC2 or NC3 e OPTIONS Specifies TCAP protocol options as defined for the TCAP Configuration Request message in the TCAP Programmer s Manual e ADDR_FMT The format of messages used by TCAP Possible values are 0 The address format is determined by the setting of bit 1 of the lt options gt field If bit 1 of the lt options gt field is set to indicate ANSI TCAP PDU formats then ANSI format 24 bit point codes are selected If bit 1 of the lt options gt field is not set ITU T TCAP PDU formats and 14 bit point codes are selected 1 ITU T format 14 bit point codes 2 ITU T format 24 bit point codes 3 ANSI format 14 bit point codes 4 ANSI format 24 bit point codes Note 16 bit point codes are not supported 13 3 TCAP_CFG_DGRP TCAP Dialog Group Configuration Synopsis The TCAP_C
103. system number as used by the SS7 protocol and the module ID designated by the user to implement this sub system Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCCP_LSS NC NC0 SSRID SSN LSSPROT USER_ID 0x1d OPTIONS 0 LABEL Example SCCP_LSS NC NC0 SSRID SSN 0x7 LSSPROT MAP USER_ID 0x0d OPTIONS 1 127 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Parameters The SCCP_SSR command includes the following parameters when configuring SCCP local sub systems e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that the SSR is being configured for When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e SSRID A unique value in the range 0 to 2047 that is used to identify the SSR 512 SSRIDs are allowed per Network Context The same SSRID cannot be used in configuration of any other LSS RSP or RSS e SSN The local sub system number as defined by the SCCP protocol e USER_ID For SIU mode this is the module identifier of the user application on the host computer that implements the local sub system This must be in the range 0x0d Ox1d Ox2d to Oxfd where Oxnd is defined as APPn_TASK_ID For SWS mode set to 0x45 for correct SWS operation e OPTIONS A 16 bit value where each bit enables or disables additional features of the local sub system The meaning of each bit is as defined for the options parameter described in the Configure Sub System Resource Reque
104. target IP node AVG_PING The average time in milliseconds the set of pings took to reach and return from the target IP node BEST_PING The time in milliseconds the best ping took to reach and return from the target IP node WORST_PING The time in milliseconds the worst ping took to reach and return from the target IP node DEV_PING The standard deviation of the time in milliseconds the pings took to reach and return from each the target IP node 306 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 13 12 STLCP Software License Capability Status This command shows the status of software licenses on the system Note The maximum account credit is the licensed throughput rate 30 The throughput account credit is decremented each time traffic passes through the system The throughput account credit is incremented every second by the value of the licensed throughput rate If the licensed throughput is exceeded for a sustained period of time the credit available will drop When the credit drops to 50 of the maximum throughput credit a congestion alarm will activate When the credit drops to 0 i e there is no credit left a throughput enforcement alarm will be activated and throughput will be limited to the licensed rate Throughput enforcement will be maintained until the account credit returns to 75 or above of the maximum throughput credit Syntax STLCP Web Management Location System Administra
105. that contains run time options for the operation of the INAP protocol The bits are as defined for the options parameter described in the Configuration Request section of the INAP Programmer s Manual 5 16 2 INAP_NC_CONFIG INAP Network Context Configuration Synopsis The INAP_NC_CONFIG command defines the global configuration parameters for INAP existing in an additional SS7 Network Context to that identified by the INAP_CONFIG command Applicability SIU Syntax INAP_NC_CONFIG lt NC gt lt OPTIONS gt Example INAP_NC_CONFIG 0 Parameters The INAP_NC_CONFIG command includes the following parameter NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that INAP is being configured for Supported values are NC1 NC2 or NC3 139 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands OPTIONS A 32 bit value that contains run time options for the operation of the INAP protocol The bits are as defined for the options parameter described in the Configuration Request section of the INAP Programmer s Manual 5 16 3 INAP_FE I NAP Functional Entities Synopsis This command is used to configure the NAP functional entity records for operation These allow the user application to refer to Functional Entities FEs in the network via a local reference rather than providing the full SCCP You may subsequently use this reference in the Destination FE or Originating FE parameters of the INAP_OPEN_DLG primitive
106. the PASSWORD typed for remote access to MMI sessions Parameter Range Password string of length 1 to 79 324 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued CONTACT Designated contact for the System Parameter Range Null or Text of length 0 to 31 May contain spaces chars will be converted to spaces CRC_MODE The Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC mode of operation If displayed the value in brackets represents the alternative integer value that can be used when entering the CRC mode during configuration of the PCM Parameter Range NONE 1 CRC generation disabled CRC4 2 CRC4 enabled The frame format must be set to CRC4 CRC6 4 CRC6 enabled The frame format must be set to ESF CRITICAL The number of critical alarms CSPC CSSN The Concerned Signaling Point Code Parameter Range Number between 0 to 16777215 A Remote Concerned Sub system Number Parameter Range Number between 0 to 254 CSSR SCCP concerned subsystem resource type Parameter Range RSP Remote signaling point LSS Local subsystem CSSRID Concerned Subsystem Resource Identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 2047 CSSRLID Concerned Subsystem List dentifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 32767 CWND The current congestion window for the peer address DATE Calendar date
107. the SS7 signaling to a distributed application layer split over multiple application hosts 7 5 1 Configuring a Dual Signaling Server Pair To create a dual resilient configuration for the signaling server modifications are required to both the system configuration done using the Man Machine Language MML interface and the protocol configuration in the config txt parameter file This may be done remotely and transferred to the signaling server using FTP 7 5 2 Hardware Requirements Configuring a signaling server as one half of a dual resilient system requires additional hardware ports to carry the inter signaling server link set between Signaling Server A and Signaling Server B This may be achieved using T1 E1 interfaces as shown in Figure 4 or over M2PA between the two units 376 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Figure 4 I nter Signaling Server Link over Crossed T1 E1 Cable Signaling Board PCMT runk 0 PCM T runk 1 Signaling ServerA PCMT runk 2 PCM T runk 3 feo eee eee eee BE SS 7 Network T1 E1 Trunk Containing SS7 Signaling Only pasennennees x Inter SIU SS7 Link Set Over T1 E1 Trunk danan va Signaling Board PCMT runk 0 Signaling PCMT runk 1 Server B SS7 Network smesse T1 E1 Trunk Containing SS7 Signaling Only PCM T runk 2 PCMT runk 3 Funnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnngunnnnnnnnn When carried over is carried over a T1 E
108. the VPI VCI address masks The default number of bits in the VPI address mask is 4 allocated to the lowest four bits OxOOF thus providing 16 valid VPIs from 0 to 15 The default for the VCI is to set the lowest nine bits of the VCI address mask OxO1FF thus providing 512 valid VCls from 0 to 511 note that VCI addresses 0 3 and 4 are reserved If it is necessary to match VPI VCI address combinations outside these ranges then the address bit masks can be rearranged provided that the maximum number of mask bits used is not exceeded This can result in matching non contiguous VCI or VPI address ranges For example VPI mask 0x09C will allow handling the following VPIs 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 128 132 136 140 144 148 152 and 156 In addition to the VPI VCI address mask requirements the following prerequisites should also be observed e The cell stream must be on the same board as the signaling link e Non ATM links cannot be associated with LIUs timeslots used by an ATM cell stream e Up to 128 links can be associated with a SS7MD card MTP Monitor Link configuration is viewed using the CNMLP MMI command and its status and measurements read using the STMLP an MSMLP MMI commands After startup additional Signaling Links can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNMLI command Signaling Links are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNMLE MMI command Dial
109. this is the Network Context that is assumed if no other explicit value is specified within the command 7 4 2 Support for Multiple Local Point Codes In some situations it is desirable to have an SIU terminate more than one local point code within the same SS7 network Each local point code can have separate routes and associated pairs of link sets to a destination point code This means that adding additional local point codes allows additional link sets to be used to send traffic to a destination point code As link sets are limited to 16 links adding more link sets using multiple local point codes effectively allows a larger total number of links to carry traffic to any single destination point code The figure below shows a simple configuration that uses two Network Contexts to allow a single SIU to connect to the remote node using two link sets from two independent local point codes Link set 0 and 1 are configured in Network Contexts NCO and NC1 respectively Figure 1 Multiple Network Context to Support Multiple Local Point Codes NCO Point Code 1 Remote Node Point Code 3 Point Code 2 369 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines The figure below extends the previous example to show a configuration with an STP pair This configuration uses two Network Contexts to allow a single Signaling Server to connect to the Remote Node using four link sets from two independent local point codes An equivalent configuration using a
110. to 1 the id field provides an indication of the MTP Label Format used in the parameter area This is the recommended setting for all new designs Note Bit 16 must to be set to 1 for the mixed network ISUP configuration Bit 17 controls how received Transfer Controlled and Signaling Route Set Congestion Messages that are not destined for the local point code are processed When set to 0 messages are discarded When set to 1 messages are sent to fixed module_id 0x0a on the host Bit 18 controls MTP3 operation on detection of Remote Processor Outage RPO When set to 0 on detection of RPO the signaling link is taken out of service and restoration commences This setting is useful for backward compatibility When set to 1 normal setting RPO is handled in accordance with the ITU T 1992 and later recommendations Bit 19 is used when MTP3 is operating in dual mode to control which bit of the Sub Service Field is used to flag messages that have been received by one MTP3 and are being conveyed to the dual module over the inter MTP3 link set o 0 Normal setting sub Service Field bit 2 is modified o 1 Alternative setting sub Service Field bit 0 is modified Bit 20 is used to select between 14 bit point codes and 16 bit point codes It is only significant when 24 bit point codes are not selected that is when bit 9 is set to 0 When set to 0 14 bit point codes are selected When set to 1 16 bit point co
111. to a table identified by the RKTAB parameter which must be specified for each Origin that needs to use the Routing Key Syntax MRI F_RK RKI Example MR MRI MRI MRF 106 F_RK RKI 1 F_RK RKI 2 F_RK RKI 2 _RK RKI 4 RKTAB OPC DPC SI NI CIC_RANGE HUNT DEST CP LABEL RKTAB 1 SI 3 DEST 1 RKTAB 1 OPC ANY DPC ANY SI 5 HUNT FIRST DEST 1 RKTAB 2 SI 3 DEST 2 LABEL London RKTAB 2 OPC 43434 DPC 44343 SI 5 CIC_RANGE 1 2000 HUNT BALANCE D EST 1 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Parameters RKI A Routing Key Index in the range 0 4095 used to uniquely identify a particular Routing Key RKTAB Logical Identifier of the Routing Key table in the range 0 49 OPC The OPC specified should match the one in message before the Routing Key entry is considered a match If OPC is set to ANY then any OPC is considered a match The parameter is optional and defaults to ANY DPC The DPC specified should match the one in message before the Routing Key entry is considered a match If DPC is set to ANY then any OPC is considered a match The parameter is optional and defaults to ANY The Network Indicator specified should match the one in message before the Routing Key entry is considered a match The parameter is optional and defaults to ANY SI The Service Indicator specified should match the one in
112. to act as a Remote Signaling Gateway The RSG may not have the same id value as an existing Remote Application Server No more than 32 SNLINKs can identify the same RSG All SIGTRAN links between the Signaling Server and a Remote Signaling Gateway must be of the same protocol type The valid range is 0 199 Used for M3UA configuration only and may only be set to a non zero value if bit 2 of the flags parameter is set 93 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 94 e NA The logical network appearance used in communicating with a remote server The valid range is 0 16777215 Used for M3UA configuration only and may only be set to a non zero value if bit 3 of the flags parameter is set e LIPI The first local IP address to be used in the association lip1 cannot be set to 0 and cannot be the same as lip2 May be an IPV4 address or IPTOKEN that references a IPv4 or IPV6 address If a local IP address is configured on one STN_LINK then each subsequent STN_LINK must have at least one local IP address configured e LI P2 The second local IP address to be used in the association May be an IPV4 address or IPTOKEN that references a Pv4 or IPV6 address It cannot be the same as lip1 SIGTRAN Link configuration is viewed using the CNSTP MMI command and its status and measurements read using the STSTP an MSSTP MMI commands After startup additional links can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNSTI command Links a
113. to the SCCP global title translation table This command must be specified after the SCCP_GTT_PATTERN and SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS commands Guidelines for configuring GTT can be found in section Section 7 15 GTT Configuration on page 393 Note The pattern mask primary and backup addresses referenced by this command must have an identical number of sections Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCCP_GTT GTPID 5 GTT_MASK R K PRI_GTAID 9 Example SCCP_GTT NC NC0 GTPID GTT_MASK PRI_GTAID SEC_GTAID GTTSRC ANY BAK_DUAL N OPTIONS 0 RIID 0 Parameters e NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context together with a Signaling Point Code SPC uniquely identifies an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e GTPID Identifies the pattern specified by the SCCP_GTT_PATTERN command This value is also used to index the translation within the SCCP module 119 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands GTT_MASK This is an expression detailing the operation to be applied to each section of the global title pattern The format is exactly one operation per section and must contain exactly the same number of sections as the lt gtai_pattern gt parameter of the associated SCCP_GTT_PATTERN command and the lt gtai_replacement gt parameter of the associated SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS command The mask can con
114. used 1 1 56 Kbps bit 8 not used Bit 12 sequence number length Set to 1 the HSL signaling link will use a 12 bit sequence number Set to 0 the HSL signaling link will use a 7 bit sequence number 12 bit sequence numbers may not be used for LSL links All other bits are reserved and should be set to zero For ATM only bits 0 to 2 are used e CELLSTR This parameter indicates the ATM_CELL_STREAM to be used e VPI The VPI associated with the ATM link on the cell stream e VCI The VCI associated with the ATM link on the cell stream e LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional Additional Prerequisites for ATM Operation The VPI and VCI ranges are statically defined in the initial configuration The VPI VCI range must be unique for all the virtual ports but constraints exist on the VPI and VCI value distribution as the total number of VPI VCI and cell stream combinations must be less than 65535 i e a 16bit range By default 3 bits are allocated for cell streams thus 13 bits are available for the VPI VCI address masks The default number of bits in the VPI address mask is 4 allocated to the lowest four bits OxOOF thus providing 16 valid VPIs from O to 15 The default for the VCI is to set the lowest nine bits of the VCI address mask OxO1FF thus providing 512 valid VCls from 0 to 511 note that VCI addresses 0
115. valid AAL5 frames TXOCT Number of data octets transmitted TXDISC Number of transmitted AAL5 frames discarded TXERR Number of frames with errors transmitted PERIOD Time since measurements on the port were last reset 11 2 MSCGP Circuit Group Measurements This command displays measurements for the configured circuit groups When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSCGP RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Call gt Circuit Groups gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSCGP MSCGP RESET yY Output Format Circuit group status CGRP IOFF IANS OGOFF OGANS MAXDEV ACCUM PERIOD 0 5 5 0 0 30 0 00 00 30 1 332 5 65665 0 30 0 00 00 30 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows GID Circuit Group ID OFF The number of incoming calls attempted IANS The number of incoming calls answered OGOFF The number of outgoing calls attempted OGANS The number of outgoing calls answered MAXDEV Maximum number of devices active in the group at any time ACCUM The accumulated call duration PERIOD The measurement period Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 11 3 MSCRP SS7 Route Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for SS7 routes When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSCRP RESET Web
116. values Interface_ Description mode TDM Single timeslot signaling link ATM ATM Signaling Link E1_FRAMED Framed 31 timeslot E1 operation T1_FRAMED Framed 24 timeslot T1 operation PCM Structured 30 timeslot E1 operation timeslots 0 and 16 are used for signaling The monitoring type value must be consistent with the liu_type and frame_format values of the LIU_CONFIG command e BPOS The board position of the signaling processor allocated to process the incoming signaling The board must already have been configured using the SS7_ BOARD command e BLINK For non ATM this is the index of the logical signaling processor SP channel on the board allocated for signaling link monitoring For ATM this is the layer 2 link id For Dialogic DSI SS7LD Network Interface monitoring up to 16 low speed signaling links the blink parameter may be written as a single value in the range 0 to 15 For Dialogic DSI SS7MD Network Interface monitoring up to 124 low speed signaling links the blink parameter may be written as a single value in the range 0 to 123 For Dialogic DSI SS7MD Network Interface monitoring up to 4 high speed signaling links the blink parameter may be written as a single value in the range 0 to 3 When the SS7 link is to be conveyed over ATM this is the layer 2 link id BPOS2 The board position of the stream from which the signaling is to be inserted This paramete
117. 0 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Syntax CNGLI SNRT Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Gateways gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN Gateway List ID has not been initiated The SIGTRAN Gateway List is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN Gateway List is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNGLI SNRT 1 6 3 24 CNGLP SIGTRAN Remote Signaling Gateway List Configuration This command displays the configuration of relationships between Signaling Gateways and SIGTRAN Routes on the system Syntax CNGLP RSG Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Gateways gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNGLP CNGLP RSG 3 171 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format SIGTRAN Remote Signaling Gateway List Configuration GLID SNRT RSG OPTIONS 1 1 0x0001 2 1 2 0x0001 3 2 2 0x0001 4 3 1 0x0001 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command STN_RSGLIST for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 25 CNGPE SCCP GTT Pattern End This com
118. 0 22 131 2 SIGTRAN Link Configuration Page 2 of 2 SNLINK SNTYPE END LPORT RPORT OPTIONS M2PA ID RSG NC NA LABEL 1 M3UA 3565 3565 0x0000 NCO See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command STN_LINK for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 83 CNSWP System Software Configuration This command displays the version of active software and if applicable the previous software version It also lists and software available for other operating modes Syntax CNSWP Web Management Location System Administration gt Software gt System Software gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNSWP Output Format System Software Configuration SYSTYPE SIU RESTART SOFT RESET N OPERATING SS7G40 SIU Release 1 0 0 Build 1001 209 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 3 84 CNSYP System Configuration This command displays the system configuration including the system identity contact and system location details as well as proving information on diagnostic trace management Syntax CNSYP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt System gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNSYP New row between UNITID and SYSID with the text UNIT_SERIAL LG401002 The spaci
119. 0 8103 9000 9128 the value identified by HTTPSPORT or the HTTPSPORT value of another Web Server Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 HUNT Destination Table Hunt type Parameter Range FIRST The first available destination from the destination table will be selected starting at the lowest number row CIRCULAR The next available destination from the destination table will be selected in a round robin manner each time a new message is routed BALANCE A destination from a destination table will be selected from the Destination Table in a round robin manner on a per call basis with the next available Destination being selected each time a message matching the Routing Key contains an ISUP BICC IAM message The OPC DPC and a BICC ISUP Service indicator must be present in the routing key for IAM hunting to be used SHARE A destination from a destination table will be selected based on the SLS field in the received message If the destination is not available the next available destination will be selected based on the SLS and the number of remaining destinations ID Identifier associated with an alarm event The meaning of the id field depends on the alarm type Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 333 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued IFTYPE The interface type for the link Parameter Range TDM Single timeslot signaling link M2PA SIGTRAN M2PA Signaling Link AT
120. 0000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 9 CNCRE SS7 Route End This command removes an MTP route Note MTP routes are dynamically removed by first deleting the route from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the route from the system Syntax CNCRE C7RT 161 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Routes gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The MTP Route ID has been initiated The MTP Route is not present in the config txt file The MTP Route is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SS7 Route End is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNCRE C7RT 1 6 3 10 CNCRI SS7 Route I nitiate This command adds a new MTP route Note MTP routes are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Configuring a MTP route to an adjacent Signaling End Point S
121. 1 DMHOST 0 M3UA Options Configuration STN_CONFIG NC NC0 SS7MODE OPTIONS 0 SHARE 100 STN_CONFIG SS7MODE ITU14 SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration STN_LAS NC NCO LAS OPC RC TRMD LS OPTIONS 0 LABEL STN_LAS LAS 0 OPC 100 RC 1 STN_LAS LAS 1 O0PC 100 RC 2 x SIGTRAN Link Configuration STN_LINK NC NCO SNLINK SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 RIP2 LIP1 LIP2 END S LPORT 2905 RPORT 2905 OPTIONS 0 RSG NA LABEL STN_LINK SNLINK 0 SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 192 168 17 200 LIP1 192 168 17 201 END C LPORT 2905 RPORT 2905 STN_LINK SNLINK 1 SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 192 168 17 200 LIP1 192 168 17 201 END C LPORT 2906 RPORT 2906 STN_LINK SNLINK 2 SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 192 168 17 200 LIP1 192 168 17 201 END C LPORT 2907 RPORT 2907 STN_LINK SNLINK 3 SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 192 168 17 200 LIP1 192 168 17 201 END C LPORT 2908 RPORT 2908 SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration STN_RAS NC NCO RAS DPC RC NASP 1 OPTIONS 0 LABEL STN_RAS RAS 0 DPC 10 RC 1 STN_RAS RAS 1 DPC 11 RC 1 SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Configuration k STN_RASLIST RLID RAS SNLINK STN_RASLIST RLID 0 RAS 0 SNLINK 0 STN_RASLIST RLID 1 RAS 0 SNLINK 1 STN_RASLIST RLID 2 RAS 1 SNLINK 2 STN_RASLIST RLID 3 RAS 1 SNLINK 3 SIGTRAN Bind Configuration STN_LBIND BIND LAS RAS R
122. 1 Available 0 Available 2 NCO 2171 Available 0 Available Available 3 NC1 51 Unavailable 0 Unavailable The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e ROUTE Logical reference for an SS7 route e NC SS7 Network Context e ROUTE STATUS Possible values are Available The route is available for traffic to the remote point code of the route Unavailable The route is unavailable for traffic to the remote point code of the route e CONG LEVEL Possible values are 0 no congestion 1 2 or 3 indicates the ITU ANSI congestion level 300 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e LS1 STATUS and LS2 STATUS Possible values are Available The link set on the route is available for traffic to the adjacent point code Unavailable The link set on the route is unavailable for traffic to the adjacent point code 6 13 4 STDDP Disk Drive Status This command displays the status of all hard disk drives within the RAID array Syntax STDDP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Disk Drives gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STDDP Output Format Disk Drive status DRIVE STATE 1 UP 2 UP The STATUS field will display one of the following values e UP The disk drive is operational and all the RAID devices on this drive are in an active sync state e DOWN The d
123. 1 BRDTYPE SS7MD 6 3 6 CNCGE Circuit Group End This command removes a Circuit Group Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the group from the system Syntax CNCGE GID Web Management Location System Administration gt Call gt Circuit Groups gt Configuration 159 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The Circuit Group ID has been initiated The Circuit Group has been deactivated The Circuit Group is not used in any other configuration The Circuit Group is not present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Circuit Group is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNCGE GID 1 6 3 7 CNCGI Circuit Group Initiate This command adds a new Circuit Group Note Circuit Groups are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNCGI GID Web Management Location System Administration gt Call gt Circuit Groups gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuratio
124. 1 interface the inter signaling server signaling link set can be configured to use any signaling processor on any signaling board and may be carried on any of the available interfaces on the signaling board 7 5 3 System Configuration The system assignment of Signaling server A or Signaling Server B is made by specifying the MODE parameter in the SIU_DUAL configuration command 7 5 4 Changes to the config txt Parameter File Each signaling server is configured individually The config txt parameter file held on each unit reflects the configuration view of the local unit only hence assignments of link set and link identities are only unique within a single unit For the dual resilient configuration the operating mode of the server and the IP address of the other signaling server must be declared using the SIU_DUAL command 7 5 4 1 Configuring the I nter Signaling Server Link The inter signaling server link set should be defined on both units using the MTP_LINKSET command with bit 15 of the OPTIONS parameter set to 1 This link set must have the same value defined for the OPC and APC values this will be the local point code of the signaling server pair Links are added to the inter signaling server link set using the MTP_LINK command assigning incrementing REF and SLC values as normal The BPOS and BLINK parameters define which SS7 processor or signaling processor SP channel manages each link For a link using a PCM port the physical loca
125. 13 T14 T15 T16 T17 T22 T23 T24 SLTC1 or SLTC2 e TSEC The timer value specified in seconds 81 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands e TMSEC The timer value specified in milliseconds Note that the timer granularity is 100ms Any timers not configured continue to be set to the values shown in the following table ITU T or ANSI selection is made by setting the value of the MTP_CONFIG options parameter 82 MTP3 Timer ITU T mode ANSI mode T1 1s ls T2 155s 1 55 T3 ls ls T4 1s ls T5 ls ls T6 1s ls T10 45s 45s T12 1 25 125s T13 1 2 s 1 2 s T14 2 55 2 55 T15 2 55 2 55 T16 1 85 1 85 T17 ls 1s T22 270s 2705s T23 270s 270s T24 500 ms 500 ms SLTC T1 7S 7S SLTC T2 30s 30s The following timers are set to their default values and are not configurable MTP3 ITU T mode ANSI mode Timer T7 2s 2s T8 1s ls T11 6s 6s T18 20s 20s T19 68 s 68 s T20 60s 60s Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 MTP3 ITU T mode ANSI mode Timer T21 645 645s T101 2s 2s Note T9 is not used on the Signaling Server Note The Signaling Server does not perform checks on MTP3 timer values Note MTP timers not specified in this table are not configurable they well be set to their specific ITU or ANSI default value 5 6 7 QSAAL_TI MER QSAAL Timer Configuration The QSAAL_TI MER command prov
126. 14 55 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows RXMSG number of messages received TXMSG number of messages transmitted RXOCT number of octets received in messages excluding message header octets rounded down to the nearest 1000 TXOCT number of octets transmitted in messages excluding message header octets rounded down to the nearest 1000 OOSDUR the total amount time the link was out of service in multiples of 100ms OOSDUR the total amount time the link was out of service in multiples of 100ms NOOS the number of times the link went out of service NDISCARD the number of messages due to be transmitted that were discarded PERIOD the time period over which these statistics have been gathered in hours minutes and seconds 273 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 11 9 MSHPP Diameter Peer Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for Diameter Peers Syntax MSHPP HDPR Web Management Location System Administration gt Diameter gt Peer gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSHPP MSHPP HDPR O Output Format Diameter Peer Measurements HDPR RXMSG TXMSG PERIOD 4 4343 4000 01 17 45 6 11 10 MSLCP Software License Capability Measurements This command shows measurements related to software licenses on the system When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are
127. 162 6 3 11 CNCRP SS7 Route Configuration cccceeee cette eee eee teeter neta 163 6 3 12 CNCSE SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource End ccceecee eect etna ee ee ee 163 6 3 13 CNCSI SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource Initiate cece 164 6 3 14 CNCSP SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource Configuration 0065 165 6 3 15 CNDRE DTS Host Route End eee eterna 165 6 3 16 CNDRI DTS Host Route Initiate ener 166 6 3 17 CNDRP DTS Host Routing Resource Print ccccece eee eee teeter eee 167 6 3 18 CNDUP Dual Operation Configuration c ccc eee etter e eee eae 167 6 3 19 CNGAE SCCP GTT Address End s ssssssssrsrsersrrererrerersrrarrrrerrnrernerersrrere 168 6 3 20 CNGAI SCCP GTT Address Initiate 0 00 0 cece nee eee ee nena ened 168 6 3 21 CNGAP SCCP GTT Address Configuration cccceeeee eee eee eee eater eee 169 6 3 22 CNGLE SIGTRAN Gateway List ENd cece cece eterna tee e etna ea eaed 170 6 3 23 CNGLI SIGTRAN Gateway List Initiate eect ee ead 170 6 3 24 CNGLP SIGTRAN Remote Signaling Gateway List Configuration 171 6 3 25 CNGPE SCOP GTT Pattern End sarriro cece ee ee eee nena eae ened 172 6 3 26 CNGPI SCCP GTT Pattern Initiate 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee ee teen ed 173 6 3 27 CNGPP SCCP GTT Pattern Configuration cc cee eee eee eee ee eee eee eae 173 6 3 28 CNGTE SCCP GTT Translation End
128. 1d LSSPROT INAP SCCP_RSP NC NCO SSRID 1 SPC 3 SCCP_RSS NC NCO SSRID 2 SPC 3 SSN 8 SCCP_LSS NC NC1 SSRID 3 SSN 8 USER_ID 0x1d LSSPROT INAP SCCP_RSP NC NC1 SSRID 4 SPC 3 SCCP_RSS NC NC1 SSRID 5 SPC 3 SSN 8 INAP Options Configuration INAP_CONFIG NC NC0 OPTIONS 0 INAP_CONFIG NC NCO INAP_CONFIG NC NC1 End of file F F HF 382 E I Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Multiple Network Configuration Example The Network Context based configuration of the SIU mode allows the settings and behavior to be configured independently for each Network Context This allows a system to be configured with mixed ITU and ANSI network types or allows multiple networks of the same type to configured with different settings Figure 8 Multiple Network Configuration Example Va NCO Link Set 0 Point Code 1 J i PointCode5 j 14 Bit PC k Fie Remote Node fo Z NC1 Remote Node Point Code 6 Link Set 1 Point Code2 NY ae SIU j j 2 _ Persian _NC2 ieoa Remote Node Point Code 7 Link Set 2 Point Code 3 4 4 i ONV oe Sees ieee a eee EEE EE VA ia Ka m _NC3 Remote Node Point Code Link Set 3 Point Code 4 SS i The example config txt file below shows the configuration of a system based on the figure above
129. 2 0 0 0x00008 0x00000 2 NC1 3 0 0 0x00008 0x00000 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command MTP_ROUTE for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 12 CNCSE SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource End This command removes a Concerned Sub System Resource Note Concerned Sub System Resources are dynamically removed by first deleting the Resource from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the Resource from the system Syntax CNCSE CSSRLID 163 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt SCCP CSSRs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The Concerned Sub System List ID has been initiated The Concerned Sub System List ID is not present in the config txt file The Concerned Sub System is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Concerned Sub System Resource is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNCSE CSSRLID 1 6 3 13 CNCSI SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource Initiate This command adds a new Concerned Sub System Resource Note Concerned Sub System Resources are dynam
130. 32 link equivalents TDM or SIGTRAN G03 094 SS7SBG40SWSM64_ SWS Messaging Location 64 link equivalents G04 094 SS7SBG40SWSM128 SWS Messaging Location 128 link equivalents G05 094 SS7SBG40SWSM256 SWS Messaging Location 256 link equivalents For SIGTRAN links A link equivalent is the equivalent to the use of a 64kb s link at a maximum loading of 0 6 Erlang Individual user deployments may exhibit different characteristics from this in which case it may be necessary to provision more or less capacity accordingly Note SWS licenses include the MTP3 M2PA M3UA SCCP TCAP and MAP protocol layers 1 3 Cumulative Licensing It is possible to purchase multiple licenses and combine their capabilities so that the licensed capabilities of the Signaling Server can be enhanced For example a SS7SBG40SIU16 and a SS7SBG40SIU32 license can be purchased and combined to create a 48 link equivalent SIU license To combine licenses enter multiple License IDs when using the License Activation form at http mMembersresource dialogic com ss7 license license asp If one or more licenses have already been activated and additional license s are being added to extend the capabilities of the Signaling Server the License IDs for ALL licenses must be entered Licenses may be activated in any combination but the Signaling Server cannot licensed beyond its maximum capabilities Only licenses of the same operating mode may be com
131. 41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e BPOS The board position of the of the signaling board The valid range is 0 to 1 with board 0 at the bottom of the chassis e BRDTYPE The board type Valid values are SS7LD and SS7MD OPTIONS A 32 bit value used to configure run time configuration options as follows Bit O indicates the clocking mode When not set T1 E1 clocks are generated from the local oscillator on this board When set T1 E1 clocks are recovered from the highest priority T1 E1 port on this board and used as the output clock for all other ports on this board The highest priority clock source is taken from the first configured PCM and then the next highest priority from subsequent configured ports Bit 16 When set on a SS7MD board with LIUs in use for ATM operation the ATM Forum Idle cell format will be used rather than ITU Bit 19 When set the system will ensure that timestamps are always later than the previous reported timestamp In situations where for whatever reason time is adjusted backwards the timestamps will increase at the minimal amount until the current time is again greater than the previous reported timestamp All other bits in the OPTIONS parameter are reserved and should be set to zero Board configuration is viewed using the CNBOP MMI command its status read using the STBOP MMI command 5 5 2 LIU_ CONFIG Line I nterface Configuration Synopsis This command is used to configure the PCM format used
132. 6 3 62 CNSBE SIGTRAN Local Bind End ccccceeceeeeee erect esse eeteateeeanentennenennea 195 6 3 63 CNSBI SIGTRAN Local Bind Initiate eee tetera 196 6 3 64 CNSBP SIGTRAN Local Bind Configuration ccceecee teen eee ee teeta ea eaed 197 6 3 65 CNSLE SS 7 EMK ENA aini cites ox dacathcaivslnds A Ea E AEA IDEE KEA GMa EET 197 6 3 66 CNSLI SS7 Link Initiate nsaria cir oi ora aui a a a a T 198 6 3 67 CNSLP SS7 Link Configuration sssssssssssrssrrerrrerirsrrnrrrrerrnrirnrrrrrrrrrrno 199 6 3 68 CNSMC Configuration SNMP Manager Chang cccceeeeeeeee eens teen eee eaed 199 6 3 69 CNSME Configuration SNMP Manager End cceceeeeeee tence teeta eae eaee 200 6 3 70 CNSMI Configuration SNMP Manager Initiate a e 200 6 3 71 CNSMP SNMP Manager Configuration ceceeeee cent eee teen e nett eee a ened 202 6 3 72 CNSNP SNMP Configuration cece ce cece eee eaten ened 202 6 3 73 CNSNS Configuration SNMP Set cece eee nee teeta eaed 203 6 3 74 CNSRE SIGTRAN Route End cceceececcece eect etree erent eaten ene eat eat eeenneateatnees 203 6 3 75 CNSRI SIGTRAN Route Initiate 2 0 0 eee teeta eaed 204 6 3 76 CNSRP SIGTRAN Route Configuration ccececeeeee cent eee ee eee eee ee eee eaed 205 6 3 77 CNSSE SCCP Subsystem Resource End cccecceceeeeet eee eeeeeeaeeateeeaeeeteenenes 205 6 3 78 CNSSI SCCP Subsystem Resource Initiate
133. 7 matches 1234567 but does not match 1236767 Global Title Pattern configuration is viewed using the CNGPP MMI command Global Title Patterns can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNGPI command Global Title Patterns are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNGPE MMI command 5 10 7 SCCP_RSP SCCP Remote Signaling Points Synopsis Each remote signaling point that the SCCP is able to communicate with must be assigned using an SCCP_RSP command This includes the adjacent signaling point and all remote signaling points Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCCP_RSP NC NCO SSRID SPC OPTIONS 0 PCMASK 0 RIID 0 LABEL Example SCCP_RSP SSRID 1 SPC 1236 Parameters The SCCP_RSP command includes the following parameters NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that the SSR is being configured for When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e SSRID A unique value in the range 0 to 2047 that is used to identify the SSR 512 SSRIDs are allowed per Network Context The same SSRID cannot be used in configuration of any other LSS RSP or RSS 126 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e SPC The point code of the remote signaling point which may be either an STP or an SCP OPTIONS A 16 bit value where each b
134. AI command Local Application Servers are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNLAE MMI command 91 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 92 7 3 STN_LINK SIGTRAN Link Configuration Synopsis The SIGTRAN link configuration command supports both M2PA and M3UA SIGTRAN links Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax STN_LINK NC NCO SNLINK SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 RIP2 LIP1 LIP2 END S LPORT 2905 RPORT 2905 0 PTIONS 0 RSG NA LABEL STN_LINK SNLINK SNTYPE M2PA RIP1 RIP2 LIP1 LIP2 END S LPORT 3565 RPORT 3565 OPTIONS 0 M2PAID LABEL Examples STN_LINK SNLINK 1 SNTYPE M2 PA RIP1 192 168 1 2 L1IP1 192 168 1 1 END C LPORT 3565 RPORT 3565 M2PAID 1 STN_LINK SNLINK 2 SNTYPE M3UA RIP1 192 168 17 20 LIP1 192 168 17 21 END S LPORT 2906 RPORT 2906 OPTION S 0x0006 RSG 1 The STN_LINK command has the following parameters NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context the specific SS7 network the SIGTRAN Link is operating with When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 The parameter is only applicable for M3UA operation SNTYPE Identifies the SIGTRAN protocol and should be set to either M2PA or M3UA SNLI NK Logical reference for a SIGTRAN link acceptable values are 0 255 A snlink is unique to one link and cannot be re used by another type e M2PAI D
135. AP SNMP Trap actions Parameter Range ALL Any event when the object is in this state will result in a trap NONE No event when the object is in this state will result in a trap CREATE Configuration events resulting in a transition to this state will result in a trap CHANGE Change events in this state will result in a trap DESTROY Configuration change events in this state will result in a trap TRESTART SNMP Trap actions in the RESTART state Parameter Range ALL Any event when the object is in this state will result in a trap NONE No event when the object is in this state will result in a trap CREATE Configuration events resulting in a transition to this state will result in a trap CHANGE Change events in this state will result in a trap DESTROY Configuration change events in this state will result in a trap TRMD The traffic mode for the Local Application Server Parameter Range LS Loadshare BC Broadcast OR Override TS Timeslot on a PCM Parameter Range Number between 0 to 31 TSEC A timer value in seconds TSHUT Total number of transactions that failed during framework shutdown and are dropped TSMASK Hex number from 0 to ffffffff TTOTAL TTOUT Total number of transactions Total number of transactions that failed due to a timeout 361 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued
136. AP will be generated for a particular DSMI object Essentially a TRAP can be generated e When any row within an object changes state CHANGE e When a new row with a particular state is created within an object CREATE e When a row with a particular state is destroyed within an object DESTROY e When any combination of the above occur ALL or when an event occurs that affects the alarm condition of the object but does not necessarily change the state TRAPs can also be completely disabled NONE Possible states that a DSMI object can transition into are UP Operational and available DOWN Not available INACTIVE Operational but not available IMPAIR Operational and available but encountering service affecting condition e g congestion RESTART Unavailable but will soon be available QUIESCE Operational but in the process of shutting down being removed WARNING Operational and available but encountering a non service affecting condition Only one states TRAP configuration can be configured per single invocation of this command 188 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The CNOBP command displays the current TRAP configuration for each object These TRAP messages are sent to SNMP managers which are defined with the CNSMI command The default setting for object states is CHANGE Syntax CNOBS OBJGRP OBJECT TUP TDOWN TINACTIVE TIMPAIR TRESTART
137. BPOS BLINK STREAM TS OPTIONS 0x0006 LABEL HSL Links MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE lt HSLtype gt LINKSET REF SLC BPOS BLINK STREAM TS OPTIONS 0x0006 LABE L MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE ATM LINKSET REF SLC BPOS BLINK OPTIONS 0x00006 CELLSTR VPI VCI LA BEL Example MTP_LINK LINK 1 IFTYPE TDM LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BLINK 0 STREAM 1 TS 16 LABEL Dublin MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE M2PA LINKSET 2 REF 0 SLC 0 BLINK 10 MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE ATM LINKSET 1 REF 2 SLC 2 BPOS 1 BLINK 5 OPTIONS 0x00000006 CELLSTR 5 VPI 4 VCI 5 Parameters The MTP_LINK command includes the following parameters e LFTYPE IFTYPE identifies the interface type for signaling links Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The interface mode should be set to one of the following values Interface_mode Description TDM Single timeslot signaling link M2PA SIGTRAN M2PA Signaling Link ATM ATM Signaling Link E1_FRAMED Framed 31 timeslot E1 operation T1_FRAMED Framed 24 timeslot T1 operation PCM Structured 30 timeslot E1 operation timeslots 0 and 16 are used for signaling The interface_mode value must be consistent with the liu_type and frame_format values of the LIU_CONFIG command e LINK The links unique logical link identity within the Signaling Server It must be in the ran
138. C DOMAIN SI combination Domain must be set to one of these NETWORK AS or UPART Example MROGI OGID 1 10 12 MROGP Message Router Origin Configuration This command displays all configured Message Router Origins Note See the individual parameter definitions of the config txt command MRF_OG defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters supported Syntax MROGP OGI D 262 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Origin gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MROGP Output Format Message Router Origin Configuration OGID NC DOMAIN SI OPC RKTAB CP LABEL 0 NCO M3UA 3 ANY 1 NONE 1 NCO MTP 3 ANY 1 T 6 10 13 MRRKI Message Router Routing Key Initiate This command adds a new Routing Key Note Configuration may be dynamically added by 1 Entering an additional configuration command MRF_RK in the config txt file 2 Executing the MRRKI MMI command to load that configuration Syntax MRRKI RKI Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Routing Key gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The Routing Key has not been initiated The Routing Key is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse
139. CATION The location of this System Parameter Range Null or Text of length 0 to 31 May contain spaces chars will be converted to spaces LOGLVL Flow environment debug log level Number from 0 to 6 LOOPMD The diagnostic loopback mode LOSS _ PCT The percentage of packets lost LPORT Local IP port for an association Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 LS1 The first Link Set on a Route Parameter Range Number between 0 to 63 339 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued LS2 The second Link Set on a Route Parameter Range Number between 0 to 63 LSSPROT Local Subsystem Protocol Parameter Range SCCP The SCCP protocol TCAP The TCAP protocol MAP The MAP protocol INAP The INAP protocol 1S41 The IS41 protocol DTS DTS running over the SCCP protocol DTS_MAP DTS running over the MAP protocol DTS_INAP DTS running over the INAP protocol DTS_1S41 DTS running over the 1S41 protocol M2PAID M2PA Identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 M3UASHARE Only required to be set to a non blank value when both M3UA and network facing M2PA links are configured at the same time This parameter is percentage share of the SIGTRAN portion of server license allocated to M3UA links with the remaining percentage being available for network facing M2PA links The SIGTRAN portion of the server license is determined by the value of the TDM Share para
140. CNP ORGTON ORGNP DSTTON DSTNP RCOPT RDEL HLRRI D MSCRIID MATTC PROFILE NAME SCTON SCNP SCADDR ORGTONE ORGNP ORGADDRe DSTTON DSTNP RCOPT RDEL HLRRID MSCRI ID MATTE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MT SMS Tx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service The service center address must be unique within the network context Example MATTI PROFILE 0 NAME TRO SCADDR 1234567 ORGADDR 7654321 MATTC PROFILE 0 RCOPT Y MATTE PROFILE 0 245 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 7 16 MATTP MAP MT SMS Tx Profile Print Synopsis Command to display configurations associated with MAP Transmit MT SMS service profiles Syntax MATTP PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MT SMS Tx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MATTP PROFILE 0 Output Format MAP MT SMS Tx Profile PROFILE NAME MTSMS_TRANS_ 0 NC NCO SCTON International SCNP ISDN SCADDR 666666666666 ORGTON International ORGNP ISDN ORGADDR 666666666666 DSTTON International DSTNP ISDN RCOPT N OPTIONS 0x00000000 RDEL N HLRRIID 0 MSCRIID 0 246 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7
141. CPP Message Router Custom Profile Configuration eceeeeeeeeee es 259 6 10 7 MRDEE Message Router Destination End cccccceeeee eee eect eee eee teeta ened 259 6 10 8 MRDEI Message Router Destination Initiate eect eee eee eee ed 260 6 10 9 MRDEP Message Router Destination Configuration cceeeeeeeeeee ee eee 261 6 10 10 MROGE Message Router Origin Configuration ccececee eee ee eee e eee eee eaee 261 6 10 11MROGI Message Router Origin Configuration ccccceeeee cece eee ee eee ened 262 6 10 12MROGP Message Router Origin Configuration ccceceeeee cece eee ee eee e tees 262 6 10 13MRRKI Message Router Routing Key Initiate cece eee eee ee eee 263 6 10 14MRRKE Message Router Routing Key End ccceceeeee eens eee ee eee teen eee eaed 264 6 10 15MRRKI Message Router Routing Key Initiate eee ee eee ened 264 6 10 16MRRKP Message Router Routing Key Configuration ceeeeeeeeeee eee ee 265 Measurement COMMANAG e ee ene teeta enn 265 6 11 1 MSACP ATM Cell Stream Traffic Measurements ceee 267 6 11 2 MSCGP Circuit Group Measurement cece eect eee ee teen e neta eena ened 268 6 11 3 MSCRP SS7 Route Measurements ccc ete eect etter treet eae teeta ened 269 6 11 4 MSDBP Subscriber Database Service Measurement 6 eeeeeeeee ee eee 269 6 11 5 MSDEP Message Router Desti
142. Dialogic Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual www dialogic com Copyright and Legal Notice Copyright 2012 2014 Dialogic Inc All Rights Reserved You may not reproduce this document in whole or in part without permission in writing from Dialogic Inc at the address provided below All contents of this document are furnished for informational use only and are subject to change without notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Dialogic Inc and its affiliates or subsidiaries Dialogic Reasonable effort is made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained in the document However Dialogic does not warrant the accuracy of this information and cannot accept responsibility for errors inaccuracies or omissions that may be contained in this document INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH DIALOGIC PRODUCTS NO LICENSE EXPRESS OR IMPLIED BY ESTOPPEL OR OTHERWISE TO ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IS GRANTED BY THIS DOCUMENT EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN A SIGNED AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND DIALOGIC DIALOGIC ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DIALOGIC DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY RELATING TO SALE AND OR USE OF DIALOGIC PRODUCTS INCLUDING LIABILITY OR WARRANTIES RELATING TO FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE MERCHANTABILITY OR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHT OF A THIRD PARTY Dialogic products are not intended for use in certain safety affecting situati
143. EP requires any all previously configured MTP links that will be associated with the route to be taken out of service deactivated and then brought back into service activated to allow the route to come fully into service New MTP routes that reach a destination via an STP do not require this additional step as they will come into service on the completion of the Signaling Route Set Test mechanism Syntax CNCRI C7RT Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Routes gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access 162 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Prerequisites The MTP Route ID has not been initiated The MTP Route is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SS7 Route Initiate is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNCRI C7RT 1 6 3 11 CNCRP SS7 Route Configuration This command displays MTP route configuration data Syntax CNCRP C7RT Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Routes gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNCRP CNCRP C7RT 0 Output Format SS7 Route Configuration C7RT NC DPC LS1 LS2 UPMASK OPTIONS LABEL 0 NCO T 0 0 0x00008 0x00000 1 NCO
144. Errors in the Configuration File cece ee cette eee ee ee eee eee ee teeta nanan 59 5 4 SIU Environment Commands tenner 60 5 4 1 IP_TOKEN IP Token Configuration icici ene ents 60 5 4 2 IP_HOST IP Host Configuration cette eter eee entree 60 5 4 3 MULTI_NODE Multi Node Configuration cic eeeceeee teeter terete eres 61 5 4 4 SIU _HOSTS SIU Host Settings Configuration cccececee eee eee ee teeta en ene 62 5 4 5 SIU DUAL DUAL SIU Configuration ttre eeis 63 5 5 Physical Interface COMMANAS ccc enn e aetna 64 5 5 1 SS7_BOARD SS7 Board Configuration 1 0 0 eee ceee terete etter eee ee es 64 5 5 2 LIU_CONFIG Line Interface Configuration cccececeeee eect e eee ee eens anata ee 65 5 5 3 STREAM_XCON Cross Connect Configuration cccceceeee eens ee eee eee ea en enes 68 5 5 4 ATM_CELL_STREAM ATM Cell Stream Configuration seeren 69 5 6 MIP COMMANAS yess aiat enna iE aa eivaghtynesitguales a E Ea E a A steel aaseees 70 5 6 1 MTP_CONFIG Global MTP Configuration sssssessessrrerrererererrerrerrrreirerrerrrns 71 5 6 2 MTP_LINKSET MTP Link Setanar roni aia i va ei aa TEE A EAT 73 5 6 3 MTP_LINK MTP Signaling Link ssssssssssssrsssrssrrrsrrrrrnrsrrnrnrnrrrnnrrrrrrrerrnrrne 74 5 6 4 MTP_ROUTE MTP ROUTE eonan eea a aa a DE e TTia 78 5 6 5 MTP2_TIMER MTP2 Timer Configuration sssssssssssrrerrererrrerrerrrrerrerirr
145. FG_DGRP command allows you to configure TCAP dialog groups each group handling a sub set of the total available dialogs This allows each group to reside on a separate host computer that in turn allows the application using TCAP to be distributed over several machines If the TCAP_CFG_DGRP command is omitted the complete range of dialog identifiers defined by the TCAP_CONFIG command is assigned to host_id 0 Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax TCAP_CFG_DGRP lt DLGGID gt lt BASE_ODLG gt lt NUM_ODLG gt lt BASE_IDLG gt lt NUM_IDLG gt lt OPTIONS gt lt USER_HOST gt Examples TCAP_CFG_DGRP 0 0x0000 1024 0x8000 1024 0 0 TCAP_CFG_DGRP 1 0x0400 1024 0x8400 1024 0 1 135 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Parameters The TCAP_CFG_DGRP command includes the following parameters e DLGGID A logical identifier for this group the valid range being 0 to 31 e BASE_ODLG The first outgoing dialog ID assigned to this dialog group e NUM_ODLG The number of outgoing dialogs assigned to this group hence outgoing dialog IDs base_ogdlg_id to base_ogdlg_id nog_dialogues 1 are assigned to this group e BASE_IDLG The first incoming dialog ID assigned to this dialog identifier group e NUM_IDLG The number of incoming dialogs assigned to this group hence outgoing dialog IDs base_ogdlg_id to base_icdlg_id nic_dialogues 1 are assigned to this group e OPTIONS Should be set to zero e USER_HOST Identifies the host computer to whi
146. FIG lt options gt parameter and indicates which elements of addressing are present in the called party address pattern being defined Bit usage for this parameter differs between the ITU Q 713 and ANSI T1 112 specifications For ITU the parameter is defined as Bit 8 Reserved for national use Bit 7 Routing indicator 0 Route on GT 1 Route on SSN Bits 6 3 Global title indicator the value in these bits indicates what data precedes address information in the global title so in the context of the SCCP_GTT_ PATTERN statement which octets are expected in the lt global_title gt parameter Defined values are 0000 No Global title In this case the lt global_title gt parameter value should be 0 zero base10 without 0x prefix 0001 Global title includes Nature of Address Indicator NAI only The lt global_title gt parameter see below should be a single hexadecimal octet prefix 0x followed by two hexadecimal digits the octet value being the NAI 121 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 0010 Global title includes Translation Type TT only The lt global_title gt parameter should be a single hexadecimal octet the octet value being the TT 0011 Global title includes TT Numbering Plan NP and Encoding Scheme ES The lt global_title gt parameter should be two hexadecimal octets prefix 0x followed by four hexadecimal digits the TT in the first octet the NP and ES fo
147. G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 2 Licensing Installation and Initial Configuration 2 1 Software Licensing Functional capabilities and signaling protocols are activated on the Signaling Server through the use of software licenses The following section provides information on the purchase of software licenses as well as information relating to temporary operation of the Signaling Server without software licenses The Software licenses supported on the SS7G41 Signaling Server are identified in Section 2 1 2 Supported Licenses on page 20 For details on the licenses supported by the BorderNet DSH and how to obtain them please contact your normal sales channel 2 1 1 Purchasing Software Licenses 1 Place an order using your normal sales channel quoting the product ID for the software option required At this point in the process there is no need to know details of the specific Signaling Server on which the option is to be installed the target Signaling Server The order ships through the normal supply channels and you will receive a paper License Certificate The certificate contains the license terms for using the Signaling Server software option and a unique License ID that is needed to activate the license 2 When the License Certificate is received you should first read the full terms of the software license If you do not agree with the software license terms contact your sales channel for a refund You must not act
148. G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 7 17 MAULI MAULC MAULE MAP Update Location Synopsis Commands to initiate and change configurations associated with MAP Update Location Web Services Syntax MAULI IMSI HLRTON HLRNP HLRADDR PROF LE MAULC IMSI HLRTON HLRNP HLRADDRe PROFILE MAULE I MSI Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt Update Location gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile is an initiated MT SMS Rx profile Example MAULI MSI 1212122 HLRTON International HLRNP I SDN HLRADDR 332334423 PROFILE 0 MAULC I MSI 1212122 HLRTON International MAULE IMSI 1212122 MAULP MAP Update Location Configuration Synopsis This command displays the system configuration associated with MAP Update Location Web Services Synopsis MAULP Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt Update Location gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access 247 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example MAULP Output Format MAP Update Location Services IMSI HLRTON HLRNP HLRADDR PROFILE 1212122 International ISDN 332334423 0 6 7 18 IPHNI I PHNE IP Host Configuration Commands to dynamically initiate and end configuration related to an IP Host To dynamically add configuration first add a new IP_HOST co
149. Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNGAE GTAI D 1 6 3 20 CNGAI SCCP GTT Address Initiate This command adds a new SCCP GTT Address Note SCCP GTT Addresses are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system 168 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Syntax CNGAI GTAID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt GTT Addresses gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SCCP GTT Address ID has not been initiated The SCCP GTT Address is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SCCP GTT Address is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNGAI GTAID 1 6 3 21 CNGAP SCCP GTT Address Configuration This command shows GTT Addresses defined on the system Syntax CNGAP NC GTAID Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNGAP 169 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format SCCP GTT Address Configuration GTAID NC AI SPC SSN GT GTAI_REPLACEMENT 4 NCO 0x11 4369 0 0x001104 333
150. H is specifed the AUTHPASS must be provided If PRIV is specified then PRIVPASS must be provided PRIV and PRIVPASS cannot be specified if AUTH and AUTHPASS are not already specified Example CNUSC SNMPUSER 1 PRIV DES PRIVPASS aBcDeFgHiJ kL The following example will remove AUTH and AUTHPASS CNUSC SNMPUSER 1 AUTH 6 3 97 CNUSE Configuration SNMP User End This command removes a user account configuration Syntax CNUSE SNMPUSER Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Users gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The DSMI Agent must be enabled The user must be configured Example CNUSI SNMPUSER 1 6 3 98 CNUSI Configuration SNMP User Initiate This command allows configuration of up to 32 SNMP V3 user accounts This command also allows the administrator to define SNMP v3 user accounts for use in conjunction with SNMP v3 TRAP destinations managers A user is defined with an integer user identifier optional authentication and a label which serves as the username The user and label parameters are mandatory Supported AUTH values are SHA and MD5 The password must have a minimum length of 8 characters and a maximum length of 24 is enforced The AUTH and AUTHPASS parameters must be specified together It is not possible to configure an AUTHPASS value without having also specified the AUTH value Syntax CNUSI
151. I Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 If ping fails check that the IP address was entered correctly and that there is no fault with the cabling to the Signaling Server Note The Signaling Server uses a static routing method for associating IP networks with Ethernet interfaces In a network with multiple theoretical routing paths between an IP address on the Signaling Server and IP address on the network the Signaling Server may transmit packets to an IP address through a different interface to that which receives packets from that same IP address It is therefore quite possible for the Signaling Server to be unable to route packets back to an IP address if a connection associated with the destination IP address is lost 2 2 4 Software Download Current information and Dialogic DSI Signaling Server software downloads can be found at the following URL http www dialogic com support helpweb signaling Your product left the factory with fully functional software installed You are however recommended to check the above URL for any recent revisions and install them before putting the product into service Since it is possible to source units from multiple supply channels we recommend that each is checked to verify that all units in a delivery are at the same software revision Proceed as follows 1 Check the current software version running in the system see the CNSWP MML command in Chapter 5 Configuration Commands
152. I agent must be enabled If a USER is specified the USER must be configured If an ENGINE is specified the USER must also be specified If USER is specified then TFORMAT should be set to NONE If USER is not specified then TFORMAT cannot be set to NONE Example This is an example for setting up a simple SNMP v2 TRAP receiver manager CNSMI MNGR 1 I PADDR 192 168 1 22 TFORMAT V2TRAP This next example shows the creation of a SNMP v3 TRAP receiver manager The first step is to define the user with the CNUSI command CNUSI USER 1 AUTH MD5 AUTHPASS abcdefgh LABEL user1 The next step is to define the manager which references the user which has just been defined CNSMI MNGR 2 I PADDR 192 168 1 222 TFORMAT NONE USER 1 201 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 3 71 CNSMP SNMP Manager Configuration This commands displays configuration of SNMP Managers Syntax CNSMP MNGR Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Prerequisites Prerequisites If specified the manager must be configured Example CNSMP CNSMP MNGR 4 Output Format SNMP Manager Configuration MNGR IPADDR TPORT TFORMAT TCOM SNMPUSER ENGINE LABEL 1 192 168 0 27 162 V2TRAP public 0 mngr1 2 192 168 1 77 162 NONE public 2 0a0b0c0d0e0f1234 mngr2 6 3 72 CNSNP SNMP Configuration This command displays the configuration o
153. IF IP4ADDR IPNIC NETIF 1P6ADDR IPNIC NETIF BOND Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Network Interfaces gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites Up to 2 Ethernet Ports can be in a bonding team Cannot associated an Ethernet port with an Bonding Network Interface if that Bonding Network Interface is not configured A Ethernet port cannot be a member of a bonding team if it has an IP address associated with it Cannot change an IP Address that is in use elsewhere e g by an SCTP Association A bond cannot be assigned an I PV6 IP address 228 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example IPNIC NETIF ETH2 IP4ADDR 192 168 0 1 24 IPNIC NETIF BONDO IP4ADDR 10 1 1 10 30 IPNIC NETIF ETH2 BOND BONDO 6 6 12 IPNIE IP Network Interface Configuration End This command removes a Network Interface Syntax IPNIE NETIF Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Network Interfaces gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites Only bonding Network Interfaces may be removed Cannot remove an Bonding Network interface if it associated with a Ethernet port Network Interface Cannot remove an Network interface if one of its IP Addresses are in use elsewhere e g by an
154. ILABLE 313 Chapter 6 Management Commands The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e SNRT The SIGTRAN route identifier e NC Network context e DPC Destination point code e SG Signaling gateway identifier e RT_STATUS Status of the signaling route Definitions are e AVAILABLE The Point Code is available over this route e UNAVAILABLE The Point Code is unavailable over this route e GW_STATUS Status of the signaling gateway Definitions are e AVAILABLE The gateway is available e UNAVAILABLE The gateway is unavailable 6 13 20 STSSP SCCP Subsystem Resource Status This command displays the status of configured subsystems If the ID parameter is specified the status of the corresponding sub system is displayed If the ID parameter is not specified the status of all configured subsystems is displayed Syntax STSSP SSRID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt SCCP SSRs gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STSSP Output Format SCCP Subsystem Resource Status SSRID NC SSR SSN SPC SSR_STATUS 3 NCO RSS 12 3226 ALLOWED 4 NC1 RSP 3229 PROHIBITED 5 NCO LSS 12 ALLOWED The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e ID Shows the SSR ID parameter of the subsystem as configured using the SCCP_LSS SCCP_RSS or SCCP_RSP statements in the config txt file e NC Network cont
155. IONS A 16 bit value that provides additional options Bit 0 is set to 1 to enable the use of the lt second_Is gt parameter Bit 1 is set to 1 to cause traffic sent towards the remote signaling point to be shared between the two link sets lt linkset_id gt and lt second_Is gt If set to 0 all traffic sent towards the remote signaling point is normally sent using the link set specified by lt linkset_id gt unless this link set fails in which case the traffic uses the alternative link set lt second_Is gt Loadsharing should not be configured if one of the link sets is used between a pair of Signaling Servers in a dual Signaling Server configuration Bit 2 is set to 1 to indicate a default route Messages for any DPC that is not explicitly configured use this route Bit 3 is set to 1 to indicate that the DPC associated with this route is not a real DPC within the network The route is considered available as soon as the link sets within the route are available Note When bit 3 is set bit 2 should also be set Bit 5 is set to 1 to disable the Route Test procedure for this route Typically this bit should be set to zero However in the case of a pseudo DPC route it is essential to set this bit to 1 to prevent RST messages being issued 79 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 80 All other bits must be set to zero e LS2 The logical identity of the second link set in the combined link set e LABE
156. IONS 0 P_CONFIG SS7 Link Set Configuration MTP_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET OPC APC NLINKS 2 SSF 0x8 OPTIONS 0 LABI ea Et Il P_LINKSET LINKSET 0 OPC 100 APC 100 NLINKS 1 OPTIONS 0x8000 LABEL To_Partner P_LINKSET LINKSET 1 OPC 100 APC 200 NLINKS 1 OPTIONS 0x0000 LABEL To_Network SS7 Link Configuration LINKSET REF SLC BPOS BLINK STREAM TS OPTIONS 0x00000006 LABEL E TDM LINKSET 0 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 1 STREAM 3 TS 1 OPTIONS 0x00000006 E TDM LINKSET 1 REF 1 SLC 1 BPOS 0 BLINK 2 STREAM 0 TS 16 OPTIONS 0x00000006 U U MTP route Configuration MTP_ROUTE NC NCO C7RT DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 LABEL P_ROUTE C7RT 0 DPC 100 LS1 0 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0000 LABEL To_Partner P_ROUTE C7RT 1 DPC 200 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0001 LS2 0 LABEL To_Network Note The up_ enable parameter was set for ISUP user part SI 5 for the example above Figure 5 Example Configuration to an Adjacent SSP SCP Single Point Code Inter SIU Link Set Link id 1 sic 0 Link Setid 0 r77 7 Link id 1 slc 1 Link_id 0 slc 0 Point 1 Code 200 Point Link Set id 1 Code 100 379 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines For a signaling server pair connected to a mated STP pair carrying the inter signaling server link over the second E1
157. IP Firewall End PFWI IP Firewall Initiate PFWP IP Firewall Configuration PGWE IP Gateway End IPGWI IP Gateway Initiate IPGWP IP Gateway Configuration PLGE IP Log End IPLGI IP Log Initiate PLGP IP Log Configuration IPNIC IP Network Interface Configuration Change IPNIE IP Network Interface Configuration End IPNII IP Network Interface Configuration IPNIP Network Interface Configuration PHNTKE IP Host NameToken Configuration End 222 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 IPHNIPTKI IP Host NameToken Configuration IPHNI PTKP IP Host NameToken Configuration IPWSP IP Web Server Configuration IPWSS Configuration Web Service Set 6 6 1 IPFWC IP Firewall Change This command changes the action taken for an IP address or network accessing the System Syntax IPFWC I PFW I PACT Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt Firewall gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Security Access Prerequisites The IP Firewall ID has been initiated Example IPFWC I PFW DEFAULT PACT DROP 6 6 2 IPFWE IP Firewall End This command disables an IP address or network from accessing the System Syntax IPFWE I PFW Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt Firewall g
158. If no digits are supplied for a section then the section has no effect on the matched digits An empty section is used to mark the position in the GTAI digits where digits are inserted from the Address Padding characters may be added to aid readability Each section in the GTT Rule Mask defines how the replacement operation is performed Sections marked K identify that the section of the Called Address being translated should be kept Sections marked R identify that the section of the Called Address being translated should be replaced with digits from the Address component referenced by the GTT Rule GTT Rule sections should not be empty 393 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines 7 15 2 Examples Example 1 e Match GTAI digits 09876543210 e Remove the GTAI and add a PC 138 and SSN 8 Specific Address to PC SSN This example translates a received specific Global Title address 09876543210 into a combination of Point Code 138 and SSN 8 SCCP GTT Pattern Configuration SCCP_GTT_PATTERN NC NC0 GTPID AI SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_PATTERN P_GTT_PATTERN GTPID 11 AI 0x10 GT 0x001104 GTAI_PATTERN 09876543210 SCCP GTT Address Configuration SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS NC NC0O GTAID AI GTT_SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_REPLACEMENT CCP_GTT_ADDRESS GTAID 11 AT 0x03 GTT_SPC 138 SSN 8 GT 0 SCCP GTT Translation Configuration SCCP_GTT NC NCO GTPID GTT_MASK PRI_GTATID SEC_GTAID GTTSRC ANY BA
159. If specified the IP Firewall ID must have been initiated 224 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example PFWP Output Format IPFW IPACT IPSVC IPSRC IPDEST DEFAULT DROP ANY ANY 1 ACCEPT ALL 172 16 44 0 24 ANY 2 ACCEPT SCTP 175 21 5 5 24 ANY 6 6 5 IPGWE IP Gateway End This command removes an IP route via an IP gateway Syntax PGWE PGW Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt IP Gateways gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The IP gateway id has been initiated Example IPGWE PGW 1 6 6 6 IPGWI IP Gateway Initiate This command allows the user to specify a route via an IP gateway Syntax IPGWI PGW GATEWAY IPNW Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt IP Gateways gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access MWI Prerequisites The IP gateway ID has not been initiated The IP Mask and and IP Network are mandatory for non default gateways Two gateways cannot have overlapping IP addresses 225 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example IPGWI PGW 2 GATEWAY 192 168 1 1 1PNW 172 16 1 0 24 IPGWI PGW 1 GATEWAY 192 168 1 1 1PNW DEFAULT 6 6 7 I PGWP IP Gateway Configuration This command displays routes vian IP gateways Syntax PGWP IPGW
160. Interface Measurements Page 2 of 2 NETIF RXFIFO RXFRAME RXCOMP RXMULT TXFIFO TXCOLLS TXCARRIER TXCOMP PERIOD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 34 41 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 34 41 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 34 41 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 34 41 Displayed values are as follows NETIF Network Interface RXKBTYE Number of kilobytes of data received in kilobytes RXPKT Number of packets of data received RXERR Number of receive errors detected RXDROP Number of received packets dropped by the device driver TXKBTYE Number of kilobytes of data transmitted in kilobytes TXPKT Number of packets of data transmitted TXERR Number of transmit errors detected TXDROP Number of transmit packets PERIOD The measurement period the measurement was taken over RXFIFO The number of FIFO buffer errors received RXFRAME The number of packet framing errors received RXCOMP The number of compressed packets received RXMULT The number of multicast frames received TXFIFO The number of FIFO buffer error transmitted TXCOLLS The number of collisions detected on the transmit side TXCARRIER The number of carrier losses detected on the transmit side TXCOMP The number of compressed packets transmitted 6 11 14 MSOGP Message Router Origin Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for Message Router Origins When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSOGP OGID RESET Web Mana
161. K_DUAL N OPTIONS 0 SCCP_GTT GTPID 11 GTT_MASK R PRI_GTAID 11 WD D Q Q Example 2 e Match a seven digit number starting 123 followed by any three digits then 7 e Change the first digits to 333 Keep the next three digits from the called party address Change the fourth digit to 4 Add a PC 11 394 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Match a 7 digit number starting 123 followed by any three digits then 7 change the first digits to 333 keep the next three digits from the called party address and change the fourth digit to 4 and add a PC 11 SCCP GTT Pattern Configuration SCCP_GTT_PATTERN NC NC0 GTPID AI SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_PATTERN SCCP_GTT_PATTERN GTPID 6 AI 0x10 GT 0x001104 GTAI_PATTERN 123 2 7 FF F HF HF HF E SCCP GTT Address Configuration SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS NC NC0 GTAID AI GTT_SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_REPLACEMENT SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS GTAID 2 AT 0x11 GTT_SPC 11 GT 0x001104 GTAI_REPLACEMENT 333 4 X SCCP GTT Translation Configuration SCCP_GTT NC NC0 GTPID GTT_MASK PRI_GTAID SEC_GTAID SCCP_GTT GTPID 6 GTT_MASK R K R PRI_GTAID 2 Example 3 e Match 441425 followed by any digits e Remove the first six digits Keep any following digits in the Input GTAI Add a PC 238 amp SSN GTAI Digits 123456 A Matching Prefix to PC SSN
162. L A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional MTP Route configuration is viewed using the CNCRP MMI command and its status and measurements read using the STCRP an MSCRP MMI commands After startup additional routes can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNCRI command Routes are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNCRE MMI command 6 5 MTP2_ TIMER MTP2 Timer Configuration Synopsis The MTP2_ TIMER command provides the ability to configure the MTP2 protocol timers from the configuration file Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax MTP2_TIMER NC NCO TIMID TSEC TMSEC Example MTP2_TIMER TIMID T4N TMSEC 550 MTP2_TIMER NC NC1 TIMID T4N TMSEC 550 Parameters The MTP2_ TIMER command includes the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that the MTP2 timer is being configured for Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 and NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed e TIMID A text identifier for the timer to be configured It should be set to one of the following T1 T2 T3 T4N T4E T5 T6 or T7 TSEC The timer value specified in seconds TMSEC The timer value specified in milliseconds Note that the timer granularity is 100ms Any timers not configured continue
163. LINK VE TYPE A inm cree resus a snk sched ices a Ea SA Re Sia dha Sade 397 7 46 2 MTP LINK OPM ON Spi dnc cen ie See aes AW pte ne ee EN 397 M653 MTR LINK T Sarrea T aeamiatgetantalds cing xe nalea Ean Aa a HOE plutons a EE IANT 397 Monitorin gi eies ena e tebe ine pene TEA EE ED V ERAEN T EN ee EAE 398 11 Contents 12 Revision History Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Date Issue No Description Improved alarm reporting for MMI and SNMP October 2014 11 Support for database services Minor corrections and enhancements Support for BorderNet Diameter Services Helix Minor corrections and enhancements April 2014 10 Addition of statement that this manual is also used for BorderNet Diameter Services Helix December 2013 9 Minor corrections and enhancements Addition of support for IPV6 and Message Router Functionality Addition of new format config txt commands that support entry of November 2013 8 parameters in any order allow optional parameters to be omitted and enhance readability by using format ParameterName ParameterValue Additional OA amp M enhancements August 2013 7 Minor corrections and enhancements including support for DTS routes and dynamic GTT configuration June 2013 6 Or correcHons and enhancements Support for cumulative icensing Minor corrections and enhancements MMI Command descriptions August 2012 5 now make reference to the location the comm
164. M ATM Signaling Link E1_FRAMED Framed 31 timeslot E1 operation T1_FRAMED Framed 24 timeslot T1 operation PCM Structured 30 timeslot E1 operation timeslots 0 and 16 are used for signaling IMALEN The length of the IMA frame for IMA use only 0 Default for non IMA operation 1 32 cells per IMA frame 2 64 cells per IMA frame 3 128 cells per IMA frame 4 256 cells per IMA frame IMASK Input Mask Trace Mask for signaling messages entering a protocol module Parameter Range Hex number between 0 to ffffffff IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity Parameter Range Case sensitive string containing 0 9 a b or c characters of length 1 to 15 IN_STREAM A reference to the 2 Mbps stream for the input of a simplex connection mode 2 or one half of a duplex cross connection mode 3 In other modes this field should be set to zero fixed data pattern Parameter Range Number from 0 to 3 INHIBIT Inhibit action Set to Y to inhibit an SS7 link set to N to uninhibit the link IP4ADDR An IPV4 address and subnet are expressed in CIDR notation where the IP address and subnet are separated by the character The subnet parameter is expressed as an integer indicating the leading i e significant 1 bits that identify the sub net mask For an IPv4 address this value may be up to a value of 31 Parameter Range Null or IP address entered as one of the following An IPV4 Addre
165. M 12 10 ETS 300 618 The values used are defined in the DSMI TC MIB The order of the fields in the CSV file alarms txt are as follows Header NODE SEQUENCE CODE STATE SEVERITY D DIAG1 DIAG2 OCCURRED CLEARED TITLE TYPE CAUSE The STSYP and STSWP commands also report a summary of the count of active alarms in each of the following categories Critical Major Minor and Warning The ALCDP command lists the supported alarm codes and their attributes that are shown in the following table Alarm IDs Severity Description and Clearance Actions CODE TITLE PCM Loss Sync Loss ID PORTID PORTID SEVERITY MAJ MAJ DESCRI PTI ON ALARM CLEARANCE ACTI ON Loss of signal at PCM input port No signal detected on PCM input Check physical connectivity and remote equipment Loss of frame synchronization on PCM port Check configuration settings connectivity and remote equipment AIS Remote Alarm PORTI D PORTI D MAJ MAJ Alarm Indication Signal received on PCM interface all ones on all timeslots Check configuration connectivity and remote equipment PCM port is receiving a Remote Alarm Indication Remote end has detected an issue Check configuration connectivity and remote equipment 41 Chapter 4 System Management Alarm IDs Severity Description and Clearance Actions Continued CODE TITLE BER5 ID PORTID
166. M3UA or network facing M2PA If TDMSHARE is set to blank then either TDM or SIGTRAN but not both may be configured and the configured signaling will be allocated the full share of the license When both M3UA and network facing M2PA are required on the server the percentage share available to SIGTRAN can be further sub divided between M3UA and M2PA using the M3UASHARE parameter on the CNSYS MMI command in a similar manner to TDMSHARE If TDMSHARE is set to blank then the M3UASHARE parameter determines what portion of the full license is available to M3UA and what is available to M2PA Finally if M3UA is required to operate in multiple networks the portion of the license allocated to M3UA may further be split across those networks by using the SHARE value in each STN_CONFIG command associated with each Network Context Cumulatively the values of these shares must add up to 100 representing 100 percent of the licensed throughput that has been allocated to M3UA 7 4 Configuring Multiple Network Contexts 7 4 1 Multiple Network Support The SS7 Network Context together with a signaling point code uniquely identifies an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to The Network Context may be a unique identifier for a physical SS7 network for example to identify an ANSI ITU International or National network or it may be used to subdivide a physical SS7 network into logical sub networks An example of the use of logic
167. MRDEE Message Router Destination End The command removes a new Destination Note Configuration may be dynamically removed by 1 Deleting a configuration command MRF_DE entry from the config txt file 2 Executing the MRDEE MMI command to unload it from the system Syntax MRDEE DESTID Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Destination gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access 259 Chapter 6 Management Commands MMI Prerequisites The Destination has been initiated The Destination is not present in the config txt file The Destination is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Destination is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example MRDEE DESTID 1 6 10 8 MRDEI Message Router Destination Initiate This command adds a new Destination Note Traffic routed to a partner System with a destination DOMAIN of PARTNER will be consider on the receiving system to be either from the original NETWORK AS or USER domains of the transmitting System Note Configuration may be dynamically added by 1 Entering an additional configuration command MRF_DE in the config txt file 2 Executin
168. Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Routing Key gt Configuration 264 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The Routing Key has not been initiated The Routing Key is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Routing Key is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example MRRKI RKI 1 6 10 16 MRRKP Message Router Routing Key Configuration This command displays all configured Message Router Routing Keys Note See the individual parameter definitions of the config txt command MRF_RK defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters supported Syntax MRRKP RKI Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Routing Key gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MRRKP Output Format Message Router Routing Keye Configuration RKI RKTAB OPC DPC NI SI CIC_RANGE HUNT DEST LABEL 0 1 2 123233 ANY ANY ANY FIRST 5 1 1 123233 2 ANY ANY ANY FIRST 6 6 11 Measurement Commands MSACP ATM Cell Stream Traffic Measurements MSCGP Circuit Group Measurements MSCRP SS7 Route Measurements MSDBP Subsc
169. Message Router Configuration COMMANAS cece eee e eee eee eee eee eee 103 5 8 1 MRF_OG Message Router Origin Configuration ccceeeeeeeee eset eee ene 103 5 8 2 MRF_DE Message Router Destination Configuration cceeeeeee eset eee 105 5 8 3 MRF_RK Message Router Routing Key Configuration eeeeeeeeee eres 106 5 8 4 MRF_CP Message Router Custom Profile Configuration eeeeeeee es 108 5 8 5 MRF_CE Message Router Concerned Entity eeen 109 5 9 ISUP Configuration CoMMANAS cent nnn nrnrnne 110 5 9 1 ISUP_CONFIG ISUP Configuration ccc eee eer ee ern nee 110 5 9 2 ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP ISUP Circuit Group Configuration ccceeeeeeee eee 111 5 9 3 ISUP_TIMER ISUP Timer Configuration sssssssserrerrsrrrrrerrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrereee 114 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 10 SCCP Configuration COMMANAS ccc a a EEEE EA ENE Ea EEEE 115 5 10 1 SCCP_CONFIG SCCP Configuration ssssssssssssrrsrersrrrrrrrerrnrirsrrrrerrrrene 116 5 10 2 SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE SCCP Load Share Table eeeeeeeeeee eae 117 5 10 3 SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC SCCP Load Shared DPCs cceeeeeeeeeee eee es 118 5 10 4 SCCP_GTT Global Title Translations cece eee cece ee eee eee eater eae 119 5 10 5 SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS Global Title Translation Address cceeeeeeee es 121 5 10
170. NP Service Center Numbering Plan Parameter Range Unknown ISDN Reserved2 Data Telex ServiceCentreS pecific5 ServiceCentreS pecific6 Reserved7 National Private ERMES Reserved11 Reserved12 Reserved13 Reserved14 Reserved SCTON SCTP SEC_GTAID Service Center Type Of Number Parameter Range Unknown International National NetworkSpecific Subscriber Alphanumeric AbbreviatedNumber Reserved SCTP availability Set to Y to enable SCTP operation ona particular IP port Set to N to disable SCTP operation on a particular IP port ID of secondary translation address 353 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued SEQUENCE Sequential reference number of an entry in the alarm log SESSIONS Access Management of user logon sessions Parameter Range STATIC_TAGS When selected this option disables rotating sessions tags which provide additional security by requiring transmitted URLs to use a unique key provided by the server i e data and actions can only be accessed performed by selecting operations on the web page and copying URLs using browser refresh or forward back buttons will not work When using this option to ensure a secure environment is recommended that HTTPS only management access be employed requiring users to enter a password before being granted access to the server ROTATING_TAGS When selected this option enables rotating session
171. N_BILLINGID 5 12 2 DTS_ ROUTE Configuration DTS Route Initiate Synopsis Command to configure a DTS Route Syntax DTS_ROUTE drid hostid nc ssn clseq options label Example DTS_ROUTE drid 1 hostid 1 nc NC1 ssn 8 DTS_ROUTE drid 2 hostid 1 ssn 6 clseq 1 options 0x0001 label User App 1 Parameters DRID A DTS routing request id to uniquely identify a particular DTS routing request An integer in the range 0 4095 NC SS7 Network Context This parameter identifies the SS7 network in which the subsystem exists Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 When the parameter is omitted a value of NCO is assumed e HOSTID Logical identifier to identify each link from the SIU to a Client Host Host 0 is on Link 0 and so on An integer in the range 0 127 SSN Subsystem Number to route to If unspecified or zero then this will be the default subsystem used when no match occurs with any other SSN defined An integer in the range 0 255 e CLSEQ The client sequence number within a client selection group all routing requests that have the same NC SSN combination MUST be unique within the client selection group An integer in the range 0 127 e OPTIONS Routing options for the DTS routing request this is used to select strict routing or preferred order see DTS User Guide LABEL A text string up to 32 character long 132 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operato
172. Network Interface Status Page 2 of 2 NETIF ADDR_TYPE IPADDR BONDO STATIC_IPV4 173 28 148 240 24 BONDO STATIC_IPV6 fe77 19a9 8cf0 148 215 b2ff feal f8ac 64 ETHO LOCAL_IPV6 fe80 21b 63ff feab e6a6 ETH1 LOCAL_IPV6 fe80 21b 63ff feab e6a7 ETH2 LOCAL_IPV6 fe80 21b 63ff feab e6a8 ETH2 STATIC_IPV4 171 28 148 12 24 ETH3 STATIC_IPV4 fe80 21b 63ff feab e6a9 ETH3 LOCAL_IPV6 172 28 148 126 24 ETH3 STATIC_IPV6 077 19a9 8cf 0 148 20e cf fec7 4b34 64 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows NETIF The Network Interface name SPEED The speed of the Network Interface in MHz ETH only DUPLEX Whether the interface is FULL or HALF duplex ETH only STATUS Whether the interface UP DOWN IPADDR Actual IP Addresses assigned to the network interface May IPV4 Global IPV6 or Link Local PV6 309 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 13 15 STPCP PCM Status This command displays the status of all configured PCM ports Syntax STPCP Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt PCMs gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STPCP Output Format PCM status 0 PORTID PCM SYNCPRI PCM_STATUS CLOCK_STATUS 03 R OK STAND ALONE t 1 1 OK ACTIVE 1 2 31 OK OK 1 4 0 BER gt 1 10 5 FAULT 2 3 5 Possible STATUS values are PCM LOSS AIS SYNC LOSS REMOTE ALARM BER g
173. OST IP Host Configuration command and the multi node configuration itself can be configured using the MULTI_ NODE Multi Node Configuration command The SIU_HOSTS and SIU_ DUAL commands should be used to setup the environment in which the SIU will operate Signaling boards are configured using SS7_ BOARD SS7 Board Configuration commands with the associated PCMs configured using the LIU_CONFIG Line Interface Configuration command M2PA SIGTRAN Links are configured using the STN_LINK SIGTRAN Link Configuration command The MTP parameters are assigned using the MTP_CONFIG Global MTP Configuration MTP_LINKSET MTP Link Set MTP_LINK MTP Signaling Link and MTP_ROUTE MTP Route commands MTP link timers can be changed from their default values using the MTP2_TIMER MTP3_ TIMER and QSAAL_TIMER commands The M3UA parameters are assigned using the STN CONFIG SIGTRAN Configuration STN_LAS SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration STN_LINK SIGTRAN Link Configuration STN_RAS SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration STN_RASLIST SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Configuration STN_ ROUTE SIGTRAN Route Configuration STN_RSGLIST SIGTRAN Route Signaling Gateway List Configuration and STN_LBIND SIGTRAN Local Bind Configuration commands SIGTRAN link timers can be changed from their default values using the SCTP_TIMER M2PA_TIMER and M3UA_TIMER commands When using Message Router Functionality or operating as
174. OSTS 1 BACKUP_HOST BACKUP_NONE OPTIONS 0x00000000 MIN_HOSTS 1 DMHOST 0 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command SIU_HOSTS for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 32 CNLAE SIGTRAN Local Application Server End This command removes an SIGTRAN Local Application Server LAS Note SIGTRAN LASs are dynamically removed by first deleting the SIGTRAN LAS from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the SIGTRAN LAS from the system Syntax CNLAE LAS 176 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Local Servers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Example CNLAE LAS 1 Prerequisites The SIGTRAN LAS has been initiated The SIGTRAN LAS is not present in the config txt file The SIGTRAN LAS is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN Local Application Server is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file 6 3 33 CNLAI SI GTRAN Local Application Server Initiate This command adds a new SIGTRAN Local Application Server LAS SIGTRAN LASs are dynamica
175. P Configuration COMMAMNGS ccc teeter nae 138 5 16 1 INAP_CONFIG INAP Configuration cccicceeetetete teen eter ee inners 139 5 16 2 INAP_NC_CONFIG INAP Network Context Configuration eeeeeeee 139 5 16 3 INAP_FE INAP Functional EntitieS ce eeceee teers ee rte renee ir eeata eid 140 5 16 4 INAP_AC INAP Application Context cece een e eee eee a ened 141 Management Commands 6 0c Er nnn EEEE EEEE 143 6 1 Access Control Commands aee aaa a a AA aa AEA OEA a ATARA 143 6 1 1 ACCUP Access Current User Configuration sessssssssissresrirsrreserrerrrerirrrr 143 6 1 2 ACCUS Account Control Current User Set sssssssssssesrisrrrserrrrrrerrrrrrrrrns 144 6 1 3 ACPOP Account Control Policy Configuration sseseseeeseseererrrerrerrrrrr 144 6 1 4 ACPOS Account Control Policy Set ssssssssssssssrrsrrrsrrrrrrrsrrnrrrsrrrrrrrrrne 145 6 1 5 ACUAC Account Control User Account Chang cccceeeeeeeeeee neta teeta ened 145 6 1 6 ACUAE Account Control User Account End ssesseeeseeeriererrerrerre rererere 146 6 1 7 ACUAI Account Control User Account Initiate 146 6 1 8 ACUAP Account Control User Account Configuration eseese 146 6 1 9 ACUPC Account Control User Profile Change ccccceeeee ee eee ee ee ee teen ees 147 6 1 10 ACUPE Account Control User Profile End ccceceeceeee tenets ee teeta eaee 147 6 1 11 ACUPI Acco
176. P address Parameter Range An IP address entered as one of the following An PV4 Address An IPV6 Address NUM_CCTS Number of circuits allowed Parameter Range Number from 1 to 65535 NUM_CGRPS Number of circuit groups allowed Parameter Range Number from 1 to 2048 NUM_DPCS The number of Destination Point Codes Parameter Range Number from 0 to 32 NUM_HOSTS Number of hosts allowed Parameter Range ALL command specific or NONE command specific or Number from 0 to 128 NUM_IDLG The number of incoming dialogs Parameter Range Hex number from 0 to 100000 NUM_ODLG The number of outgoing dialogs Parameter Range Hex number from 0 to 100000 OBJ ECT A logical reference for an SNMP object within an object group Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 OBJ GRP A logical reference for an SNMP object group Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 OBJ IDX An index used as a unique reference to a SNMP object which is constructed by multiplying the object group by 100 an then adding the object within the group OCCURRED The date and time the alarm occurred 346 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued OFFSET OMASK The local offset from UTC in Hours and Minutes Hours may be specified in the range 14 to 12 and minutes in either 0 or 30 minute intervals The offset is specified
177. P_LOAD_SHARE_ DPC SCCP Load Shared DPCs The SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC command is a new configuration command and is defined as follows Synopsis The SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC statement associates a Destination Point Code with a Global Title Load Share table defined by the SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE command The Global Title Load Share table can then be assigned to a SCCP address using the SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS DPC parameter on the command Syntax SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC LSTSEQ DPC Example SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC LSTSEQ LST 5 0 DPC 2222 SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC LSTSEQ LST 5 1 DPC 2223 SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC LSTSEQ LST 6 1 DPC 1011 2 3 SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC LSTSEQ LST 6 2 DPC 1014 SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC LSTSEQ LST 6 3 DPC 1015 118 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Parameters e LSTSEQ The Loadshare table index sequence number identifies the position of a Destination Point Code entry in a loadshare table It is made up of a loadshare table ID LST x with the sequence number as a suffix e g LST 0 0 Note When assigning sequence numbers to a loadshare table they must start at 0 and increment without gaps in the sequence e DPC The remote signaling point code associated with the load share table Note To achieve load balancing the same lt dpc gt can be associated with a GLST table more than once 10 4 SCCP_GTT Global Title Translations Synopsis The SCCP_GTT statement adds a translation
178. Parameter Range Date in the form xxxx yy zz where xxxx is years 1990 2037 yy is months 1 12 and zz is days 1 31 DBSVCNAME The Database Service ID 325 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued DBSVCTYPE The service name for the database Note May only be null if the service type is NONE DBx Identity of the host used for connectivity to the database Each host is identified in a compound parameter of the form x y where x is the Host ID and y is set to either PRI or SEC to determine the intended usage of the host The parameter can also be set to NONE to remove a host from a service When used as part of the status command the y parameter will indicate FAILED when the service has lost communication with the database DEFVCI DEFVPI A default AAL5 link will be configured for the cell stream to signal incoming active connections This is the VCI that will be used for this connection Values 0 3 and 4 are reserved and should not be used Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 A default AAL5 link will be configured for the cell stream to signal incoming active connections This is the VPI that will be used for this connection Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 DEV_PING The standard deviation of the time in milliseconds the pings took to reach and return from each the target IP node 326 Dialogic DSI Signaling
179. Parameters The SCCP_CONC_SRR command includes the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that the SSR is being configured for When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e CSSRLID A unique value in the range 0 to 8191 that is used to identify the concerned sub system resource command 130 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e CSSRID Refers to a concerned resource specified by either a SCCP_LSS or SCCP_RSP command The CSSRID identifies the concerned resource that receives SCCP notifications if the state of the controlled resource identified by the SSRID is changed e SSRID Refers to a controlled resource specified by either a SCCP_LSS or SCCP_RSP command If the CSSRID is referring to an LSS the SSRID used in the same command may refer to either an RSS or an RSP resource Ifthe CSSRID is referring to an RSP the SSRID used in the same command can only refer to an LSS resource Note The CSSRID and SSRID parameters can only refer to SSR s previously configured using either a SCCP_LSS or SCCP_RSP command SCCP Concerned Sub System Resource configuration is viewed using the CNCSP MMI After startup additional Concerned Sub System Resource configuration can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNCSI command Concerned Sub System Resources configuration
180. REPLACEMENT e SCCP GTT Translation Configuration SCCP_GTT NC NCO GTPID GTT_MASK PRI_GTATID SEC_GTAID SCCP_GTT GTPID 1 GTT_MASK K R PRI_GTAID 1 W FF HF F 7 16 HSL Signaling The Signaling Server supports both structured framed HSL links in accordance with ITU Q 703 Annex A HSL links can be configured on systems employing Dialogic DSI SS7MD Network Interface Boards which support up to 4 HSL links per board or 8 HSL links per unit 396 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 7 16 1 MTP_LINK IFTYPE The MTP_LINK command supports the parameter IFTYPE that identifies the interface type for signaling links For HSL the interface mode should be set to one of the following values Interface_mode Description E1l_ FRAMED Framed 31 timeslot E1 operation T1_FRAMED Framed 24 timeslot T1 operation PCM Structured 30 timeslot E1 operation timeslots 0 and 16 are used for signaling The interface_mode value must be consistent with the liu_type and frame_format values of the LIU_CONFIG command 7 16 2 MTP_LINK OPTIONS Bit number Description 10 amp 11 Set both to zero for E1_ FRAMED and T1_FRAMED operation HSL framed operation uses these bits in a similar manner to single timeslot signaling to select 64 Kbps 56 Kbps or 48 Kbps operation that applies to all timeslots wit
181. RGTON Originating Type Of Number Parameter Range Unknown International National NetworkSpecific Subscriber Alphanumeric AbbreviatedNumber Reserved OT1D Percentage 1 day peak link transmit utilization in a 10s period OT1H Percentage 1 hour peak link transmit utilization in a 10s period OT5M Percentage 5 minutes peak link transmit utilization in a 10s period OUT_STREAM A reference to the 2 Mbps stream for the output of the connection or the fixed data pattern Parameter Range Number from 0 to 3 OUTPUT PATTER One byte of fixed data to output in pattern mode on the output N stream timeslot Parameter Range Hex number from 0 to ff 348 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued PAGE Selects the specific page to display for the command Parameter Range Number between 1 to 10 PASSWORD Password to access to a particular account Parameter Range Password string of length 1 to 79 PCMASK A 32 bit value that specifies the part of a destination point code that must match the remote SPC value in order for an SCCP transmit message to be sent down to this destination sub system Bits set to zero indicate that the corresponding bit position in the transmit message destination point code must match the bit position of the remote SPC Bits set to 1 indicate bit positions in the message destination point code that do not need
182. S CRT MAJ A signaling board has failed Note that during the startup sequence that all boards are marked as failed Attempt to restore operation by resetting the board If this fails perform a hard restart of unit If this fails replace the board The system has detected that one or more of the CPUs is likely to fail If this alarm occurs perform a hard restart of the unit If the alarm persists shut down the unit and remove and reapply power If the alarm persists contact Dialogic support 44 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Alarm IDs Severity Description and Clearance Actions Continued CODE TITLE ID SEVERITY DESCRIPTION ALARM CLEARANCE ACTION 31 Voltage 0 MAJ The system has detected that the voltage warning on one or more power rails is out of range This is usually due to either a faulty power supply module or a faulty board causing excessive current consumption If this alarm occurs perform a hard restart of the unit If the alarm persists shut down the unit and remove and reapply power If the alarm persists contact Dialogic support 32 Memory 0 MAJ Detected memory capacity is below the warning expected threshold Perform a hard restart of unit If the fault persists contact Dialogic support 34 Sigtran link SNLINK MAJ Communications failure has occurred an fail M3UA SIGTRAN link has failed Check configuration connect
183. SCTP Association Example IPNIE ETH 2 6 6 13 IPNII IP Network Interface Configuration This command adds a Network Interface Only bonding network interfaces may be added One PV4 address and one PV6 Address may be configured The IP Address should be specified in CIDR format with IP Address and subnet mask specified as a compound parameter separated by a character The System supports resilient IP connectivity and a bond of two Ethernet ports may be configured A bonding team is assigned by adding a bonding Network Interface and the assigning two Ethernet Ports to it by setting the BOND parameter on each Ethernet port using the Network Interface Change command The MAC address of the lower numbered Ethernet port will be used as the MAC address of the bond If the first port fails then the second port will take over If the first port returns to service the secondary port will remain the active port unless it in turn fails at which point the first port will resume active control of connectivity for the IP address Syntax IPNII NETIF IP4ADDR I PE6ADDR 229 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Network Interfaces gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Example IPNI NETIF ETHO I P4ADDR 192 168 0 1 24 6 6 14 IPNIP Network Interface Configuration This command shows the IP conf
184. SG OPTIONS 0 STN_LBIND BIND 0 LAS 0 RAS 0 STN_LBIND BIND 1 LAS 1 RAS 1 User part configuration e g ISUP or SCCP 390 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 7 12 SIGTRAN M3UA Dual Operation M3UA on a pair of Signaling Server s can offer a level of resilience similar to that supported by a pair of Signaling Server s operating MTP3 When configured the Signaling Servers will each behave as an Application Server Process operating within an Application Server thus presenting a single point code to the network In the same manner as MTP3 resilient operation one Signaling Server should be configured as MODEA and the other as MODEB using the SIU_DUAL configuration command The command should also be used to be configure the IP address of the partner Signaling Server Unlike MTP3 there is no need to specify any further configuration for inter Signaling Server communication i e inter unit links or linksets M3UA within the Signaling Server pair will use the inter Signaling Server Ethernet link to maintain communication with the network even when a single Signaling Server loses direct communication to an adjacent server Signaling Gateway or IPSP Dual resilient operation using M3UA does require load sharing which is based on SLS value Load sharing should be configured using the STN_LAS command on both units 7 13 ATM Configuration 7 13 1 Overview The use of an SS7MDL4 boa
185. SUP circuit groups SCCP_CONFIG Set SCCP operating parameters SCCP_NC_CONFIG Set SCCP operating parameters for Network Context SCCP_GTT SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS Add a translation to the SCCP global title translation table Define the global title to be used as the primary or backup destination of a translation Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Summary Continued Command Summary SCCP_GTT_PATTERN Define the received global title pattern to be matched for a global title translation SCCP_LSS Configure SCCP Local sub system resources SCCP_RSP Configure SCCP Remote Signaling Points SCCP_RSS Configure SCCP Remote sub system resource SCCP_CONC_SSR Configure SCCP concerned sub system resource MAP_CONFIG Set MAP operating parameters MAP_NC_CONFIG Set MAP Network Context operating parameters DTS CONFIG Set DTS operating parameters DTS_ROUTE Configure DTS Routes TCAP_CONFIG Set TCAP operating parameters TCAP_NC_CONFIG Set TCAP Network Context operating parameters TCAP_CFG_DGRP Define a range of dialogs for a TCAP host INAP_CONFIG Set INAP operating parameters INAP_NC_CONFIG Set INAP Network Context operating parameters INAP_AC Define INAP Application Context INAP_FE Define INAP Functional Entity TCAP MAP and INAP commands as well as SCCP commands that relate to these protocol require a specific proto
186. Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued DFDCS Default Data Coding Scheme Parameter Range German English Italian French Spanish Dutch Swedish Danish Portuguese Finnish Norwegian Greek Turkish Hungarian Polish Undefined GSM_7bit GSM 7 bit alphabet preceded by language indication UCS2 UCS2 message preceded by language indication Czech Hebrew Arabic Russian Icelandic DFLT_ENGINE A hexadecimal string value used to display the default engine ID for SNMP V3 traps DIAG1 Diagnostic associated with an alarm event The meaning of the diagnostic field depends on the alarm type DIAG2 Diagnostic associated with an alarm event The meaning of the diagnostic field depends on the alarm type DLGGID The unique logical identifier of the dialog group Parameter Range Number from 0 to 31 DLGID A logical identifier for a TCAP dialog The valid range is 0 to 65535 Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 DMHOST The default management host Parameter Range Number between 0 to 127 327 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued DPC Destination Point Code Parameter Range Number between 0 to 16777215 DRIVE A Drive bay identifier for a disk drive Parameter Range Number between 0 to 1 DSE Defines whether the DSE interface is active DSMIEVENT Option to select the type of traps provided
187. Sessions 44 1 01 00 00 0 USSD_Notify_ Request 54345 0 01 00 00 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with the MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 6 12 Reset Commands RSBOI Restart Board Initiate 6 12 1 RSBOI Restart Board Initiate This command will restart a board The board will be re configured from the system configuration data Syntax RSBOI BPOS Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt Boards gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access 297 Chapter 6 Management Commands Prerequisites The board must have already been initialized There are no startup parse or configuration errors present There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example RSBOI BPOS 1 6 13 Status Commands STBOP Board Status STCGP Circuit Group Status STCRP SS7 Route Status STDDP Disk Drive Status STDEP Circuit Group Device Status STDHP Status DTS Host Print STHLP Host Link Status STIPP IP Node Status STLCP Software License Capability Status STMLP SS7 Monitor Link Status STNIP Network Interface Status STPCP PCM Status STRAP SIGTRAN Remote Appl
188. Software gt Configuration Operations gt Restart Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Prerequisites Only system types that have been licensed can be specified Only system types where the supporting software is present on the unit Can be selected Example MNRSI 6 9 5 MNSSI Maintenance Snapshot I nitiate This command will take a new snapshot of the system diagnostic logs This command takes a snapshot of key system data Once executed all snapshot data excluding binary files will be written to a single file snapshot tgz in the root directory of the ftpuser account If TRACE is set to Y then snapshot tgz will include trace log files If the parameter is not set or set to N then trace log files will be excluded from the snapshot Syntax MNSSI TRACE Y Web Management Location Operations gt Snapshot 254 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Example MNSSI 6 10 Message Router Commands MRCEE Message Router Concerned Entity End MRCEI Message Router Concerned Entity Initiate MRCEP Message Router Concerned Entity Configuration MRCPE Message Router Custom Profile End MRCPI Message Router Custom Profile Initiate MRCPP Message Router Custom Profile Configuration MRDEE Message Router Destination End
189. System Administration gt DSI Hosts gt Hosts gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STHLP 305 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format Host SIU Link Status HOSTID MHOST RSI_STATUS LOCAL_IPADDR REMOTE_IPADDR 0 i FAILED 1 ACTIVE 192 168 0 126 9000 192 168 0 126 39005 A indicates that a host is acting as a management host Possible RSI_STATUS values are ACTIVE FAILED DEACTIVATED 6 13 11 STIPP IP Node Status This command sends five CPM Internet Control and Management Protocol Echo Request frames to the specified remote IP address The command will output the route the frame takes reporting statistics for each node on the journey Syntax STIPP PING_IPADDR Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Ping IP Address gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STIPP PING_ PADDR 192 168 0 126 Output Format IP Node Status PING_IPADDR LOSS_PCT LAST_PING AVG_PING BEST_PING WORST_PING DEV_PING 192 168 1 104 0 0 1 2 14 0 1 2 39 2 21 9 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows IPADDR The IP address of each node in a route to an IP Destination the last PADDR shown to which five ICPM Echo Request frames are to be sent LOSS_PCT The percentage of packets lost LAST_PING The time in milliseconds the last ping took to reach and return from the
190. TIONS 0 LABEL MTP_LINKSET LINKSET 1 OPC 300 APC 400 NLINKS 1 LABEL To_Network 388 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 SS7 Link Configuration MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE M2 PA LINKSET REF SLC BLINK OPTIONS 0x00000006 LABEL MTP_LINK LINK 1 IFTYPE M2PA LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BLINK 1 OPTIONS 0x00000006 MTP_LINK LINK 2 IFTYPE M2PA LINKSET 1 REF 1 SLC 1 BLINK 2 OPTIONS 0x00000006 MTP_LINK LINK 99 IFTYPE M2PA LINKSET 1 REF 2 SLC 2 BLINK 99 OPTIONS 0x00000006 Ue el MTP route Configuration x MTP_ROUTE NC NC0 C7RT DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 LABEL MTP_ROUTE C7RT 0 DPC 400 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0028 7 11 SIGTRAN M3UA Signaling 7 11 1 Overview This Signaling Server supports the SIGTRAN M3UA protocol compatible with IETF RFC 4666 M3UA can be deployed as a direct replacement for MTP3 on the Signaling Server with M3UA over SCTP offering a SS7 over IP solution removing the need to deploy TDM SS7 links Using M3UA the Signaling Server can connect either directly to multiple Signaling End Points SEPs in a IPSP peer to peer configuration or indirectly via a SIGTRAN Signaling Gateway M3UA supports load sharing across a pair of Signaling Server Signaling Servers configured as a single point code without the requirement for a TDM Signaling Server interlink between the two
191. TIONS 0 LABI MTP_LINKSET NC NC0 LINKSET 0 OPC 1 APC 3 MTP_LINKSET NC NC1 LINKSET 1 OPC 2 APC 3 ea EA Il SS7 Link Configuration MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE LINKSET REF SLC BPOS BLINK STREAM TS OPTIONS 0x00000006 LAB MTP_LINK LINK 0 IFTYPE TDM LINKSET 0 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 0 STREAM 0 TS 16 MTP_LINK LINK 1 IFTYPE TDM LINKSET 0 REF 1 SLC 1 BPOS 1 BLINK 0 STREAM 0 TS 16 MTP_LINK LIN MTP_LINK LIN TDM LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 1 STREAM 0 TS 17 TDM LINKSET 1 REF 1 SLC 1 BPOS 1 BLINK 1 STREAM 0 TS 17 LFTYPI IFTYPI Gl Gl MTP route Configuration ta MTP_ROUTE NC NCO C7RT DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 LABEL MTP_ROUTE NC NC0 C7RT 0 DPC 3 LS1 0 UPMASK 0x0008 MTP_ROUTE NC NC1 C7RT 1 DPC 3 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0008 E E SCCP Options Configuration SCCP_CONFIG NC NC0 OPC SSF 0x8 OPTIONS 0 OPTIONS2 0x00000001 SCCP_CONFIG NC NC0 OPC 1 OPTIONS 0x0126 SCCP_CONFIG NC NC1 OPC 2 OPTIONS 0x0126 Sub System Resource Configuration x SCCP_LSS NC NC0 SSRID SSN LSSPROT USER_ID 0x1d OPTIONS 0 LABEL x or SCCP_RSP NC NCO SSRID SPC OPTIONS 0 PCMASK 0 LABEL x or SCCP_RSS NC NC0O SSRID SPC SSN OPTIONS 0 LABEL SCCP_LSS NC NCO0 SSRID 0 SSN 8 USER_ID 0x
192. TRAN Remote Application Server Status This command displays the status of all links associated with the remote application server Syntax STRAP RAS Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Servers gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STRAP RAS 1 Output Format SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Status RAS NC DPC RC SNLINK AS STATUS ASP STATUS TRMD 1 NCO 401 1 T AVAILABLE ACTIVE LS The meaning of each field in the output is as follows RAS The remote application server identifier NC Network context DPC Destination point code RC Routing context SNLINK SIGTRAN link identifier RAS_ STATUS Status of the remote application server Definitions are AVAILABLE The RAS is available UNAVAILABLE The RAS is unavailable INSUFF_ASP The RAS is available but it has insufficient ASPs active as configured by the STN_RAS command only valid for load sharing ASP_STATUS Status of the remote application server process Definitions are DOWN The link attached to the server is down ACTIVE The link attached to the server is active INACTIVE The link attached to the server is inactive TRMD Traffic mode Definitions are LS Load sharing mode OR Override mode BC Broadcast mode 311 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 13 17 STRLP Remote Server Link Status This command dis
193. TREAM 0 TS 2 P_LINK LINK 6 IFTYPE LINKSET 5 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 1 BLINK 2 STREAM 0 TS 1 P_LINK LINK 7 IFTYPI LINKSET 6 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 1 BLINK 3 STREAM 0 TS 2 MTP route Configuration MTP_ROUTE NC NCO0O C7RT DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 LABEL P_ROUTE NC NCO C7RT 0 DPC 1 LS1 0 UPMASK 0x07 8 P_ROUTE NC NC1 C7RT 1 DPC 2 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x07 8 P_ROUTE NC NC2 C7RT 2 DPC 3 LS1 2 UPMASK 0x07 8 P_ROUTE NC NC3 C7RT 3 DPC 4 LS1 3 UPMASK 0x07 8 P_ROUTE NC NCO C7RT 4 DPC 5 LS1 4 UPMASK 0x07 8 P_ROUTE NC NC1 C7RT 5 DPC 6 LS1 5 UPMASK 0x07 8 P_ROUTE NC NC2 C7RT 6 DPC 7 LS1 6 UPMASK 0x07 8 P_ROUTE NC NC3 C7RT 7 DPC 8 LS1 7 UPMASK 0x07 8 MTP_USER_PART NC lt SI gt lt USER_ID gt P_USER_PART NCO 8 Oxld MT MT MT MT 384 P_USER_PART NC1 0x2d 7 P_USER_PART NC2 6 0x3d P_USER_PART NC3 5 0x4d End of file EL Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 7 5 5 Configuring a Dual Resilient System For the dual resilient configuration it is necessary to modify the configuration to assign one unit as MODEA and the other as MODEB using the SIU_DUAL configuration command The command should also be used to specify the IP address of the partner system The inter SIU link set should be defined on both units using the MTP_LINKSET command with bit 15 of the OPTIONS parameter set to 1 This link set must have the same value defined for
194. TU14 ITU 14 bit operation ANSI ANSI 24 bit operation ITU24 ITU 24 bit operation ITU16 ITU 16 bit operation SSF The value to be used in the sub service field of level 3 messages for this link set Parameter Range Hex number between 0 to f SSHSER SSH SFTP Server access Set to Y to allow access or N to disable access SSN SSN Subsystem number Parameter Range Number between 0 to 254 356 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued SSR SCCP subsystem resource type Parameter Range RSP Remote signaling point RSS Remote subsystem LSS Local subsystem SSRID Subsystem Resource Identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 2047 STATE The current state of the alarm CLR the alarm has cleared ACK the active alarm has been acknowledged ACT the alarm is active STREAM The logical PCM highway from which the signaling processor is to insert the signaling Parameter Range Number between 0 to 3 STRONG When set strong passwords are required A strong password must Be between 8 and 15 characters in length Passwords must contain at least one upper case character one lower case character one digit and one special character Must not be the same as any of the previous 8 passwords SUBNET IP sub net mask Parameter Range IP Address of the form w x y z where w x y and z are betwee
195. This example translates any global title address matching a pattern consisting of a prefix 441425 following by a suffix of any digits and any length into a combination of Point Code 235 and SSN 3 SCCP GTT Pattern Configuration SCCP_GTT_PATTERN NC NC0 GTPID AI SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_PATTERN SCCP_GTT_PATTERN GTPID 12 AI 0x10 GT 0x001104 GTAI_PATTERN 441425 SCCP GTT Address Configuration s SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS NC NC0 GTAID AI GTT_SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_REPLACEMENT SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS GTAID 12 AI 0x03 GTT_SPC 238 SSN 3 GT 0 GTAI_REPLACEMENT a SCCP GTT Translation Configuration SCCP_GTT NC NC0 GTPID GTT_MASK PRI_GTAID SEC_GTAID SCCP_GTT GTPID 12 GTT_MASK R K PRI_GTAID 12 395 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines Example 4 e Match a GT with any GTAI Digits e Keep any digits which are present and add a PC and SSN Component GTAI Digits Adding a PC SSN to any GTAI This example matches any GTAI Digits and adds a Point Code and SSN retaining any GTAI digits SCCP GTT Pattern Configuration SCCP_GTT_PATTERN NC NC0 GTPID AI SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_PATTERN CCP_GTT_PATTERN GTPID 1 AI 0x10 SSN 0x03 GT 0x001204 GTAI_PATTERN SCCP GTT Address Configuration SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS NC NC0 GTAID AI GTT_SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_REPLACEMENT CCP_GTT_ADDRESS GTAID 1 AT 0x53 GTT_SPC 0x3fff SSN 0x08 GT 0x001204 GTAI_
196. Title Address configuration is viewed using the CNGAP MMI command Global Title Addresses can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNGAI command Global Title Addresses are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNGAE MMI command 10 6 SCCP_GTT_PATTERN Global Title Translation Pattern Synopsis The SCCP_GTT_PATTERN command defines the received global title pattern to be matched for a global title translation Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCCP_GTT_PATTERN NC NC0 GTPID AI SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_PATTERN 123 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Example SCCP_GTT_PATTERN GTPID 5 AI 0x10 GT 0x1104 GTAI_PATTERN 44 Parameters e NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context together with a Signaling Point Code SPC uniquely identifies an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e GTPID A unique ID identifying the pattern Values in the range 0 1023 are valid A maximum of 256 pattern_id s may be defined within any or each Network Context Al The Address Indicator octet is formatted according to the point code format specified in the SCCP_CONFIG lt options gt parameter and indicates which elements of addressing are present in the called party address pattern being defined Bit usage for this parameter differs betwe
197. UAE Account Control User Account End ACUAI Account Control User Account Initiate ACUAP Account Control User Account Configuration ACUPC Account Control User Profile Change ACUPE Account Control User Profile End ACUPI Account Control User Profile Initiate ACUPP Account Control User Profile Configuration ALLIP Active Alarm List 6 1 1 ACCUP Access Current User Configuration This command displays information related to a specific user account In the output a PASSWORD and the associated CONFIRM value will be displayed Syntax ACCUP Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt Current User gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Example ACCUP 143 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format User Password Configuration USER john PASSWORD KKKKKKEK CONFIRM KKK KK KKK 6 1 2 ACCUS Account Control Current User Set This command changes configuration data for the current user Syntax ACCUS PASSWORD CONFIRM Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt Current User gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Prerequisites The character strings for the password and confirm parameters must be identical Example ACCUS PASSWORD Di lOgic CONFI RM Di lOgic 6 1 3 ACPOP Account Control Policy Configuration This command displays the ac
198. USSD service profiles Syntax MAUPI PROFILE NAME GWADDR NC GWTON GWNP DSTTON DSTNP DFDCS LANG RCOPT OPTIONS RCV_GWTON RCV_GWNP RCV_GWADDR MAUPC PROFILE NAME GWTON GWNP GWADDR DSTTON DSTNP DFDCS LANG RCOPT OPTIONS RCV_GWTON RCV_GWNP RCV_GWADDR MAUPE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt USSD gt USSD gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service The gateway address must be unique within the network context Example MAUPI PROFILE 0 NAME USSD_0 GWADDR 1212321234 MAUPC PROFI LE 0 GWADDR 1212321234 MAUPE PROFILE 0 249 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 7 21 MAUPP MAP USSD Profile Print Command to display configurations associated with MAP USSD service profiles Syntax MAUPP PROFI LE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt USSD gt USSD gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MAUPP PROFI LE 0 Output Format MAP USSD service profile PROFILE NAME USSD_0 NC NCO GWTON International GWNP ISDN GWADDR 666666666666 RCV_GWTON International RCV_GWNP_ ISDN RCV_GWADDR ANY DSTTON International DSTNP ISDN DEFDSC English LANG EN RCOPT N
199. User End CNUSI Configuration SNMP User Initiate CNUSP SNMP User Configuration 6 3 1 CNACE ATM Cell Stream End This command removes an ATM Cell Stream Note Cell Streams are dynamically removed by first deleting the cell stream from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the cell stream from the system Syntax CNACE CELLSTR Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt Cell Streams gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access 156 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Prerequisites The ATM Cell Stream has been initiated The ATM Cell Stream is not present in the config txt file The ATM Cell Stream is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present There are no startup parse or configuration errors present in the alarm log The ATM Cell Stream is present in the config txt file Example CNACE CELLSTR 1 6 3 2 CNACI ATM Cell Stream Initiate This command adds a new ATM Cell Stream Note ATM Cell Streams are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNACI CELLSTR Web Management Location System Administration g
200. VCI LABEL MTP_LINK LINK 0 IFTYPE LINKSET 0 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 0 CELLSTR 0 VPI 1 VCI 8 OPTIONS 0x0002 MTP_LINK LINK 1 IFTYP LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 1 CELLSTR 1 VPI 1 VCI 8 OPTIONS 0x0002 MTP_LINK LINK 2 IFTYPI LINKSET 0 REF 1 SLC 1 BPOS 0 BLINK 2 CELLSTR 2 VPI 1 VCI 8 OPTIONS 0x0002 MTP_LINK LINK 3 IFTYPE LINKSET 1 REF 1 SLC 1 BPOS 0 BLINK 3 CELLSTR 3 VPI 1 VCI 8 OPTIONS 0x0002 x MTP route Configuration MTP_ROUTE NC NC0 C7RT DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 LABEL MTP_ROUTE NC NC0 C7RT 0 DPC 3 LS1 0 UPMASK 0x0008 MTP_ROUTE NC NC1 C7RT 1 DPC 3 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0008 User part configuration 7 14 Simultaneous MAP I NAP 1S41 Operations The SIU supports the ability to run MAP IS41 or INAP on the system at the same time To achieve this the outgoing dialog ID ranges are automatically divided equally between the configured protocols The application should be configured to use matching ranges The base dialog IDs will be allocated in sequence starting with MAP then INAP and IS41 e The base dialog ID for the first protocol will always be zero e The base dialog ID for the second protocol will be the total number of TCAP dialogs divided by the number of configured protocols 1 to 3 e The base dialog ID for the third protocol will be 2x the total number of TCAP dialogs divided
201. Y FTP Y MWS Y WSS Y MGR Y MGW Y MGX Y MGA Y MEXP Y 6 1 12 ACUPP Account Control User Profile Configuration This command displays information related to user profiles When specified without a parameter or the page parameter the output provided is a table of privileges for all access policies When specified with the ACCESS parameter command line only the output provides a textual description of each privilege associated with the access policy Syntax ACUPP ACUPP ACCESS ACUPP PAGE Applicability DSH Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Profile gt ConfigurationApplicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example ACUPP ACUPP PAGE 2 ACUPP ACCESS policy 148 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format Access User Profile Configuration Page 1 of 2 ACCESS CLI FTP MWS WSS EXP policy y y Y N Y admin x Y Y N Y operator X X Y N user Y N Y N Y ftponly N Y N N N wssonly N N N Y N Access User Profile Configuration Page 2 of 2 ACCESS MGR MGW MGX MGS MGA MGP policy X x Y Y Y Y admin Y Y td Y td N operator Y Y Y N N N user Y N N N N N ftponly N N N N N N wssonly N N N N N N Access User Profile Configuration ACCESS policy CLI X MML command line interface enabled FTP Y FTP login read write enabled WMS Y Management web server enabled WSS N Web Services API disabled EXP N Passwo
202. _CONFIG NC NC1 OPTIONS 0x00110C08 P_CONFIG NC NC2 OPTIONS 0x00010F08 P_CONFIG NC NC3 OPTIONS 0x00010200 SS7 Link Set Configuration MTP_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET OPC APC NLINKS 2 SSF 0x8 OPTIONS 0 LAB P_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET 0 OPC 5 APC 1 OPTIONS 0 P_LINKSET NC NC1 LINKSET 1 OPC 6 APC 2 OPTIONS 0 P_LINKS NC NC2 LINKSET 2 OPC 7 APC 3 OPTIONS 0 SSF 0xB P_LINKSET NC NC3 LINKSET 3 OPC 8 APC 4 OPTIONS 0 eal Ea Il Gl a H w a A 3 4d P_LINKSI P_LINKS P_LINKSI H NC NC0 LINKSET 4 OPC 5 APC 5 OPTIONS 0x8000 NC NC1 LINKSET 5 OPC 6 APC 6 OPTIONS 0x8000 NC NC2 LINKSET 6 OPC 7 APC 7 OPTIONS 0x8000 SSF 0xB H w g g lz H P_LINKSET NC NC3 LINKSET 7 OPC 8 APC 8 OPTIONS 0x8000 SS7 Link Configuration MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE TDM LINKSET REF SLC BPOS BLINK 0 STREAM TS OPTIONS 0x00000006 LAB P_LINK LIN LINKSET 0 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 0 STREAM 2 TS 16 P_LINK LIN LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 1 STREAM 3 TS 16 P_LINK LIN LINKSET 2 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 1 BLINK 0 STREAM 2 TS 24 P_LINK LIN LINKSET 3 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 1 BLINK 1 STREAM 3 TS 24 P_LINK LINK 4 IFTY LINKSET 4 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 2 STREAM 0 TS 1 P_LINK LINK 5 IFTYPI LINKSET 7 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 3 S
203. a Node within a Multi Node Cluster as configured using the MULTI_NODE command in config txt Syntax CNMNP MNID Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Multi Node gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNMNP Output Format Multi Node Configuration MNID MNMODE IPHOST NAME 0 MASTER dsh 0015123475432 1 SEC_MASTER dsh 0016347989540 GROUP MEMBER dsh 0012454362376 6 3 50 CNOBP SNMP Trap Configuration This command displays the configuration of SNMP Traps for all SNMP objects Syntax CNOBP OBJ GRP 187 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Traps gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Prerequisites The DSMI agent must be enabled All object states are set to CHANGE by default meaning that if the state changes then a trap will be generated to all configured SNMP managers Example CNOBP Output Format CNOBP OBJGRP 5 SNMP Trap Configuration OBJIDX OBJGRP OBJECT TUP TDOWN TINACTIVE TIMPAIR TRESTART TQUIESCE TWARNING 10 5 1 CHANGE ALL CREATE NONE DESTROY CHANGE CHANGE IT 5 2 ALL ALL CHANGE CHANGE CHANGE CHANGE CHANGE 6 3 51 CNOBS Configuration SNMP Traps Set This command allows a user to determine the conditions under which an SNMP TR
204. a specific region is selected then daylight saving time adjustments will automatically be made If a sub region is unique across all regions then when entering the sub region value the region need not be specified e g either Europe_London or London may be entered The value showing the region will always be displayed UNITID Fixed unique identifier for this unit used for licensing 362 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued UPMASK A 16 bit value with bit n in the range 3 to 15 set to allow the route to be used for messages with Service Indicator SI n For each user part supported the bit corresponding to the Service Indicator for that user part should be set For example to enable SCCP routing which uses an SI of 3 a value of 0x0008 should be used To enable both SCCP 3 and ISUP 5 a value of 0x0028 should be used or to enable SCCP 3 and BICC 13 a value of 0x2008 should be used Parameter Range Hex number between 0 to ffff UPMODE Object to be updated Parameter Range LIU ATMC CGRP MTPR MTPLS MTPL MONL SSR CSSR SNLINK SNLAS SNRAS SNRASL SNRT SNRTL SNBIND USER A User Account identifier Parameter Range String of length 2 to 19 Must not contain any spaces USER_HOST The host ID of the user application Parameter Range Number between 0 to 127 USER_ID The user application module ID for this cir
205. able 1 Command Parameters Continued NETIF The Network Interface Note Ethernet Network Interfaces cannot be added or removed from the configuration Parameter Range ETHO ETH1 ETH2 ETH3 ETH4 ETH5 ETH6 ETH7 BONDO BOND1 BOND2 BOND3 NLINKS The maximum number of links allocated to the link set Parameter Range Number between 1 to 16 NODE User assigned short form system identity Null or Case sensitive string containing a z A Z or 0 9 characters of length 0 to 9 NODENAME IP node name Parameter Range Case sensitive string of length 1 to 47 Must not contain any spaces NR1D Peak rate of MSUs received during the last day msu s NR1H Peak rate of MSUs received during the last hour msu s NR5M Peak rate of MSUs received during the last 5 minutes msu s NSUBP Y Use Version 1 Map operation Note Subscriber Present if set N Use Version 2 Map operation MAP Ready For SM if set default NT1D Peak rate of MSUs transmitted during the last day msu s NT1H Peak rate of MSUs transmitted during the last hour msu s NT5M Peak rate of MSUs transmitted during the last 5 minutes msu s NTP NTP activation parameter Set to Y to enable use of Network Time Protocol or N to disable use of Network Time Protocol NTPSER Identifier for the NTP server Parameter Range Number between 0 to 15 345 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued NTPSER_IPADDR NTP Server I
206. able details the current variants Variant Value Variant Description 0 Blue Book ISUP 1 1992 ISUP 2 ANSI ISUP 3 German ISUP 4 UK ISUP 5 Japanese TTC ISUP 6 ANSI RLT ISUP 7 ITU RLT ISUP 8 ANSI 95 ISUP 9 Italian ISUP 10 SSURF French ISUP 11 China ISUP 12 ISUP 2000 ETSI V4 13 BICC 113 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands e OPTIONS2 A 32 bit field that is mapped directly to the ext_1_options field in the ISUP Circuit Group Configuration message described in the SUP Programmer s Manual Currently the following bits are significant Bit Description 0 Add ST digits to Called party number 1 Select 16 bit Point Code format for Japanese operation 2 Do not send REL on T33 expiry waiting for INF 3 Usr to usr srvc does not have to be requested to use uuinf param 8 Any Calling Party Clearing Indication received is passed transparently to the user application 9 Generate periodic heartbeat messages towards the user_id configured for the circuit group If no acknowledgement is received for the heartbeat then blocking of circuits is performed 10 When ISUP must release the call to the user a Location value of LPN private network serving the local user 1 will be indicated in the Cause parameter Otherwise a Location value of RPN private network serving the remote user 5 will be indicated 22 If set and ISUP has been configur
207. agement Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt HLR gt HLR Tx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MAHTP PROFI LE 0 Output Format MAP HLR Tx Profile PROFILE NAME HLRADDR_TRANS_0 NC NCO HLRTON International HLRNP ISDN HLRADDR 666666666666 RCOPT N OPTIONS 0x00000000 RIID 0 236 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 7 5 MAORI MAORC MAORE MAP MO SMS Rx Profile Synopsis Commands to initiate change and end the configuration associated with MAP Receive MO SMS service profiles Syntax MAORI PROFILE NAME NC SCTON SCNP SCADDR RCOPT OPTIONS ASC MAORC PROFILE NAME SCTON SCNP SCADDR RCOPT OPTIONS ASC MAORE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MO SMS Rx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service The service center address must be unique within the network context Example MAORI PROFILE 0 NAME MOSMS_RECV_0 SCADDR 223232222 MAORC PROFILE 0 SCADDR 223232222 MAORE PROFI LE 0 6 7 6 MAORP MAP MO SMS Rx Profile Print Synopsis Command to display the configuration associated with MAP Receive MO SMS service profiles Syntax MAORP PROFI LE Web Managemen
208. akes it possible to configure a route to a specific destination that is also used for other destinations with a similar point code This allows configuration of default destination sub systems for example to a gateway SCP 7 8 Dynamic Host Activation The Signaling Server when acting as an SIU has the ability to activate deactivate host links using the MNINI MNINE commands This functionality supports the preservation of the host status over a restart and no alarms are reported for those hosts that have been deactivated If the SIU_HOSTS configuration command is omitted from the configuration file then the number of hosts is determined from what has been configured in MMI If the SIU_HOSTS configuration command is present and NUM_HOSTS is set to ALL then all host links are configured but only one host link is activated the others remain deactivated initially If the SIU_HOSTS configuration command is present and NUM_HOSTS is set to a value other than ALL then that number of hosts are configured and activated in this case no additional hosts can be configured This allows the SIU users to escalate their systems by adding or removing host connections at runtime and without the need to apply a system restart to the unit In the case that a unit restart is required the configuration adopted can be preserved 386 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 7 9 Dynamic Configuration Dynamic configuration allows
209. al configuration command P_TOKEN in the config txt file 2 Executing the PHNIPTKI MMI command to load that configuration Syntax IPHNIPTKI IPTOKEN Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt IP Host NamesTokens gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites There cannot be duplicate entries for an IP token and IP address The IPTOKEN cannot be a valid IP Addresses Example PHNIPTKI 1PTOKEN dialogic 6 6 17 IPHNI PTKP IP Host NameToken Configuration This command displays configuration related to an IP hostToken Note See the individual parameter definitions of the config txt command P_TOKEN defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters supported 231 Chapter 6 Management Commands Syntax IPHNIPTKP IPTOKEN Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt IP Host NamesTokens gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access MMI Prerequisites If the IP token is specified it must already have been initiated Example IPHNI PTKP Output Format IPTOKEN IPADDR dialogic 173 210 122 61 6 6 18 I PWSP IP Web Server Configuration This command displays the configuration for web services Syntax IPWSP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Web Servers gt
210. al networks is in provisioning where the user requires 64 SS7 links between two point codes in a network As the SIU supports 16 links in a link set and one link set between two points in a network only 16 links between two points would normally be achievable However if the network is divided into four logical Network Contexts then up to four link sets may be created between the two point codes one in each Network Context thus allowing up to 64 SS7 links to be configured between the two points Note The Network Context has significance only to the configuration of the local node including the hosts No external messages include any indication of the Network Context and the configuration of remote systems is unaffected 368 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The SIU mode is able to support architectures in which a single SIU or dual resilient SIU pair are connected into one or more different SS7 networks The SIU or SIU pair can also independently terminate multiple local point codes within the same network The following sections describe these different architectures The SIU can support up to four Network Contexts where each Network Context is a different network or different independent local point code within the same network In the configuration commands or MMI commands Network Contexts are designated NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 Network Context NCO is also referred to as the default Network Context since
211. ally self documenting e FTP FTP and SFTP access is supported allowing users to upload system configuration files and software updates as well to retrieve diagnostic information from the Signaling Server e SNMP A SNMP interface supporting v1 v2 and V3 SNMP allowing a user to query system status as well as supporting the ability to report SNMP traps e Lights Out Management The Lights Out Management Interface enables a user to check the status of the equipment without the system software running 4 1 Web Interface The web management interface of the Signaling Server can be reached using a Web browser with IP of Ethernet port 0 as the URL for example the following http 192 168 0 1 For compatibility and security reasons it is recommended that an up to date Web browser client should be used to access the Server Access to the Web Interface may be restricted several ways including the following e Access can be restricted to the use of https e Access to the Web Server on the system handling the web management interface may be configured so that a user must enter a user name and password before they can gain entry e Once access has been gained a user is then required to enter a user name and password for access to a management session e Functional areas of such as configuration update and control may be restricted to particular users limiting other user to read only access See Chapter 3 Access Control and Security for m
212. and seconds 11 11 MSLTP SCCP Loadshare Table Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for SCCP Loadshare Tables Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each SCCP Loadshare Table Page 2 displays measurements for DPC associcated with a SCCP Loadshare Table When a profile is specified Page 2 measurements are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSLTP RESET PAGE Web Management Location System Administration gt SCCP gt Load Share Tables gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSLTP MSLTP PAGE 2 MSLTP RESET yY 275 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format SCCP Loadshare Table Services Measurements Page 1 of 2 LST SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD LST 5 1212 2 01 29 16 LST 7 333 5 01 29 16 SCCP Loadshare Table Services Measurements Page 2 of 2 LSTSEQ DPC TXMSG PERIOD LST 5 0 2222 606 01 29 16 LST 5 1 2223 606 01 29 16 LST 7 0 1011 333 01 29 16 LST 7 1 1013 0 01 29 16 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows LST The Loadshare Table identifier SUCCESS Count of successful routing attempts FAIL Count of failed routing attempts SEQ A sequence number for a DPC in Loadshare Table DPC A Destination Point Code TXMSG The number of messages routed to the DPC PERIOD Time since measurements for the serv
213. and can be accessed using the Web browser April 2012 4 Minor corrections and enhancements Support for additional p commands introduced in SWS release 1 1 0 February 2012 3 Minor corrections and enhancements Additional guidelines for Dual Resilient Signaling Server operation September 2011 2 General Availability July 2011 1 Initial version for Beta release 13 Chapter 1 Overview 1 Overview 1 1 Introduction 14 The Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual provides instruction to install and operate the Dialogic SS7G41 Signaling Server also referred to herein as SS7G41 Signaling Server or Signaling Server or simply SS7G41 and the BorderNet Diameter Services Helix also referred to herein as BorderNet Diameter Services Helix or BorderNet DSH or simply DSH The BorderNet DSH and the SS7G41 share a common user interface and this manual is relevant for both products The manual covers installation commissioning and operation including full details of all the user commands The SS7G41 and BorderNet DSH each use of a subset of the management and configuration interface commands for System IP SIGTRAN and SS7 protocol as detailed in this manual The manual offers detailed information on the initial installation licensing provisioning and administration while operating in SIU and SWS modes and defines the full set of provisioning and administration commands as well as diagnostic and alarms ind
214. and shows which software licenses are available on the system Syntax CNLCP Web Management Location System Administration gt Software gt Software Licenses gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access 178 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example CNLCP Output Format Software License Capability Status CAPABILITY EVALUATION LINKS RATE SIU SCTP M2PA M3UA 16 154 TDM 16 6 3 36 CNLDE SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration End The command removes aan SCCP Loadshare DPC Note Configuration may be dynamically removed by 1 Deleting a configuration command SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC entry from the config txt file 2 Executing the CNLDE MMI command to unload it from the system Syntax CNLDE LSTSEQ Web Management Location System Administration gt SCCP gt Load Share Tables gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The SCCP Loadshare DPC ID has been initiated The SCCP Loadshare DPC is not present in the config txt file The SCCP Loadshare DPC is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SCCP Loadshare DPC is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleti
215. anual U17SSS e INAP Programmer s Manual U16SSS e SCTP Programmer s Manual UO1STN e M3UA Programmer s Manual U02STN e M2PA Programmer s Manual U03STN 1 1 2 Applicability This manual is applicable to the SS7G41 with SIU release 2 2 x or later or SWS release 2 0 x or later This manual is also applicable to BorderNet Diameter Service Helix Releases 1 2 0 or later 15 Chapter 1 Overview 1 2 Capacity 1 16 This section identifies key capacity of the Signaling Server The capabilities of a Signaling Server is dependent on the number and type of signaling boards installed as defined by the product variant as well as which software licenses installed Use of Signaling Servers in dual pairs increases the capacity of the overall system while still acting as a single SS7 point code The numbers given in this section are for a single Signaling Server 2 1 SS7G41 Common Capabilities The table below provides the SS7G41 capacities that are in common between the SIU and SWS modes of operation Feature or Protocol Capacity Dialogic DSI SS7 Up to 2 x SS7LDH4 board or 2 x SS7MDL4 Network Interface Boards board PCM per board 4 per SS7LDH4 or 4 per SS7MDL4 Ethernet interface 4 SS7 links per board 16 per SS7LDH4 or 124 per SS7MDL4 HSL links per board 4 per SS7MDL4 ATM Cell Streams per 4 per SS7MDL4 board ATM QSAAL Links per 124 per SS7MDL4 board M3UA links Up to 512 link equi
216. arameter is a compound parameter of the form x y where x is an SIU Host ID and y may be one of the following PRI the database is available and part of the primary pool SEC the database is available and part of the secondary pool FAILED the database is not currently accessible 6 13 6 STDEP Circuit Group Device Status This command displays the status of all circuits within the circuit group Refer to the associated protocol programmer s manual for a complete list of returned status values Syntax STDEP GID 302 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt Call gt Circuit Groups gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STDEP GID 3 Output Format Circuit Group Device Status GID CID outa HEX PROTOCOL_STATUS BLOCKING_STATUS 3 1 32 0x04 IC_CONNECT 3 2 33 0x02 IC_W_ACM 3 3 34 0x00 IDLE LM 3 4 35 0x00 IDLE 9 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e GID Circuit group identifier e CID Circuit identifier e CIC Circuit identification code e HEX Hexadecimal status value e PROTOCOL STATUS Abbreviated status text e BLOCKING STATUS e LH Circuit is locally hardware blocked e RH Circuit is remotely hardware blocked e LM Circuit is locally maintenance blocked e RM Circuit is remotely maintenance blocke
217. ase set subscriber database is unavailable to DBSVDID 100 Check configuration connectivity and DatabaselD operation of remote database 73 CRT test 0 CRT A user activated critical alarm test has alarm occurred This is a test alarm that can be manually activated and cleared using the management interface 74 MAJ test 0 MAJ A user activated major alarm test has alarm occurred This is a test alarm that can be manually activated and cleared using the management interface 75 MNR test 0 MNR A user activated major alarm test has alarm occurred This is a test alarm that can be manually activated and cleared using the management interface 76 Flow Env 0 MAJ The Flow Environment is not currently unavail available This condition may indicate that an internal restart of the flow environment is taking place following detection of a fatal error If the condition persists then it may be cleared after restart of the unit 77 Diameter HDPR MAJ Communications failure to a Diameter peer fail peer has occurred Check configuration connectivity and remote equipment 47 Chapter 4 System Management Alarm IDs Severity Description and Clearance Actions Continued CODE TITLE ID SEVERITY DESCRIPTION ALARM CLEARANCE ACTION 78 SCTP path fail SNLINK MNR Communications failure has occurred on an individual path one or more paths in a SIGTRAN association have failed Check conf
218. ate Possible values are IDLE RCVD SENT ACTIVE TSM TCAP dialog transaction state Possible values are IDLE RCVD SENT ACTIVE DCS TCAP dialog control structure state Possible values are FREE PENDING ACTIVE ISM INVK Number of active invokes in dialog LTRID Local transaction identity RTRID Remote transaction identity 6 13 25 STTPP NTP Server Status This command displays the status of the Network Time Protocol servers configured Syntax STTPP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt NTP Servers gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STTPP Output Format NTP Server Status NTPSER IPADDR STATUS STRATUM NTP_OFFSET LABEL 1 192 168 0 1 SYSPEER 3 0 000321 Primary NTP server 2 192 168 0 2 ACTIVE 4 0 000232 NTP server 2 The STATUS reported in the output is as follows 318 INACTIVE The NTP service is disabled UNREACHABLE The NTP server is unreachable REJECT The NTP server has been rejected by the server selection algorithm ACTIVE NTP time information is being received from this server SYSPEER NTP has selected this server to synchronize to The STRATUM indicates the number of servers between the system NTP client and a reference clock The NTP_OFFSET reported in the output is the Estimated difference in seconds between the system NTP Client and NTP Server Dialogic DSI Sig
219. ates an IP Firewall that may be configured to only allow access via specific IP address or networks Detail related to IP firewall configuration and operation is provided in the IP Firewall commands IPFWP IPFWI IPFWC IPFWE 31 Chapter 3 Access Control and Security 3 3 32 5 3 SSH For additional security the Signaling Server supports the use of Secure Shell SSH tunneling for telnet and secure FTP operation Note The unit does not provide a Secure Shell session connection Your SSH client may need additional configuration to allow SSH tunneling without a session connection Once activated a future user is required to set up an SSH tunnel prior to telnet access For a client on a Linux or Solaris like operating system log in for telnet using the ssh application The ssh application should be invoked using a shell script of the following form bin sh ssh I siguser C f 1 L 2323 1 8101 sleep 5 telnet localhost 2323 For a client on a UNIX operating system the command sequence to log in for FTP access using the sftp application is sftp siguser lt Signaling Server IP Address gt You are also prompted to enter the password for the siguser login account The secure connection to a unit can also be established from other operating systems using the appropriate SSH software 5 4 Configuring Public Key Authentication for SSH Configuring for Public Key Authentication allows the operator to use SSH to conn
220. ation gt SIGTRAN gt Links gt Status DRIVE System Administration gt Server Management gt Disk Drives gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Prerequisites If activating a link the SS7 signaling link set has not already been activated If uninhibiting a link the link has been activated The circuit group must be already configured and deactivated Only M3UA SIGTRAN links may be activated The disk drive must be in the INACTIVE state Example MNINE LINK 3 MNINE LINK 3 I1NHIBIT N MNI NE HOSTID 1 MNINE GID 2 MNINE DRIVE 1 6 9 2 MNI NI Maintenance Inhibit I nitiate This command is deactivates an SS7 signaling link SIGTRAN M3UA link host RSI link or circuit group The command is also used to inhibit an SS7 signaling link and to block a failed hard disk drive before removal and replacing Important In order to maintain RAID array hard disk drive integrity it is important to follow the correct procedure as detailed in the operators manual when blocking hard disk drives Note To inhibit a signaling link the command should be entered with the INHIBIT Y parameter set The SS7 Link status MMI command should then be used to determine the new status of the link If the inhibit request was accepted the L3 STATE is shown as UNAVAILABLE However if the inhibit request was denied for example because it relates to the only active link the L3 STATE is shown as AVAILABLE
221. ault values and therefore is often not required Similarly for each subsequent Network Context the INAP_NC_ CONFIG command is only required if the INAP options within that Network Context differ from default values The OPTIONS field in the INAP_NC_CONFIG command takes the same values as that used in the INAP_CONFIG command When used to support multiple local point codes within the same network the OPTIONS settings should typically be the same in both commands An INAP_NC_CONFIG command is not required for NCO since the INAP_CONFIG command configures the necessary options for the default Network Context 7 5 Dual Resilient Signaling Server Operation In order to achieve high availability and a high degree of fault tolerance in an SS7 environment using Dialogic DSI Signaling Gateways signaling servers when operating in signaling server mode an SS7 end point spread over two signaling servers and multiple application servers can be configured and deployed Distributing application processing of a signaling point on multiple application servers not only increases the total capacity of a system but also offers a higher level of fault tolerance in the user application space Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers are designed to support dual chassis architectures for splitting a point code over two active SS7 nodes Using this technique the links in an SS7 link set can be spread between two separate chassis This chapter describes the features of th
222. b Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt GTT Patterns gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SCCP GTT Pattern ID has not been initiated The SCCP GTT Pattern is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SCCP GTT Pattern is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNGPI GTPID 1 6 3 27 CNGPP SCCP GTT Pattern Configuration This command shows GTT Patterns defined on the system Syntax CNGPP NC GTPID Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNGPP 173 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format SCCP GTT Pattern Configuration GTPID NC AI SPC SSN GT GTAI_PATTERN 5 NCO 0x10 0 0 0x001104 22 26 1023 NC1 0x10 0 0 0x001104 6 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command SCCP_GTT_PATTERN for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 28 CNGTE SCCP GTT Translation End This command removes an SCCP GTT Translation Note SCCP GTT Translations are dynamically removed by first deleting the Gateway List from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the Gateway List from the system Syntax CNGTE GTPI D
223. bined SS7SBG40SIUnn licenses cannot be combined with SS7SBG40SWSnn licenses 1 4 Temporary Licenses A temporary software license can be issued for a spare or backup signaling server in the event that an existing server encounters a problem that requires the unit to be repaired or replaced Alternatively a new permanent license based on the licenses from the failed unit can be issued for a spare signaling server The process for obtaining a temporary license file is almost identical to that of activating a new license On the web based activation form the License IDs should be prefixed with the following 4 characters BAK For example if the license ID on the certificate is G40 TCAP 785 9187 the license ID specified on the web form for the corresponding temporary license would be BAK G40 TCAP 785 9187 The Host ID entered on the form is that of the replacement system on which the license will be installed A temporary license file will then be sent to the email address you specify during the license activation 21 Chapter 2 Licensing Installation and Initial Configuration A temporary license will allow operation of a spare backup unit for a period of 30 days from date of issue after which the system software cannot be restarted It is therefore important to seek authorization to re activate the original license s to perform the new activation and to install the new license file prior to the expiry of the 30 day period 2 1 5
224. but only one cable is connected to it See the Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Hardware Manual for details on the Ethernet interfaces 49 Chapter 4 System Management To access the remote management interface follow these steps Assign IP address 192 168 0 100 to the computer that will access the remote management interface Connect this computer to eth3 on the Signaling Server either directly using a crossover cable or connect through a standalone Ethernet hub or switch Enter the following URL from a Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox browser on the computer http 192 168 0 2 You are redirected to secure HTTP HTTPS connection A message related to the web site s security is displayed You can click to continue to the web site or you can install a security certificate on the system 1 Log into the remote management interface using the following information User siguser Password siguser The System Information page is displayed 2 3 Click Remote Control in the top menu bar To launch the redirection console viewer click Console Redirection Note You will need to install the Java Runtime Environment to use this option 4 To see the server power status and perform power control functions click Power Control 4 7 2 The following power control functions are available Reset Server Power Off Server Immediate Power Off Server Orderly Shutdown Power On Ser
225. by the number of configured protocols 1 to 3 The table below shows the distribution of dialog IDs and base dialog IDs assuming that the maximum numbers of supported TCAP dialogs 32768 are configured Outgoing Dialogs Base Outgoing Dialog ID MAP I NAP 1S41 MAP I NAP 1S41 MAP 32768 0 INAP 32768 0 1S41 32768 0 392 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 MAP amp INAP 16384 16384 0 16384 MAP amp IS41 16384 16384 0 0 INAP amp 1541 16384 16384 0 16384 a INAP amp 10922 10922 10922 0 10922 21844 7 15 GTT Configuration Global Title Translation GTT is a process used to add or modify information in Global Titles to enable messages to be routed onwards This may take the form of adding a Point Code or Subsystem Number or modifying the Global Title Address Information Typically GTT examines the Global Title of a Called Party Address and compares it to the rules configured If the Global Title and Global Title Address Information match then the translation is performed The message is then routed accordingly as it passes down the SS7 Protocol stack GTT support allows for simple translation of GTAI digits from one number to another GTT also supports translations using wildcard matching to identify blocks of numbers which require the same translation operation as well as more sophisticated translation
226. by SNMP 336 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued IPTOKEN A short name that is used in system configuration to represent a Pv4 IPv6 addresses Parameter Range String of length 1 to 16 Must not contain any spaces L21D The Layer 2 ID of the Cell Stream within the board Parameter Range Number between 0 to 7 LABEL Text label used to identify the related item Parameter Range Null or Text of length 0 to 31 May contain spaces chars will be converted to spaces LANG Language indication string Parameter Range Case sensitive string of length 0 to 2 Must not contain any spaces LAS LAST_PING The SIGTRAN Local Application Server identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 The time in milliseconds the last ping took to reach and return from the target IP node LC Line Coding Technique If displayed the value in brackets represents the alternative integer value that can be used when entering the Line Code during configuration of the PCM Parameter Range HDB3 1 HDB3 E1 only AMI 2 AMI with no Zero Code Suppression B8ZS 4 B8ZS T1 only LEDID Front panel LED ID Set to Y to activate LED or N to deactivate LED LGDATA Data associated with a logging filter The data entered is specific to the filter Parameter Range Null or Case sensi
227. by the signaling boards Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax LIU_CONFIG PORTID PCM LIUTYPE E1 LC HDB3 FF G704 CRC_MODE NONE BUILDOUT 0 OPTIONS 0 LABEL or LIU_CONFIG PORTID PCM LIUTYPE T1 LC B82ZS FF ESF CRC_MODE NONE BUILDOUT 1 OPTIONS 0 LABEL Example LIU_CONFIG PORTID 0 PCM 0 1 LIUTYPE E1 Parameters The LIU_CONFIG command includes the following parameters e PORTID Logically identifies the PCM port on a Signaling Server The port_id should be unique within the system and in the range 0 to 7 65 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands PCM Identifies the physical interface to the system for LIU It is a compound parameter made up of board position and LIU interface number The boards on the Signaling Server are numbered from 0 to 1 with board 0 at the bottom of the chassis Valid values for the interface on the board are 1 to 4 for the SS7LD and SS7MD boards e LIUTYPE Specifies the physical type of interface required according to the following table Note that this must be selected by you to be appropriate for the actual hardware fitted otherwise an error status is returned This parameter must be set to one of the following values Value Meaning 4 T1 El balanced E1 high impedance for monitoring applications T1 high impedance for monitoring applications 5 6 7 8 E1 protective monitoring point for
228. by the system OBJECT report object based SNMP notifications only ALARM report alarm based SNMP notifications only ALL report both object based and alarm based SNMP notifications NONE do not provide any notifications DSTNP Destination Numbering Plan Parameter Range Unknown ISDN Reserved2 Data Telex ServiceCentreS pecific5 ServiceCentreS pecific6 Reserved7 National Private ERMES Reserved11 Reserved12 Reserved13 Reserved14 Reserved 328 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued DSTTON Destination Type Of Number Parameter Range Unknown International National NetworkSpecific Subscriber Alphanumeric AbbreviatedNumber Reserved DTYPE Data type Parameter Range SYSKEY SYSCFG CONFIG END Identifies whether the SIU end is acting as a client or a server Parameter Range C Client Side S Server Side ENGINE A hexadecimal string value used for a SNMP V3 engine associated with a particular manager ETH Ethernet port number Parameter Range Number between 0 to 31 EXP Whether the password in the account should expire Y or Not N FE_REF Logical identifier for this Functional Entity FE FF The Frame Format If displayed the value in brackets represents the alternative integer value that can be used when entering the Frame Format during configuration of the PCM Parameter
229. c Configuration s cccci Acces ei al ain wa aaa a sl aces 387 7 9 1 Config txt Based Dynamic Configuration ccccececee eee tenet eee eee e ea eaed 387 SIGTRAN M2PASignaling c2scc3cc a a ee a a Oe ati es 388 TEOL OVERVIEW iaieineea AAEE Gat Pan sind ea chad vee cea bee ate A Ue Ry tings veka DESS 388 EOZ M2PALICONSO ss Swat ae Beha eek Gud a eae te ie ane a ee 388 Te VO 83 SSASOVCMIM2PA nten tive iun Sine a E aE Aa aae agate tein halen neta 388 7 10 4 Configuration Examples cece cece eee ete eaten eae 388 SIGTRAN M3UA Signaling x sho Ae Aedes aa Rad ee tind Mee 389 FV SOVENMIEW 222 aA ean eee a Gl a ee BAe a alee 389 7 11 2 Configuration Examples cc netted 389 SIGTRAN M3UA Dual Operation tenet EEE Ennn Ea 391 ATM Configuration tices xinc ah wine site unde vee ev nnaete atdendaqtelead vada epieskbcnterreacisebeeanalees 391 PEZ F Ovet eW Jo ecto ves vik Rovio lie ees Hed ita A a eee melanie ae A ee 391 7 13 2 Configuration Example ccc cece eee eee ee tenet 391 Simultaneous MAP INAP IS41 Operations c cece eee eee eee ened 392 GIT Configuratii N fies doeved sande a paa E p a a E E E A Makara be ev deve aces thane DIETA 393 7 15 1 Global Title Address Information ssssssssssrssrrrsrrnrrrnerrnnrrerrrrnrrnrin eee 393 PVS 2 EXAMpPleS aie dec vales tan seid E nk Gains seus anh E dellafter steadte tag ised 394 HSL Signaling es see OA ae a aed oe ee ee ad oe 396 FV MTP
230. c 0 Link Setid 0 ez 777 Point Code 300 Point Code 600 Point Code 500 Figure 7 Multiple Local Point Code Configuration Example NCO Point Code 1 Remote Node Point Code 3 NC1 Point Code 2 The example config txt file below shows the configuration of a system based on the figure above Signaling Server Host Configuration Change SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS BACKUP_HOST OPTIONS MIN_HOSTS DMHOST SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 1 BACKUP_HOST NONE OPTIONS 0 MIN_HOSTS 1 DMHOST 0 Signaling Board Configuration x SS7_BOARD BPOS BRDTYPE OPTIONS SS7_BOARD BPOS 0 BRDTYPE SS7MD OPTIONS 0x00000001 SS7_BOARD BPOS 1 BRDTYPE SS7MD OPTIONS 0x00000001 T1 E1 PCM network interface trunk Configuration LIU_CONFIG PORTID PCM LIUTYPE E1 LC HDB3 FF G704 CRC_MODE NONE BUILDOUT 0 OPTIONS 0 LABEL A or LIU_CONFIG PORTID PCM LIUTYPE T1 LC B8ZS FF ESF CRC_MODE NONE BUILDOUT 1 OPTIONS 0 LABEL 381 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines LIU_CONFIG PORTID 0 PCM 0 1 LIUTYPE E1 LIU_CONFIG PORTID 4 PCM 1 1 LIUTYPE E1 MTP3 Options Configuration MTP_CONFIG NC NC0 OPTIONS 0 MTP_CONFIG NC NCO OPTIONS 0x0002 MTP_CONFIG NC NC1 OPTIONS 0x0002 K SS7 Link Set Configuration F MTP_LINKSET NC NC0 LINKSET OPC APC NLINKS 2 SSF 0x8 OP
231. cerned subsystems are configured using SCCP_CONC_SSR SCCP Concerned Sub Systems Configuration Load share tables used by SCCP Global Title Translation are configured using the SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE SCCP Load Share Table and SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC SCCP Load Share Table commands SCCP Global Title Translations are configured using the SCCP_GTT_PATTERN Global Title Translation Pattern SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS Global Title Translation Address and SCCP_GTT Global Title Translations commands TCAP on the Signaling Server is activated using the TCAP_CONFIG TCAP Configuration and TCAP_NC_CONFIG TCAP Network Context Configuration commands and may be configured with Dialog groups using the TCAP_CFG_DGRP TCAP Dialog Group Configuration command Configuration for INAP and MAP users of TCAP on the Signaling Server may be entered using the INAP_CONFIG INAP Configuration INAP_NC_CONFIG INAP Network Context Configuration INAP_FE INAP Functional Entities INAP_AC INAP Application Context MAP_CONFIG MAP Configuration and MAP_NC_CONFIG MAP Configuration commands DTS users requiring more than 16 hosts should configure the number of host using the DTS_CONFIG command DTS Routes can be configured using the DTS ROUTE command The configuration commands and their parameters are defined in the following sections 1 1 Syntax Conventions In the command description sections of this chapter the text under the subheading Syntax shows a li
232. cess policy for a server Syntax ACPOP Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt System Policy gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example ACPOP 144 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format Account Control Policy Configuration TELSER ACTIVE SSHSER ACTIVE FTPSER ACTIVE WMSER ACTIVE WSSER ACTIVE SESSIONS STATIC_TAGS MAXLIFE STRONG Y RPFILTER 1 6 1 4 ACPOS Account Control Policy Set This command changes the access policy for a server Syntax ACPOS TELSER SSHSER FTPSER WMSER WSSER SESSIONS MAXLIFE STRONG RPFILTER Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt System Policy gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Policy Management Access Example ACPOS MAXLIFE 30 6 1 5 ACUAC Account Control User Account Change This command changes the configuration of a user account Syntax ACUAC USER PASSWORD CONFIRM ACCESS Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Accounts gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Administration Access Prerequisites When entered the character strings for the password and confirm parameters must be identical Example ACUAC USER ad
233. ch as the config txt or a copy of this manual in the main ftp login directory or any of the syslog subdirectories in the FTP account that contains diagnostic information such as logs of MMI commands traces PCAP logs system logs etc No Confirm Some actions such as add removing blocking on a object table generate a pop up are you sure box Setting the No confirm option disables this Auto Refresh When set the web page will automatically refresh every 10s when viewing status and measurements Operations Operations are a Set of links to some of the more frequent actions that a user may perform on the system such as log off restart Diagnostic snapshot as well as shortcuts to the alarm and initial landing pages A user may also use the New Session operation to open a new browser tab or window accessing the management interface or when DUAL operation is active a new session can be opened on the partner Signaling Server Finally a user may request that the config txt file be restored to its default values Flow Management BorderNet DSH only This menu offers control of the DSH Flow Design and Management functionality as well as Routing and DSH specific OAM and diagnostic functionality See Section 4 1 1 DSH Flow Management Menu on page 37 for an overview of this menu or the BorderNet Diameter Services Helix Flow Management Manual for further details The object tables themselves report all the data such as co
234. ch bit is as defined for the options parameter described in the Configure Sub System Resource Request section of the SCCP Programmer s Manual e LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional SCCP Remote Sub System configuration is viewed using the CNSSP MMI After startup additional Remote Sub System Resources can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNSSI command Remote Sub System Resources are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNSSE MMI command 5 10 10 SCCP_CONC_SSR SCCP Concerned Sub Systems Configuration Synopsis This command defines an SCCP concerned resource that receives SCCP notifications if the state of a resource it is concerned about changes A concerned sub system resource CSSR can refer to up to 32 sub system resources SSR Notification is given in the form of an SCCP management indication Multiple SCCP_CONC_SSR entries may be included in the file See the SCCP Programmer s Manual for more information Note Attempting to mix the current command formats with the formats of older versions of commands within the same configuration file may give rise to restart errors indicating inconsistent command format Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCCP_CONC_SSR NC NC0 CSSRLID CSSRID SSRID Example SCCP_CONC_SSR CSSRLID 1 CSSRID 4 SSRID 2
235. ch the defined ranges of dialogs will be sent The number of dialogs must lie within the limit specified with the TCAP_CONFIG command 5 13 4 TCAP_ TIMER TCAP Timer Configuration Synopsis The TCAP_TIMER command provides the ability to configure the TCAP protocol timers from the config txt file This command is currently only used to configure the TCAP idle dialog timeout Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax TCAP_TIMER 0 TDLG_IDLE_TOUT lt TVAL gt Example TCAP_TIMER 0 TDLG_IDLE_TOUT 10 Parameters The TCAP_TIMER command includes the following parameters e RESERVED Reserved for future use Should be set to 0 136 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 TIMID A text identifier for the timer to be configured It should be set to TDLG_IDLE_TOUT TVAL The timer value in seconds 5 14 MAP Configuration Commands The MAP configuration commands include e MAP_CONFIG MAP Configuration e MAP_NC_CONFIG MAP Configuration 5 14 1 MAP_ CONFIG MAP Configuration Synopsis The MAP_CONFIG command defines the global configuration parameters for MAP when existing in a single network or for Network Context 0 NCO when existing in multiple Network Contexts See Section 7 4 Configuring Multiple Network Contexts on page 368 for more information This command should only be used if the MAP software has been licensed and configured on the Signaling Server and must appear on a separa
236. cific options of the signaling server from the default values which are determined from the SCCP configuration and therefore is often not required Similarly for each subsequent Network Context the TCAP_NC_CONFIG command is only required if the TCAP options within that Network Context differ from those determined from the SCCP options within that same Network Context The TCAP_NC_CONFIG command contains parameters to define address format and TCAP specific options The OPTIONS field in the TCAP_NC_CONFIG command takes the same values as that used in the TCAP_CONFIG command When used to support multiple local point codes within the same network the OPTIONS settings should typically be the same in both commands A TCAP_NC_CONFIG command is not required for NCO since the TCAP_CONFIG command configures the necessary options for the default Network Context 373 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines 7 4 11 MAP 7 4 11 1 Applications Where a dialog is initiated remotely no change is required since MAP automatically determines which Network Context is appropriate Where the dialog is initiated locally the application must specify the Network Context to which the message is destined This effectively indicates the point code to be used as the originating point code The Network Context should be indicated in the first message for the dialog being used For 1S41 the Network Context should be indicated in the Open Request message instead of using t
237. circuits to be used by ISUP This parameter may be in the range 1 to 65 535 Note SUP allows the configuration of cid values in the range 0 to lt num_ccts gt 1 e MAXSIF Specifies the maximum size of a message transmitted by the ISUP module on the Signaling Server For ISUP operation this should be 272 octets For BICC operating above M3UA a user may specify up to 544 octets to allow larger messages to be transmitted without the need for segmentation Support for sif values above 272 is application dependent and depends on the maximum size a receiving switch can process 5 9 2 I1SUP_CFG_CCTGRP I SUP Circuit Group Configuration Synopsis The ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP command configures an ISUP circuit group Normally all circuits on a single T1 or E1 interface would be assigned to the same circuit group A single command enables the operating parameters for all the circuits in the group to be specified Circuit groups are described fully in the ISUP Programmer s Manual 111 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Applicability SIU Syntax ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP lt NC gt lt GID gt lt DPC gt lt BCIC gt lt BCID gt lt CIC_MASK gt lt OPTIONS gt lt USER_HOST gt lt USER_ID gt lt OPC gt lt SSF gt lt VARIANT gt lt OPTIONS2 gt Example ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP 0 3 1 1 0Ox7fff7fff 0x0003 0 Oxld 1 0x8 4 0 ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP NCO 0 3 1 1 Ox7fff7fff 0x0003 0 Ox1ld 1 0x8 4 0 Parameters The ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP command includes the foll
238. col license before they can be used 5 3 Detection of Errors in the Configuration File Errors detected at run time in the protocol configuration file config txt are reported as Parse Errors in the alarm listing Further detail on the cause of the error is available on Page 2 of the ALLIP command This includes the line number and optional command type and parameter that are in error as shown in the following example ALLIP PAGE 2 Active Alarm List Page 2 of 2 ID CONFIGURATION ERROR 86 Parse error STN_LINK unknown parameter syntax error 144 Parse error MTP_LINK bad value BLINK 151 Parse error MTP_ROUTE data component exists C7RT 59 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 4 SIU Environment Commands 5 60 The SIU environment commands include e IP_TOKEN IP Token Configuration e SIU_HOSTS SIU Host Settings Configuration e SIU_DUAL Dual SIU Configuration 4 1 1P_TOKEN IP Token Configuration Synopsis Command to create a token IPTOKEN to represent an IP address The token can then be used throughout the configuration file avoiding the need to enter the full IP address in multiple places The command can associate an IPTOKEN with and IPV4 or IPV6 address Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax IP_TOKEN IPTOKEN IPADDR Examples IP_TOKEN IPTOKEN London_ip6 IPADDR f d77 19a9 8cf0 148 215 b2ff fea2 4e2c Parameters This command includes the following parameters e IPTOKEN A token used withi
239. command displays the status of the configured circuit groups Syntax STCGP GID Web Management Location System Administration gt Call gt Circuit Groups gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STCGP STCGP GID 2 299 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format Circuit group status GID GTYPE CICS MAINT CCTACT IDLE 0 S 30 0 0 30 1 S INACTIVE 2 S 15 3 5 7 3 S INACTIVE The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e GTYPE Reserved for future use displays S by default e CICS The number of Circuits assigned to the circuit group If the group was configured but not activated an INACTIVE indication is shown and all other parameters on the row are blank e MAINT The number of circuits that do not have calls in progress and have an active maintenance state and therefore are not available for selection e CCTACT The number of circuits that have calls in progress e IDLE The number of circuits that do not have calls in progress but are available for selection 6 13 3 STCRP SS7 Route Status This command shows the status of all configured SS7 routes Syntax STCRP C7RT Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Routes gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STCRP Output Format C7RT NC DPC C7RT_STATUS CONG_LEVEL LS1_STATUS LS2_STATUS 1 NCO 102
240. command will report whether a license is present whether it is inactive or active whether it is dependent on another license or requires a restart before it can become active The STLCP command also reports the permitted throughput and remaining throughput credit The MMI command MSLCP Software License Capability Measurements provides measurements showing peak and total throughput within a particular time period 48 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 4 6 SNMP The Signaling Server SNMP offerings provides comprehensive support for status and traps using Distributed Structure Management Information DSMI SNMP SNMP operation is disabled by default Activating SNMP SNMP support can be activated for the following e SNMP operation if licensed by setting the CNSNS MMI command s SNMP parameter to DSMI The server should be restarted using the MNRSI command to activate the SNMP agent 4 6 1 DSMI SNMP DSMI SNMP functionality allows the configuration of V1 RFC 1157 V2c RFC 1901 or V3 RFC2571 SNMP traps notifying external SNMP managers of alarm conditions and configuration state changes for the objects supported on the MIB For all objects represented within the DSMI MIB including platform hardware components as well as configuration aspects the MIBs will maintain current object state and alarm conditions affecting the object SNMP traps can be configured to report individual alarms encou
241. ction according to the following table Mode Function 1 Set a fixed pattern specified by lt pattern gt on the output timeslot s 2 Connect the input timeslot to the output timeslot 3 Duplex cross connect the input and output timeslot e TS_ MASK A 32 bit mask specifying the timeslots to apply the cross connect or pattern to Each bit corresponds to a timeslot in the input output stream Bit O the least significant bit corresponds to timeslot number 0 To apply this command to a timeslot the corresponding bit must be set to one e El interfaces have 32 timeslots numbered 0 to 31 Timeslot 0 is used for frame alignment and timeslot 16 is generally used for signaling or is empty Hence the normal SIU configuration is to cross connect timeslots 1 to 15 and 17 to 31 between the two ports on each signaling board by setting the TS_ MASK value to Oxfffefffe e T1 interfaces have 24 timeslots numbered 1 to 24 To cross connect all the timeslots on a T1 interface between the two PCM ports on a signaling board the TS_ MASK value Ox1fffffe should be used In duplex mode both PCM ports should have been previously configured under the same type of PCM connector E1 or T1 e OUTPUT_PATTERN One byte of fixed data to output in pattern mode mode 1 on the output stream timeslot In other modes this parameter should be set to zero 5 5 4 ATM_CELL_STREAM ATM Cell Stream Configuration The ATM_CELL_STREAM command allows the
242. cuit group Parameter Range Hex number between 0 to ff 363 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued UTC_OFFSET The local offset from UTC in Hours and Minutes Hours may be specified in the range 14 to 12 and minutes in either 0 or 30 minute intervals The offset is specified in POSIX style which has positive signs west of Greenwich e g Montreal CANADA 5 00 USA 5 00 UNITED KINGDOM 0 00 GERMANY 1 00 New Delhi INDIA 5 30 Beijing CHINA 8 00 Sydney AUSTRALIA 10 00 VARI ANT ISUP variant If displayed the value in brackets represents the alternative integer value that can be used when entering the ISUP variant during configuration of the circuit group Parameter Range BB 0 Blue Book ISUP ITU92 1 1992 White Book ISUP ANSI 2 ANSI ISUP GERMAN 3 German ISUP UK 4 UK ISUP TTC 5 Japanese TTC ISUP ANSI_RLT 6 ANSI Release Link Trunk ISUP ITU_RLT 7 ITU Release Link Trunk ISUP ANSI_ 95 8 ANSI 95 ISUP ITALIAN 9 Italian ISUP SSURF 10 French SSURF ISUP CHINA 11 Chinese ISUP ITU_2000 12 ISUP 2000 ETSI V4 ISUP BICC 13 The BICC protocol CUSTOM1 254 Custom ISUP Variant 1 CUSTOMZ2 253 Custom ISUP Variant 2 VCI The VCI associated with the link on the cell stream Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 VPI The VPI associated with the link on the cell stream Parameter Ran
243. d 13 7 STDHP Status DTS Host Print As a result of changes to DTS the STDHP command has changed and is now defined as follows Synopsis This command displays the routing availability status of DTS hosts If NC and SSN are blank then the output shows routing availability for all the LSS configured If NC only is supplied then the output shows routing availability for all the LSS associated with the specified NC If NC and SSN are supplied then the output shows routing availability for the specified NC and SSN If the subsystem number is not found in the DTS routing requests but a default routing request for the NC exists the status of hosts associated with the default routing for that NC is displayed with the Routing Method shown as Default rather than Explicit If no DTS routing requests exist for the NC then the status of all DTS hosts is displayed 303 Chapter 6 Management Commands The RT_MATCHED field has three values e Where a match with a default routing request exists it will be Default e Where a match with an explicit NC and SSN routing request exists it will show Explicit e Where no routing request is applicable it will show None for all hosts and host routing selection will be by availability only Syntax STDHP NC STDHP NC SSN amp Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt DTS Hosts gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration R
244. d systems require a declaration of each remote sub system with an SCCP_RSS command It is also possible to configure MTP routes that are designated as default routes Default routes can be used to convey traffic for multiple destinations without the need to configure each Destination Point Code DPC as an explicit MTP route Typically this is useful when a signaling point connects simply to a single STP or a mated pair of STPs and all traffic can be sent to the STP irrespective of current network status Two types of default route are supported e One associated with a real DPC In this case the default route is deemed to be accessible whenever the specified DPC is accessible e One associated with a pseudo DPC which is a point code that does not exist within the network for example zero In this case the default route is deemed to be accessible as soon as the link sets within the route are available A maximum of one default route for each supported Service Indicator or user part is permitted Configuration of default routes utilizes bits 2 3 and 5 in the OPTIONS field of the MTP_ROUTE command For transaction based applications it is also necessary to supply a lt pc_mask gt value with the definition of each SCCP_RSS The PCMASK is used to determine which bits of the target point code the destination point code in the MTP label of the transmit message should be ignored when selecting the route The PCMASK m
245. d messages are assigned a message priority of 3 The two most significant bits D and C are the network indicator Hence valid ANSI ssf values are 0x3 0x7 Oxb and Oxf ANSI operation for the protocol layers above MTP3 is specified using the configuration values specified in the Configuration Section of the appropriate programmer s manual The CIC_MASK parameter in the example User Part circuit group configuration commands ISUP_CFG_CCTGRP define groups containing 30 B channels with timeslot 16 being unavailable for telephony traffic corresponding to a 30B D E1 bearer This would have a CIC pattern mask of Ox7fff7fff T1 bearers provide 24 channels hence for a 23B D T1 span with timeslot 24 used for the D channel SS7 operation the CIC pattern mask should be modified to Ox 7fffff The TS parameter in the example cross connect command applies to an E1 32 timeslot PCM connection This should be modified to reference 24 timeslots for a T1 configuration Hence to apply a cross connect to timeslots 1 to 23 leaving timeslot 24 for SS7 the mask should be set to Ox1fffffe Additional information for the protocol configuration commands and parameters may be found in the previous sections 385 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines 7 7 Specifying Default Routes For telephony operation the Signaling Server requires an MTP_ROUTE definition for each signaling point that the local point code s communicate with In addition transaction base
246. d12 Reserved13 Reserved14 Reserved HLRTON HLR Type Of Number Parameter Range Unknown International National NetworkSpecific Subscriber Alphanumeric AbbreviatedNumber Reserved HOST IP host Parameter Range NONE command specific or Case sensitive string of length 1 to 47 Must not contain any spaces HOST IP host NONE or case sensitive string length of 0 to 47 Must not contain any spaces HOSTID Logical ID of an SIU host Parameter Range Number between 0 to 127 HOSTS When Hosts is set the SIU does requires SIU hosts to operate Hosts may be disabled when the SIU is acting as a router than does not require management or application hosts 332 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued HTTPPORT The TCP Port used for HTTP Set to 0 to disable access via HTTP Valid Range 0 65 535 excluding 21 22 8100 8103 9000 9128 the value identified by HTTPSPORT or the HTTPPORT value of another Web Server Parameter Range Null or Number between 0 to 65535 HTTPSCERT Identify the certificate to use for the SERVICE Parameter Range NONE The certificate for the service will be removed SELF A new self signed certificate will be generated and installed FILE The corresponding certificate will be used HTTPSPORT The TCP Port used for HTTPS Set to 0 to disable access via HTTPS Valid Range 0 65 535 excluding 21 22 810
247. ded IDLG Number of incoming dialogues started for this host ODLG Number of outgoing dialogues started from this host IBILL Number of incoming dialogue started for this host using Billing ID based routing PERIOD The measurement period in hours minutes and seconds 6 11 7 MSFEP Flow Environment Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for the flow environment Syntax MSFEP Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Flow Environment gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSFEP Output Format Flow Environment Measurements TTOTAL TRANS TFAIL TPFAIL TDROP D O FOS O OD 272 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 TSHUT 0 TNOFLOW 0 TTOUT 0 TCONGC 0 PERIOD 2 PT E2 3232 6 11 8 MSHLP Host Link Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for links to Application Hosts When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSHLP RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Hosts gt Hosts gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSHLP MSHLP RESET yY Output Format Host SIU Link Measurements HOSTID RXMSG TXMSG RXOCT TXOCT OOSDUR NOOS NDISCARD PERIOD 1 1 43E6 1 45E6 5 48E6 5 35E6 62 1 0 00 14 55 2 1 64E6 1 65E6 8 21E6 8 12E6 99 1 0 00
248. des are selected Bit 21 is used to activate J apan specific MTP3 operation When set to 0 normal setting J apan specific functionality is disabled When set to 1 Japan specific functionality is enabled Bit 22 the handling of received Route Set Test Messages It should only be set if bit 17 is also set Normal operation Route Set Test messages processed by MTP3 When set to 1 messages are sent to fixed module_id 0x0a on the host Note For correct J apan specific operation you should also select 16 bit point codes by setting bit 20 as well as bit 21 All other bits are reserved and should be set to zero Note For correct ANSI operation bits 8 9 10 11 and 18 must be set to 1 This gives a typical lt options gt field value of 0x00040f00 for ANSI configurations Note When a Message Router Origin for a particular Network Context is configured in the NETWORK domain Bits 0 Bit 17 and Bit 22 of the options parameter will automatically be set in the MTP_CONFIG command for the particular Network Context These bits control how received Route Set Test Transfer Controlled and Signaling Route Set Congestion Messages that are not destined for the MTP local point code are processed and are set to allow the Message Router to correctly process these messages for the domains and Network Contexts under its control Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 6 2 MTP_LINKSET MTP Link Set Synopsis T
249. e 11 3 Access Control and Security 3 1 Concepts The Dialogic SS7G41 Signaling Server incorporates a number of features relating to secure access and administration of the equipment which are introduced in the following sections e System Policy e Access Control e IP Security 3 2 System Policy The system policy defines the level of security enforced for a various aspects of the Signaling server covering SSH FTP SFTP Browser based management access Web Services and Passwords 3 3 Access Control The Signaling Server supports the addition and removal of specific user accounts All Management Logins require a password to be entered Individual accounts can be granted specific access rights for Web Telnet and FTP access allowing for example a particular user to be granted only read access while another user is granted full administrative access Passwords for individual user account can be time limited and after expiry users will be required to specify a new password before being granted access to system management 3 4 Access Rights A user who has administrative privileges will be able to add or delete user accounts as well as assign access privileges for FTP MMI and SWS access Access rights are grouped into three categories Interface Rights Management Rights and Characteristics e Interface Rights CLI Telnet Serial support mmi management access Note If CLI access is granted for a user they do not need to ent
250. e M2PA link and two SS7 links cannot be associated with the same M2PA link The following commands demonstrate M2PA and SS7 link configuration STN_LINK SNLINK 1 SNTYPE M2 PA RIP1 192 168 1 2 L1IP1 192 168 1 1 END C LPORT 3565 RPORT 3565 M2PAID 1 MTP_LINK LINK 1 IFTYPE M2 PA LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BLINK 1 OPTIONS 0x00000006 The SS7 link is associated with an M2PA link IFTYPE is set to M2PA The BLINK parameter identifies the M2PA link SNLINK 7 10 4 Configuration Examples Example configuration of SS7 links conveyed over M2PA Signaling Server Host Configuration Change SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS BACKUP_HOST OPTIONS MIN_HOSTS DMHOST SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 1 BACKUP_HOST NONE OPTIONS 0 MIN_HOSTS 1 DMHOST 0 SIGTRAN Link Configuration STN_LINK SNLINK SNTYPE M2PA RIP1 RIP2 LIP1 LIP2 END S LPORT 3565 RPORT 3565 OPTIONS 0 M2PATID LABEL STN_LINK SNLINK 1 SNTYPE M2 PA RIP1 192 168 1 2 LIP1 192 168 1 1 END C LPORT 3565 RPORT 3565 M2PAID 1 STN_LINK SNLINK 2 SNTYPE M2PA RIP1 192 168 1 2 LIP1 192 168 1 1 END C LPORT 3566 RPORT 3566 M2PAID 2 STN_LINK SNLINK 99 SNTYPE M2PA RIP1 192 168 1 2 LIP1 192 168 1 1 END C LPORT 3567 RPORT 3567 M2PAID 99 MTP3 Options Configuration MTP_CONFIG NC NC0O OPTIONS 0 TP_CONFIG FZ F HD SS7 Link Set Configuration MTP_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET OPC APC NLINKS 2 SSF 0x8 OP
251. e MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 6 11 31 MSUPP MAP USSD Measurements Command to display traffic measurements associated with MAP USSD Services Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP service When a profile is specified Page 2 measurements are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSUPP RESET PAGE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt USSD gt USSD gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSUPP MSUPP PAGE 2 MSUPP PROFILE 2 MSUPP RESET Y 296 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format MAP USSD Measurements Page 1 or 2 MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD USSD Mobile _Init_Sessions 55 4 01 00 00 USSD_App_Init_Sessions 44 1 01 00 00 USSD_Notify_ Request 54345 0 01 00 00 MAP USSD Measurements Page 2 or 2 PROFILE MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 USSD Mobile _Init_Sessions 55 4 01 00 00 0 USSD App _Init_
252. e NP and ES four bits each in the second octet and the NAI in the third octet Other values are undefined spares or reserved Bit 2 SSN Indicator A 1 indicates that SubSystem Number is used in addressing Bit 1 PC Indicator A 1 indicates that Point Code is used in addressing 124 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 For ANSI the parameter is defined as Bit 8 Designated for national use 0 indicates that the address is international and 1 indicates that the address is national Bit 7 Routing indicator 0 Route on GT 1 Route on DPC and SSN Bits 6 3 Global title indicator the value in these bits indicates what data precedes address information in the global title so in the context of the SCCP_GTT_PATTERN statement which octets are expected in the lt global_title gt parameter Defined values are 0000 No Global title In this case the lt global_title gt parameter value should be O zero base10 without Ox prefix 0001 Global title includes TT Numbering Plan NP and Encoding Scheme ES The lt global_title gt parameter should be two hexadecimal octets prefix 0x followed by four hexadecimal digits the TT in the first octet the NP and ES four bits each in the second octet 0010 Global title includes Translation Type TT only The lt global_title gt parameter should be a single hexadecimal octet the octet value being the
253. e config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNPCE PORTID 1 6 3 53 CNPCI PCM Initiate This command adds a new PCM Note PCMs are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNPCI PORTI D Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt PCMs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The PCM Port has not been initiated The PCM Port is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The PCM is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNPCI PORTI D 1 6 3 54 CNPCP PCM Configuration This command displays all configured PCM ports Syntax CNPCP 190 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt PCMs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNPCP Output Format PCM Configuration PORTID PCM LIUTYPE LC FF CRC_MODE SYNCPRI BUILDOUT SLAVE OPTIONS LABEL 0 1 3 E1 HDB3 G704 NONE 0 0 0 0x0000 1 1 4 El HDB3 G704 NONE 0 0 0 0x0000 See e
254. e entry of a user name and password Also only allow operation over HTTPS XCON_ MODE Cross connect mode Parameter Range PATTERN 1 Set a fixed pattern specified by OUTPUT_ PATTERN on the output timeslot s SIMPLEX 2 Connect the input timeslot to the output timeslot DUPLEX 3 Duplex cross connect the input and output timeslot 365 Chapter 6 Management Commands 366 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 7 Configuration Guidelines 7 1 Overview Configuration guidelines are provided for the following e IP Port Bonding e Sharing Licensed Throughput Between Protocols and Networks e Configuring Multiple Network Contexts e Configuring an ANSI System e Specifying Default Routes e Dynamic Host Activation e Dynamic Configuration e SIGTRAN M2PA Signaling e Simultaneous MAP INAP IS41 Operations e GTT Configuration e HSL Signaling e Monitoring 7 2 IP Port Bonding The Signaling Server allows you to configure a resilient IP connection across an IP port bonding team of two ports in an active standby configuration On the Dialogic DSI SS7G41 Signaling Servers up to two port bonding teams may be created using the four Ethernet ports on the SIU described in IPNII IP Network Interface Initiate and IPNIC IP Network Interface Change If the system detects that a port has failed it passes the MAC and Layer 3 address
255. e g TCAP is present but SCCP is not e CONGESTED The throughput congestion level has been reached for the capability e ENFORCE The licensed traffic rate has been exceeded for a extended period and the system is now limiting traffic to the licensed rate for the capability Note If the status is preceded with a the license is not present but as the system is currently operating without a license the functionality is available to the user After one hour the system will restart and this functionality will again be deactivated as it is not licensed e LINKS The available number of links for the capability Blank means not applicable For TDM the available links may be less than the licensed number of links if the share is being split with SIGTRAN e The share is controlled using the TDM share parameter on the system configuration command e RATE The available throughput rate in Kilobyte s for the capability Blank means not applicable The available throughput may be less than the licensed number if its share is being split with TDM or between M2PA and M3UA This share is controlled using the TDM and M3UA share parameters e CREDIT The current throughput account credit if applicable The throughput account credit is expressed as a percentage of the maximum account credit 6 13 13 STMLP SS7 Monitor Link Status This command displays the status of configured SS7 Monitor links If the LINK parameter is specified the stat
256. e output format 6 3 62 CNSBE SIGTRAN Local Bind End This command removes a SIGTRAN Bind Note SIGTRAN binds are dynamically removed by first deleting the SIGTRAN bind from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the SIGTRAN bind from the system Syntax CNSBE BIND Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Local Binds gt Configuration 195 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN Bind has been initiated The SIGTRAN Bind is not present in the config txt file The SIGTRAN Bind is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN Bind is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNSBE BIND 1 6 3 63 CNSBI SIGTRAN Local Bind I nitiate This command adds a new SIGTRAN Bind Note SIGTRAN binds are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNSBI BIND Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Local Binds gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configura
257. e signaling server that are available to build SS7 solutions and reach the five nines requirements of telco grade service platforms It describes the architecture of the Signaling server reviews potential points of failure of an SS7 system based on the Signaling server and explains methods to mitigate each of them This chapter explains the configuration and run time operation considerations of a dual resilient Signaling server based system 375 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines There are several well known methods of achieving this type of reaction to partial failure in the signaling component of communications networks including Multiple signaling paths SS7 links and link sets to each end point Distribution of these paths through independent interfaces and cabling Distribution of the processing of SS7 terminations at a single signaling point between multiple signaling boards in a single Signaling server Physical isolation and duplication of the SS7 interface for a single signaling point on independent protocol engines sharing a single point code Splitting the functionality of the application layer between multiple application servers The first method can be achieved by implementing multiple links 64 Kbps or 56 Kbps channels between two adjacent inter communicating points By definition these links will be in the same link set The last two can be accomplished by using two independent but co operating signaling servers relaying
258. e that ISUP uses when exchanging messages with the MTP This must always be set so that the Network Indicator bits the two most significant bits of the 4 bit ssf value match those set in the MTP_LINKSET command USER_ID The unique module identifier module_id of the application running on the host that uses the ISUP module The ISUP module sends all receive indications to this module ID This must be in the range 0x0d Ox1d Ox2d to Oxfd where Oxnd is defined as APPn_TASK_ID e OPTIONS A 16 bit value that contains run time options for the operation of the ISUP protocol Bit 0 should always be set to 0 Bit 15 For the purposes of the measurement MMI command MSCGP when not set the point of a call being answered is determined by generation or reception of either an Answer message or a Connect message When set the answer point is considered to occur when an address complete is generated or received Setting the bit is more useful for certain types of application which use the time between Address Complete and Answer to play tones or announcements The remaining bits are as defined for the options parameter defined in the Configure Request section of the ISUP Programmer s Manual NUM_GRPS Specifies the number of circuit groups to be used by ISUP This parameter may be in the range 1 to 2 048 If this parameter is not specified the Signaling Server allows 8 circuit groups e NUM_CCTS Specifies the number of
259. ead Access Example STDHP Output Format DTS Host Status NC SSN DRID HOSTID RT_MATCHED HOST_SELECTION STATUS NCO 0 1 Default Strict ACTIVE NCO 4 0 1 Default Strict ACTIVE NCO 5 1 2 Explicit Strict SHUTDOWN PREPARE NCO 8 2 0 Explicit Strict ACTIVE NC1 0 None Strict ACTIVE NC1 1 None Strict ACTIVE NC1 2 None Strict SHUTDOWN PREPARE NC1 5 0 None Strict ACTIVE NC1 5 1 None Strict ACTIVE NC1 5 2 None Strict SHUTDOWN PREPARE 6 13 8 STFEP Flow Environment Status This command requests the status of the Flow Environment Syntax STFEP Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Flow Environment gt Status Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STFEP 304 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format Flow Environment Status QCUR 4343 QMAX 4000 6 13 9 STHPP Diameter Peer Status This command requests the status of Diameter peers Syntax STHPP HDPR Web Management Location System Administration gt Diameter gt Peer gt Status Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STHPP STHPP HDPR 0O Output Format Diameter Peer Status HDPR RSP STATUS TINSTATE TACTIVE 1 AVAILABLE 01 17 45 01 17 45 6 13 10 STHLP Host Link Status This command displays the status of all configured Host Links Syntax STHLP Web Management Location
260. easurements page 2 of 3 LINK ALIGN SUERR TBUSY TCONG TXDISCARD NEVENT PERIOD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 12 00 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 12 00 SS7 link measurements page 3 of 3 LINK NR5M NR1H NR1D OR5M OR1H OR1D NT5M NT1H NT1D OT5M OT1H OT1D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows LINK SS7 signaling link OOSDUR duration that the link was not in service RXNACK number of negative acknowledgements received Not applicable for IP based SS7 links RXMSU number of message signaling units octets received RXOCT number of signaling Information Field SIF and Service Information Octet SIO octets received TXMSU number of message signaling units octets transmitted TXOCT number of SIF and SIO octets transmitted RTXOCT octets retransmitted NCONG congestion counter PERIOD time since measurements on the link were last reset ALIGN number of failed signaling link alignment attempts SUERR number of signal units in error TBUSY duration of local busy condition TCONG duration of Link congestion TXDISCARD number of MSUs discarded due to congestion NEVEN number of congestion events leading to MSU discard NR5M peak rate of MSUs received during the last 5 minutes msu s NR1H peak rate of MSUs received during the last hour msu s NR1D peak rate of MSUs received during the last day msu s OR5M percentage 5 mins peak link rece
261. ect to the Signaling Server without using a password For security reasons this is recommended where the connection is made using a script This process requires an RSA or DSA key pair generated for each Host Refer to the documentation for the SSH package for more information e Using Secure FTP to connect to the Signaling Server e If the ssh directory does not exist in the user directory create one e Create a text file and add the Public Key for each Host on a new line e Upload the file to ssh authorized_keys oe the permissions on the ssh directory and its parent directory ftpuser are set to Ensure the permissions on ssh authorized_keys are set to 640 It is recommended that the first connection using the Public Key Authentication method be made manually When using SSH or Secure FTP to connect to the Signaling Server specifying the Private Key will allow you to log in as without using the password Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 3 5 5 SSH Tunneling for RSI When operating in SIU mode to protect RSI traffic between the SIU and SIU Host the SIU Host may be configured to use an SSH tunnel to transport the RSI traffic to the SIU The configuration of the SSH Client on each SIU Host depends on the SSH package used The following instructions show a suggested configuration method for both Linux and Windows operating systems For both systems it is recommended that the first con
262. ecurity for more information on the management of user accounts A user opening a telnet session to the MML interface is therefore prompted to enter the siguser password for example SS7G41 SIU logged on at 2011 07 06 12 32 01 user sSiguser password x Telnet print commands output a number of lines of text before prompting a user to Press return to continue or Ctrl X to cancel The number of lines of output can be specified on the CNSYS command using the LINES parameter When LINES is set to 0 this paging mechanism is disabled Telnet sessions timeout and logoff after a period of inactivity by default 30 minutes This timeout period can be changes by using the TLO parameter on the CNSYS MMI command 23 Chapter 2 Licensing Installation and Initial Configuration 2 24 2 3 Initial I P Configuration Once connected to the Signaling Server via VT100 or telnet a user can then proceed to set the IP configuration of the Signaling Servers The IP address and subnet mask are set by entering the IPNIC system configuration command For example to set the IP address to 192 168 0 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 enter the following command IPNIC NETIF ETHO IPAADDR 192 168 0 1 24 The management interface also allows an IP gateway address to be specified using the GATEWAY parameter in the IPGWx command For example to configure a default gateway with address to 192 168 0 255 the following c
263. ed for 24 bit point codes ISUP will set the SLS to the 8 least significant bits of the CIC otherwise it will set the SLS to 5 bits Circuit Group configuration is viewed using the CNCGP MMI command and its status and measurements read using the STCGP an MSCGP MMI commands After startup additional Groups can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNCGI command Groups are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNCGE MMI command 5 9 3 ISUP_TI MER I SUP Timer Configuration Synopsis The ISUP_TIMER command provides the ability to configure the ISUP protocol timers from the config txt file Applicability SIU Syntax ISUP_TIMER lt TIMTAB gt lt TIMID gt lt TVAL gt Example ISUP_TIMER 0 t4 550 114 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Parameters The ISUP_TIMER command includes the following parameters TIMTAB Set to 0 to configure ISUP timers Set to 1 to configure BICC timers All other values are reserved for future use TIMID The text identifier for the timer to be configured It should be set to one of the following values T1 T2 T3 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 T17 T18 T19 T20 T21 T22 T23 T24 T25 T26 T27 T28 T29 T30 T33 T34 T35 T36 T38 T103 or T104 TVAL The timer value in seconds except T29 and T30 that are in multiples of tenths of a second 100m
264. ed for segmentation Support for sif values above 272 is application dependant and depends on the maximum size a receiving switch can process Parameter Range Number from 272 to 4200 MGA Whether Y or not N the user has administrative management access to add remove users MGMT Management web interface availability Set to Y to enable Management web interface on a particular IP address Set to N to disable Management web interface on a particular IP address MGP Whether Y or not N the user has policy access to set system policy MGR Whether Y or not N the user has access to read configuration status and measurements MGS Whether Y or not N the user has access permission to modify security settings such as the system firewall 341 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued MGW Whether Y or not N the user has access permission to Change Add Delete configuration MGX Whether Y or not N the user has access permission to perform maintenance actions activate deactivate restart MHOST A indicates that a host is acting as a management host MIN_HOSTS The minimum number of hosts required before Network Side SIGTRAN or TDM links enter service MINOR The number of minor alarms MLINK SS7 Monitor link identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 MMASK Management Mask Trace Mask for management messages generated by a protocol module Parameter
265. eereres 80 5 6 6 MTP3_TIMER MTP3 Timer Configuration sssssssssssrrerrrrrrrrerrrrrrrerrerrereereere 81 5 6 7 QSAAL TIMER QSAAL Timer Configuration s sssssssssssssrssrrrsrererrrrrnrerrnrrn 83 5 6 8 MTP_USER_PART MTP User Part cccccceeeee eee e eee eee eee teeta teen ene nae 84 5 6 9 MONITOR_LINK Monitor Link ccc eect eee eee rete teeta near nae 85 5 7 SIGTRAN Configuration COMMANAS cece eter ee ene nett 89 5 7 1 STN CONFIG SIGTRAN Configuration cceeeecete treet rere renee en neater 89 5 7 2 STN_LAS SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration eeee 90 5 7 3 STN_LINK SIGTRAN Link Configuration cies ee rere tener ener tates 92 5 7 4 STN_RAS SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration essees 94 5 7 5 STN_RASLIST SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Configuration 96 5 7 6 STN ROUTE SIGTRAN Route Configuration ccececeeeeeeee eee ee eee ee eee es 96 5 7 7 STN_RSGLIST SIGTRAN Route Signaling Gateway List Configuration 98 5 7 8 STN_LBIND SIGTRAN Local Bind Configuration cceeeeeeee neste teen eens 99 5 7 9 SCTP_TIMER SCTP Timer Configuration cciccceceeeeeeeee ee ee neta eaten eaten 100 5 7 10 M2PA_TIMER M2PA Timer Configuration cccccceceeee tees eerste eea tata ea eaees 101 5 7 11 M3UA_TIMER M3UA Timer Configuration cccecceeee eee ee nent teen ta ea ea eeees 102 5 8
266. emoved from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNRAE MMI command 7 6 STN_ ROUTE SIGTRAN Route Configuration Synopsis This command is used to configure a SIGTRAN route to a remote SS7 destination Applicability SIU SWS DSH Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Syntax STN_ROUTE NC NC0 SNRT DPC OPTIONS 0 LABEL Examples N_ROUTE SNRT DPC 100 N_ROUTE NC NCO SNRT 2 DPC 200 m i Parameters The STN_ROUTE command has the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context together with the Destination Point Code DPC uniquely identify an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 The parameter is only applicable for M3UA operation SNRT Logical reference for a SIGTRAN Route The valid range is 0 4095 DPC Specifies an Destination Point Code DPC value for the Remote Application Server Only one Remote Application Server SIGTRAN Route or C7 Route can be configured with a particular DPC within a network context e OPTIONS This is a 16 bit value used to specify run time options Bit Description 0 Route is assumed to be available 1 Route will loadshare between all Signaling Gateways in the route 2 The route will be designated to be the a default Route for the Network Context The default
267. en the ITU Q 713 and ANSI T1 112 specifications For ITU the parameter is defined as Bit 8 Reserved for national use Bit 7 Routing indicator 0 Route on GT 1 Route on SSN Bits 6 3 Global title indicator the value in these bits indicates what data precedes address information in the global title so in the context of the SCCP_GTT_PATTERN statement which octets are expected in the lt global_title gt parameter Defined values are 0000 No Global title In this case the lt global_title gt parameter value should be O zero base10 without Ox prefix 0001 Global title includes Nature of Address Indicator NAI only The lt global_title gt parameter see below should be a single hexadecimal octet prefix 0x followed by two hexadecimal digits the octet value being the NAI 0010 Global title includes Translation Type TT only The lt global_title gt parameter should be a single hexadecimal octet the octet value being the TT 0011 Global title includes TT Numbering Plan NP and Encoding Scheme ES The lt global_title gt parameter should be two hexadecimal octets prefix 0x followed by four hexadecimal digits the TT in the first octet the NP and ES four bits each in the second octet 0100 Global title includes TT NP ES and NAI The lt global_title gt parameter should be three hexadecimal octets prefix 0x followed by six hexadecimal digits the TT in the first octet th
268. er Account Configuration USER PASSWORD CONFIRM ACCESS admin KKKKKKKK kkkkkkkxk policy ftpuser kkkkkxkk kxk kkkkkkkxk ftponly john TOOK GORI operator 6 1 9 ACUPC Account Control User Profile Change This command changes the configuration of a user profile Syntax ACUPC ACCESS CLI FTP MWS WSS MGR MGW MGX MGA MGS MGP EXP Applicability DSH Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Profile gt ConfigurationOperating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Policy Management Access Example ACUPC ACCESS admin MGW yY 6 1 10 ACUPE Account Control User Profile End This command deletes a user profile Syntax ACUPE ACCESS Applicability DSH Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Profile gt ConfigurationApplicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Policy Management Access 147 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example ACUPE ACCESS admin 6 1 11 ACUPI Account Control User Profile I nitiate This command adds a user profile Syntax ACUPI ACCESS CLI FTP MWS WSS MGR MGW MGX MGA MGS MGP EXP Applicability DSH Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Profile gt ConfigurationApplicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Policy Management Access Example ACUPI ACCESS admin CLI
269. er a password for serial access ossh ftp The ability to log on and read diagnostics as well as upload files via ftp sftp Support the ability to telnet in over ssh for mmi management access Note telnet ssh operation can only be made mandatory if the Signaling Server is run in secure mode 29 Chapter 3 Access Control and Security Management Web Server The ability to access mmi sws management using Web Management Server Note Password access via the management server can only be made mandatory if the Web Server is run in secure mode Web Services API Web Server The ability to use Web Services Note Password access via the Web Services API server can only be made mandatory if the Web Server is run in secure mode e Management Rights The ability to view files in the ftpuser account using the Web Management Interface The ability to read mmi sws configuration status and measurements The ability to change add delete mmi sws configuration The ability to perform mmi maintenance actions block unblock reset Account management access to add remove users and set system time System policy access This access right allows the user to define the security policy for the server e g allow weak password mandate password expiry mandate password expiry length ftp server and mmi secure access etc e Characteristics Password can be set expire 3 4 1 User Accoun
270. erators Manual Issue 11 MGX The ability to perform mmi maintenance actions block unblock reset MGA Administrative access to add remove users and set system time MGP System policy access This access right allows the user to define the security policy for the server e g allow weak password mandate password expiry mandate password expiry length ftp server and mmi secure access etc EXP Whether the password in the account should expire For each profile it is possible to control management privileges for specific categories of system administration and configuration Category Configuration Read Configuration Update System Maintenance System Security System Administration Policy Management 3 5 Security 3 5 1 HTTP Access HTTP access can be restricted to secure HTTPS access only for both the browser based management interface and for web services access in SWS mode For HTTPS access an SSL certificate is required Supported SSL certificates for HTTPS are OpenSSL PEM files without a passphrase To load a certificate the certificate file should be named either MGMT PEM or WSAPI PEM and uploaded to the ftp account This certificate will be installed and used when the system is restarted The file will be removed from ftp account once installed Certificates may also be loaded via portable media USB 3 5 2 Firewall The Signaling Server incorpor
271. ervice When a profile is specified Page 2 measurements are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSRTP RESET PAGE PROFI LE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt Ready for SM gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access 291 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example MSRTP MSRTP PAGE 2 MSRTP PROFILE 2 MSRTP RESET VY Output Format MAP Ready for SM Measurements Page 1 or 2 MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD Ready_for_SM 3434 0 01 00 00 MAP Ready for SM Measurements Page 2 or 2 PROFILE MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 Ready_for_SM 3434 0 01 00 00 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with the MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 6 11 28 MSSPP MAP Subscriber Profiling Measurements Command to display traffic measurements associated with MAP Subscriber Profiling Services Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP se
272. es not include any commands but provides guidelines on how to edit the file for a real configuration Syntax CNRDI Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Example CNRDI 6 3 59 CNRLE SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List End This command removes an SIGTRAN Remote Application Server list entry RLID Note SIGTRAN RLIDs are dynamically removed by first deleting the SIGTRAN RLID from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the SIGTRAN RLID from the system Syntax CNRLE RLI D 193 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Server Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN RLID has been initiated The SIGTRAN RLID is not present in the config txt file The SIGTRAN RLID is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN RLID is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNRLE RLI D 1 6 3 60 CNRLI SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List I nitiate This command adds a new SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List ent
273. et 0010 Global title includes Translation Type TT only The lt global_title gt parameter should be a single hexadecimal octet the octet value being the TT 122 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Other values are undefined spares or reserved Bit 2 PC Indicator A 1 indicates that Point Code is used in addressing Bit1 SSN Indicator A 1 indicates that SubSystem Number is used in addressing e GTT_SPC The point code This is ignored if bit 0 of lt addr_indicator gt is not set e SSN The subsystem number This is ignored if bit 1 of lt addr_indicator gt is not set e GT The global title excluding the global title address information specified as a string of hexadecimal octets starting with Ox except when the lt addr_indicator gt indicates that no GT is present when a value of 0 zero should be used e GTAI_REPLACEMENT The global title address information to translate to specified as a string of hexadecimal digits digit Oxe is reserved in left to right order i e the pairs of digits are not swapped as would be the case for a BCD string In addition to hexadecimal digits this string can contain the following characters Character Function Padding ignored Separator used to split the pattern into sections Each section can be processed differently as specified by the lt mask gt parameter in the SCP_GTT command Global
274. etween 0 to 4095 The probable cause of the alarm based on the principles of ITU Recommendations M 3100 X 733 and X 736 and GSM 12 10 ETS 300 618 323 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued CELLSTR An ATM Cell Stream identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 7 CFGTYPE Configuration type Parameter Range DEFAULT LOOPBACK CIC_MASK Each circuit group may contain up to 32 circuits The CIC Mask identifies the circuits allocated to the circuit group The least significant bit bit 0 corresponds to the first CIC and must always be set Bit n in the corresponds to circuit identification code n and circuit identifier n If the bit is not set then this CIC and CID can instead be allocated to a different circuit group Parameter Range Hex number between 0 to ffffffff CLA Alarm class When present the value in brackets represents the equivalent ITU T severity level state Parameter Range MNR 5 Minor alarm MAJ 4 Major alarm CRT 3 Critical alarm CLEARED The date and time the alarm cleared CLI Whether Y or not N the user has MML command line interface access CMD MMI command name Parameter Range Case sensitive string of length 5 to 5 Must not contain any spaces CODE Numeric identifier of the alarm code CONFIGURATION A description of a configuration error occurring on startup ERROR CONFIRM Confirmation of
275. etwork zero prevents the UPU from being issued This bit is normally set to zero Bit 6 controls the operation of the Signaling Route Set Test mechanism Normally when a remote signaling point becomes unavailable a periodic Signaling Route Set Test message is issued in order to ensure that subsequent availability of the signaling point is detected Setting this bit to 1 disables the sending of this message This bit is normally set to zero Bit 8 selects between ITU T CCITT and ANSI operation If set to 1 the MTP operates in accordance with ANSI T1 111 if set to 0 the MTP operates in accordance with the ITU T CCITT Q 700 series recommendations Bit 9 selects between 14 16 bit point codes and 24 bit point codes _ When set to 0 14 bit or 16 bit point codes are selected see also Bit 20 When set to 1 24 bit point codes are selected Note Bit 9 must always be set to 1 for ANSI operation Bit 10 is used to enable multiple congestion states Note Bit 10 must always be set to 1 for ANSI operation Bit 11 is used to enable Multiple Message Priority operation 71 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 72 Note Bit 11 must always be set to 1 for ANSI operation Bit 16 is used to control the usage of the hdr gt id field of MTP Transfer Indication messages When set to 0 the id field contains the User Part Reference or Service Indicator this is primarily useful for backward compatibility When set
276. etwork_context parameter that should be used to indicate the network and hence the local point code that a specified sub system is part of If this parameter is not specified the default Network Context NCO is assumed To route messages to the correct SCCP instance you must specify the DTC option DTC_ROUTE_MSG_VIA_DTS This option is set via bit 0 in the options field of the DTC_MSG_ CONFIG 0x776c configuration message 7 4 9 2 Configuration There are no DTS specific Network Context configuration commands 7 4 10 TCAP 7 4 10 1 Applications Where a dialog is initiated remotely no change is required since TCAP automatically determines which Network Context is appropriate Where the dialog is initiated locally the application must specify the Network Context to which the message is destined This effectively indicates the point code to be used as the originating point code The Network Context should be indicated in the first message for the dialog being used In the case of TCAP this is in the first TCAP service request typically an Invoke Req using the TCPPN_NC parameter If a Network Context is not specified the default Network Context NCO is assumed 7 4 10 2 Configuration The TCAP_CONFIG config txt command described in Section 5 13 1 TCAP_CONFIG TCAP Configuration on page 133 can be used to configure the default Network Context for the first network The TCAP_CONFIG command is only required to alter the TCAP spe
277. ew of the command history The text format log files include all MMI commands responses and events Log files are created in the syslog sub directory of the siuftp account The most recent file is called mmi log and older files are called mmi log 1 mmi log 2 and so on up until mmi log 9 The capacity of each file is limited to prevent disk overflow Each entry in the file includes the date and time of the event For security the text value of the PASSWORD and CONFIRM parameters are replaced by the string 4 4 Alarm Listing 40 The system maintains a record of active alarms and a log of historic alarm events Alarm information can be accessed in several ways including e Display to screen e Access using SNMP either on request or through trap notifications e Export of a CSV formatted text file The list of currently active alarms is accessed using the ALLIP Alarm List Print command The ALLOP Alarm Log Print command is similar to the ALLIP command except that it reports the previous 1 000 alarm events and details the time the alarm cleared Alarm events are also archived to the text file alarm log in the syslog alarms sub directory of the ftp account Each of the following alarm log fields described below are supported e Header e NODE this user configurable field provides a short form identity of the unit This identity is displayed in the browser interface on the MMI interface at login and included on a pe
278. ext to which subsystem belongs SSR Type of SSR Types are LSS RSS RSP e SSN The SubSystem Number of the subsystem e SSR_STATUS The current state of the subsystem as returned by SCCP Possible values are ALLOWED The subsystem is available PROHIBITED The subsystem is not available 314 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 13 21 STSTP SIGTRAN Signaling Link Status Command to display the status of SIGTRAN links Page 1 displays the status of the association while page 2 displays the individual status of each path in the association Syntax STSTP SNLINK J SNTYPE PAGE Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Links gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STSTP Output Format SIGTRAN Signaling Link Status Page 1 of 2 SNLINK SNTYPE RSP_STATUS SCTP_STATUS 1 M3UA AVAILABLE ESTABLISHED SIGTRAN Signaling Link Status Page 2 of 2 SNLINK PATH_STATUS RTO CWND SRTT PMTU REMOTE_IPADDR 1 ACTIVE 200 6000 3 1500 172 28 148 244 1 INACTIVE 173 28 148 244 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows SNLINK the SIGTRAN link identifier SNTYPE the type of link M2PA M3UA RSP_STATUS Status of the M3UA remote signaling process or blank for M2PA SCTP_STATUS SCTP association status PATH_STATUS Primary Active Inactive Invalid or Unconfirmed RTO the SCTP
279. f the SNMP agent The DFLT_ENGINE identifier shown is the default SNMP V3 ENGINE identifier for use with SNMP V3 traps If an SNMP manager is not configured on the system with an explicit ENGINE identifier then this identifier will be used when sending SNMP V3 traps The DSMIEVENT identifier determines the type of SNMP notifications that are sent by the system Syntax CNSNP Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNSNP 202 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format SNMP Configuration SNMP Y RCOM public DFLT ENGINE 80001 8880e313894fdcdecb520000 DSMIEVENT OBJECT 6 3 73 CNSNS Configuration SNMP Set This command allows the configuration of the SNMP agent to be modified For the SNMP parameter to take effect a system restart is required Syntax CNSNS SNMP CNSNS RCOM Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Example CNSNS SNMP Y N CNSNS RCOM public CNSNS DSMIEVENT OB ECT 6 3 74 CNSRE SIGTRAN Route End This command removes an SIGTRAN route Note SIGTRAN routes are dynamically removed by first deleting the route from the config txt file and then execut
280. figuration errors present The SS7 Monitor Link is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNMLE MLINK 1 6 3 46 CNMLI SS7 Monitor Link Initiate This command adds a new SS7 Monitor Link Note SS7 Monitor Links are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNMLI MLINK Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Monitor Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SS7 Monitor Link has not been initiated The SS7 Monitor Link is present in the config txt file The SS7 Monitor Link is not used in any other configuration There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SS7 Monitor Link is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log 185 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example CNMLI MLINK 1 6 3 47 CNMLP SS7 Monitor link Configuration This command displays the configuration data for Monitor links Syntax CNMLP MLINK Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Monitor Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNMLP Output Fo
281. g Key dropped DROPOCT Number of octets Messages that match the Routing Key dropped BAKMSU Messages that match the Routing Key passed to the partner Server BAKOCT Number of octets Messages that match the Routing Key passed to the partner Server TXMSU Messages that match the Routing Key transmitted to the destination TXOCT Number of octets for Messages that match the Routing Key transmitted to the destination PERIOD Measurement collection period 11 18 MSRLP Remote Server Link Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for links to a remote Signaling Server When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSRLP RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Dual Operation gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSRLP MSRLP RESET Y 281 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format Remote SIU Link Measurements LINKID TXMSG RXMSG TXOCT RXOCT OOSDUR NOOS NDISCARD PERIOD 1 1 43E6 1 45E6 5 48E6 5 35E6 62 1 0 00 14 55 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows RXMSG number of messages received TXMSG number of messages transmitted RXOCT number of octets received in messages excluding message header octets rounded down to the nearest 1000 TXOCT number of octets transmitted in messages excluding message header octets
282. g Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example PLGP 227 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format IPLG LGTYPE LGDATA 1 SCTP The following is the meaning of each field IPLG IP Log Identifier LGTYPE The type of IP logging to be done LGDATA data associated with the type 6 6 11 IPNIC IP Network Interface Configuration Change This command changes the configuration of a Network Interface Device One PV4 address and one PV6 Address may be configured The IP Address should be specified in CIDR format with IP Address and subnet mask specified as a compound parameter separated by a character The System supports resilient IP connectivity and a bond of two Ethernet Ports may be configured A bonding team is assigned by adding a bonding Network Interface and the assigning two Ethernet Ports to it by setting the BOND parameter on each Ethernet port using the Network Interface Change command The MAC address of the lower numbered Ethernet port will be used as the MAC address of the bond If the first port fails then the second port will take over If the first port returns to service the secondary port will remain the active port unless it in turn fails at which point the first port will resume active control of connectivity for the IP address Note Ethernet Ports numbered greater than 4 can only be used when additional Network Interface Boards have been fitted Syntax IPNIC NET
283. g failure RIID Routing Indicator ID This is a number from 0 to 65535 RI P1 The first SCTP Remote IP Address in the association Parameter Range An IP address entered as one of the following An IPV4 Address A 15 character IPTOKEN string configured to map to an IP Address RI P2 The second SCTP Remote IP Address in the association Parameter Range Null or an IP address entered as one of the following An IPV4 Address A 15 character IPTOKEN string configured to map to an IP Address RLID Identifier that associates a RAS with a SIGTRAN Link Parameter Range Number between 0 to 8191 RPFILTER Reverse the path filter to protect against packet spoofing by disabling the ability to respond to asymmetrically routed packets When set to 0 the filter is disabled When set to 1 validation is performed by the reversed path as specified in RFC1812 RPORT Remote IP port for an association Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 352 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued RSG The SIGTRAN Remote Signaling Gateway identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 SCADDR Service Center Address Digits Parameter Range Case sensitive string containing 0 9 a b or c characters of length 1 to 30 SCCP_ADDR SCCP Address Parameter Range String of length 4 to 20 Must not contain any spaces SC
284. g the MRDEI MMI command to load that configuration Syntax MRDEI DESTID Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Destination gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The Destination has not been initiated The Destination is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Destination is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example MRDEI DESTID 1 260 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 10 9 MRDEP Message Router Destination Configuration This command displays all configured Message Router Destinations Note See the individual parameter definitions of the config txt command MRF_DE defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters supported Syntax MRDEP DESTI D Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Destination gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MRDEP Output Format Message Router Destination Configuration DESTID DEST DESTSEQ NC DOMAIN RAS DPC CP LABEL 0 1 1 NCO AS 1 NONE 1 2 1 NCO NETWORK NONE NONE 1 6 10 10 MROGE Message Router Origin Configuration Command to dynamically remove an Origin To dynamically rem
285. g this message The module only accepts incoming dialogs with configured Application Contexts If a dialog request with an unconfigured context is received a dialog abort message is returned to the requesting Functional Entity If no supported Application Contexts are configured the application context negotiation is disabled The module accepts all incoming dialogs Applicability SIU Syntax INAP_AC lt AC_REF gt lt AC gt Example INAP_AC 0x00 0xa109060704000101010000 Parameters The INAP_AC command includes the following parameters e AC_REF A logical identifier for this application context AC Application context Specified as hexadecimal characters prefixed by Ox An application context may be up to 32 octets character pairs in length The Signaling Server supports up to 32 application contexts 141 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 142 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 Management Commands The following is a summary of the command categories and the commands within those categories Help for these commands is also available on line using MMI by simply typing a character followed by the return character at the MML command enter prompt 6 1 Access Control Commands ACCUP Access Current User Configuration ACCUS Account Control Current User Set ACPOP Account Control Policy Configuration ACPOS Account Control Policy Set AC
286. ge Number between 0 to 65535 WARNING The number of warning alarms issued 364 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued WEBSERV Specifies the type of Web Server to configure Parameter Range MGMT Web Server used for System Management WSAPI Web Server used for the Web Services API WMSER Web Management access Parameter Range INACTIVE Deactivate the web server ACTIVE Activate the web server SECURE Activate the web server requiring that access is granted only after the entry the entry of a user name and password HTTPS Activate the web server requiring that access is granted only after the entry of a user name and password Also only allow operation over HTTPS WORST_PING The time in milliseconds the worst ping took to reach and return from the target IP node WSAPI Web Services API availability Set to Y to enable Restful web interface on a particular IP address Set to N to disable Restful web interface on a particular IP address WSS Whether Y or not N the user has Web Services API access WSSER Web Services access Parameter Range INACTIVE Deactivate the web server ACTIVE Activate the web server SECURE Activate the web server requiring that access is granted only after the entry the entry of a user name and password HTTPS Activate the web server requiring that access is granted only after th
287. ge 0 to one less than the maximum number of signaling links supported e LINKSET The logical identity of the link set to which the link belongs The link set must already have been configured using the MTP_LINKSET command e REF The logical identity of the signaling link within the link set It should be in the range 0 to 15 This is usually be the same value set for the lt slc gt parameter below e SLC The signaling link code for the signaling link This must be unique within the link The valid range is 0 to 15 e BPOS The board position of the signaling processor allocated for this signaling link The board must already have been configured using the SS7_BOARD command Set to 0 if the MTP link is associated with an M2PA link BLINK For Non ATM this is the index of the logical signaling processor SP channel on the board allocated for this signaling link For Dialogic DSI SS7LD Network Interface Boards or supporting 16 low speed signaling links the blink parameter may be written as a single value in the range 0 to 15 For Dialogic DSI SS7MD Network Interface supporting 124 low speed signaling links the blink parameter may be written as a single value in the range 0 to 123 75 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 76 For Dialogic DSI SS7MD Network Interface supporting 4 high speed signaling links the blink parameter may be written as a single value in the range 0 to 3 When the SS7 link
288. gement Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Origin gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSOGP OGID 4 278 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format Message Router Origin Measurements OGID RXMSU RXOCT DROPMSU DROPOCT TXMSU TXOCT PERIOD 4 4343 153323 343 2540 4000 120783 01 17 45 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows OGID The Origin Identifier RXMSU Messages received from the Origin RXOCT Number of octets for Messages received from the Origin DROPMSU Messages from the Origin that do not match a Routing Key DROPOCT Number of octets Messages from the Origin that do not match a Routing Key TKMSU Messages from the Origin that match a Routing Key TKOCT Number of octets for Messages from the Origin that that match a Routing Key PERIOD Measurement collection period 6 11 15 MSPCP PCM Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for PCMs When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSPCP RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt PCMs gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSPCP MSPCP RESET Y Output Format PCM Measurements PORTID PCM FMSLIP OUTSYN ERRSEC SEVSEC BITERR CV PERIOD 1 1 3 57 60 23 1 0 0 23 00 00 2 1 4
289. gnaling Server if the Destination Point Code cannot be reach via local MTP3 M3UA Since there is one instance of RMM for each Network Context messages that are destined for a specific network must be sent to the correct RMM module ID as shown in the figure above In most SIU configurations RMM is not the highest protocol layer and the sending of messages to the correct module is handled by the higher layer modules without further user interaction 4 5 MTP 7 4 5 1 Applications Since there is one instance of MTP3 for each Network Context messages that are destined for a specific network must be sent to the correct MTP module ID as shown in the figure above In most Signaling Server configurations MTP is not the highest protocol layer and the sending of messages to the correct module is handled by the higher layer modules without further user interaction If an application requires routing at MTP level it is recommended that the application route via the RMM module rather than directly to MTP3 7 4 5 2 Configuration 7 The MTP_CONFIG config txt command described in MTP_CONFIG Global MTP Configuration on page 71 can be used to configure each Network Context and local point code within the system NCO must be configured before NC1 NC2 and NC3 can be configured The MTP_ROUTE MTP_LINKSET and MTP_USER_PART commands support the Network Context specific NC parameter This parameter must be specified for all MTP_ROUTE MTP_LINKSET
290. gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Servers gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSRAP RAS 4 Output Format Remote Application Server Measurements RAS TXPKT NOOS PERIOD 4 4343 0 01 17 45 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e RAS The Remote Application Server identifier e TXPKT M3UA Packets transmitted e NOOS Number of times the RAS was Inactive or there were insufficient ASPs e PERIOD Measurement collection period 6 11 17 MSRKP Message Router Routing Key Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for Message Router Routing Keys When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero 280 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Syntax MSRKP RKI RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Routing Key gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSRKP RKI 4 Output Format Message Router Routing Key Measurements RKI RXMSU RXOCT DROPMSU DROPOCT BAKMSU BAKOCT TXMSU TXOCT PERIOD 4 4343 153323 343 2540 0 0 4000 120783 01 17 45 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows RKI The Routing Key Index RKMSU Messages received that match the Routing Key RKOCT Number of octets for Messages received that match the Routing Key DROPMSU Messages that match the Routin
291. guration CNLCP Software License Capability Configuration CNLDE SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration End CNLDI SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration CNLDP SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration CNLSE SS7 Link Set End CNLSI SS7 Link Set Initiate CNLSP SS7 Link Set Configuration CNLTE SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration End CNLTI SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration CNLTP SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration CNMLE SS7 Monitor Link End CNMLI SS7 Monitor Link Initiate CNMLP SS7 Monitor link Configuration CNMNI CNMNE Multi Node Configuration CNMNP Multi Node Configuration Print CNOBP SNMP Trap Configuration CNOBS Configuration SNMP Traps Set CNPCE PCM End 154 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 CNPCI PCM Initiate CNPCP PCM Configuration CNRAE SIGTRAN Remote Application Server End CNRAI SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Initiate CNRAP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration CNRDI Configuration Restore Default Initiate CNRLE SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List End CNRLI SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Initiate CNRLP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Configuration CNSBE SIGTRAN Local Bind End CNSBI SIGTRAN Local Bind Initiate CNSBP SIGTRAN Local Bind Configuration
292. guration parameters for MTP Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax MTP_CONFIG NC NC0O OPTIONS 0 Example MTP_CONFIG NC NCO0O OPTIONS 0x0002 Parameters The MTP_CONFIG command includes the following parameters NC SS7 Network Context set to NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 When the parameter is omitted a value of NCO is used Up to four separate Network Contexts can be configured refer to Section 7 4 Configuring Multiple Network Contexts for more information e OPTIONS A 32 bit value each bit of which enables or disables additional configuration options Bit 0 defines the operation of MTP3 when a message is received from the SS7 network with a Destination Point Code DPC different from the local point code configured for the link set When set to zero these messages are discarded When set to 1 all received messages are processed regardless of dpc value This bit is normally set to zero Bit 1 defines the operation of MTP3 when a message is received from the SS7 network with a sub service field ssf value different from the ssf value configured for the link set When set to zero these messages are discarded When set to 1 all received messages are processed regardless of ssf value This bit is normally set to zero Bit 3 determines the behavior when a message is received from the SS7 network for a User Part that has not been configured If set to 1 a User Part Unavailable UPU message is issued to the n
293. he MAPPN_NC parameter If a Network Context is not specified the default Network Context NCO is assumed 7 4 11 2 Configuration The MAP_CONFIG config txt command described in Section 5 14 1 MAP_CONFIG MAP Configuration on page 137 may be used to configure the default Network Context for the first network The MAP_CONFIG command is only required to alter the MAP specific options of the signaling server from the default values and therefore is often not required Similarly for each subsequent Network Context the MAP_NC_CONFIG command is only required if the MAP options within that Network Context differ from default values The OPTIONS field in the MAP_NC_CONFIG command takes the same values as that used in the MAP_CONFIG command When used to support multiple local point codes within the same network the OPTIONS settings should typically be the same in both commands An MAP_NC_CONFIG command is not required for NCO since the MAP_CONFIG command configures the necessary options for the default Network Context 7 4 12 1S41 7 4 12 1 Applications Where a dialog is initiated remotely no change is required since IS41 automatically determines which Network Context is appropriate Where the dialog is initiated locally the application must specify the Network Context to which the message is destined This effectively indicates the point code to be used as the originating point code The Network Context should be indicated in the first mes
294. he MTP_LINKSET command defines link sets Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax MTP_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET OPC APC SSF NLINKS 1 OPTIONS 0 LABEL Example MTP_LINKSET LINKSET 0 OPC 321 APC 320 LABEL Edinburgh MTP_LINKSET NC NC1 LINKSET 1 O0PC 321NLINKS 2 OPTIONS 0x0000 APC 320 SSF 0x8 Parameters The MTP_LINKSET command includes the following parameters NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context together with a Signaling Point Code SPC uniquely identify an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e LINKSET The logical identity of the link set in the range 0 to one less than the maximum number of link sets supported This ID is used in other commands for reference APC The point code of the adjacent signaling point NLINKS The maximum number of links that are allocated to the link set The valid range is 1 to 16 OPTIONS A 16 bit value used to specify run time options Bit 3 when set enables restart procedures for this link set Bit 15 assigns special functionality to a link set for use in inter Signaling Server communication For a normal link set conforming to the SS7 specifications this bit must be set to 0 Note Bit 15 must be set for the inter Signaling Server link set between a Mode A Signaling Server and a Mode B Signaling server in a dual resilient co
295. he config txt file 2 Transfer the config txt file to the unit via FTP 3 Invoke the specific MMI command e g MTP link add CNSLI to update the unit configuration In every case when the Signaling Server is restarted the configuration file last transferred will be applied to the unit The dynamic configuration update commands return the following responses e RANGE ERROR the identifier value is invalid e UNACCEPTABLE COMMAND the command does not satisfy all prerequisite conditions e GENERAL ERROR the config txt command line is incorrectly formatted or the operation failed to complete successfully the configuration of the system is restored to the state prior to command execution Note the following e When adding configuration elements the elements may not already be configured within the Signaling Server e When changing or deleting configuration elements the elements must already have been previously configured within the Signaling Server e When using dynamic configuration all command line parameters including the element identifier value are mandatory Dynamic configuration may fail if the format of the command line does not include all the parameters identified in this manual The majority of config txt commands support dynamic configuration see the specific config txt command to see whether it is supported and what MMI command is required to perform the update 387 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines
296. he system software by FTP or SFTP Transfer is as follows 1 Establish an FTP or SFTP session 2 Since this software is a binary file set the FTP or SFTP transfer mode to BINARY 3 Transfer the mode specific software For example for an SIU software binary by typing put ss7g40 siu tgz Note The Signaling Server uses a case sensitive file system Note Different operating modes have different binary file names For example the filename for BorderNet DSH is helix tgz 4 The FTP or SFTP session should then be terminated by entering the quit or bye 5 Establish a MML session and restart the unit by typing MNRSI Note If you need to switch to a different mode after applying licenses the command to use is MNRSI SYSTYPE SIU SWS DSH specifying one of the appropriate SYSTYPE parameter values 6 The machine then boots 7 Once the upgrade is complete the machine is accessible via MMI and the upgrade version can be checked using the CNSWP command Updating Software from a USB The procedure for updating the system software from USB is as follows 1 Copy the software binary distribution file to the USB memory device Insert the USB memory device into the USB port on the front of the unit Restart the unit using the front panel reset button or by entering the MNRSI MMI command The system will reboot until you are presented with the MMI command prompt Check the software version using the CNSWP co
297. he valid range is 0 2147483647 NASP The number of ASP SIGTRAN Links required in load sharing mode OPTIONS This is a 16 bit value used to specify run time options Bit Description 0 When set the configured routing context will be ignored and a routing context will not be required from a received remote application server in an activate message 2 When set to zero will consider a point code on Remote Application Servers to be unavailable if any of the Remote Application Servers have failed When set to one will consider a point code available if any of the Remote Application Servers is in service 3 When set to zero the Signaling Server is acting in an IPSP relationship with the Remote Application Server When set to one the Signaling Server is acting as a Signaling Gateway for the Remote Application Server If bit 3 is set then all associated SIGTRAN links should also have bit 4 of their STN_LINK options field set 1 15 Reserved and should be set to zero e LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional 95 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 5 96 SIGTRAN Remote Application Server configuration is viewed using the CNRAP MMI command and its status and measurements read using the STRAP an MSRAP MMI commands After startup additional Remote Application Servers can be added to the config txt file and
298. heduled maintenance period preferably with the system shutdown or for hot swap during a period of light traffic Re synchronization of disk drives subsequent to replacement can take between 5 10 minutes depending on the conditions and the load under which the Signaling Server is operating The Signaling Server should not be restarted during this period and MMI activity should be limited to checking the status of the re synchronization The status of the disk drives can be identified using the STDDP Disk Drive Status command If the disk is replaced while the system is shutdown when the system is restarted the status of the disk will remain DOWN until synchronization is started by deactivating and reactivating the disk using MNINI and MNINE A status of INACTIVE indicates the disk has been deactivated by the user a status of RESTARTING indicates that it is attempting to synchronize but the operation is not yet complete A status of UP indicates that a disk is fully operational 51 Chapter 4 System Management 4 52 Following the RESTARTING state if the status changes to DOWN either the replacement disk is faulty or RAID mirroring has failed due to the action of the hot swap If this occurs the Server should be restarted without the disk in place and the disk re inserted once the system is operational Synchronization is re activated using MNINI and MNINE If the server is restarted through power loss or user action while synchroniza
299. hen CONC _ENT is the Service Indicator SI ALIAS An Alias for the Destination Point Code that will be presented to the affected entity as the Point Code that has changed state NONE or Number from 0 to 16777215 An Alias Point Code may be used for example when a change in state for a particular point code in one network should be represented as a change in state for a point code that exists in a different network If an Alias point code is specified the DPC must be explicitly defined ALIAS defaults to NONE if not specified 5 9 I SUP Configuration Commands The ISUP commands include e ISUP_CONFIG ISUP Configuration e SUP_CFG_CCTGRP ISUP Circuit Group Configuration e ISUP_TIMER ISUP Timer Configuration 5 9 1 ISUP_CONFIG ISUP Configuration Synopsis The SUP_CONFIG command supplies the configuration parameters that specify the operating environment of the ISUP protocol This command should only be used if the ISUP software has been licensed and configured on the Signaling Server Applicability SIU Syntax ISUP_CONFIG lt OPC gt lt SSF gt lt USER_ID gt lt OPTIONS gt lt NUM_CGRPS gt lt NUM_CCTS gt lt MAXSIF gt Example ISUP_CONFIG 2 0x8 0x1d 0x0434 128 4096 Parameters The ISUP_CONFIG command includes the following parameters e OPC The default local point code of the Signaling Server for I SUP 110 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e SSF The sub service field valu
300. hin the HSL link 12 Sequence number length Set to 1 the HSL signaling link will use a 12bit sequence number If set to 0 the HSL signaling link will use a 7bit sequence number 7 16 3 MTP_LINK TS For HSL links the TS parameter should be set to Oxff to indicate that the link is attached to an LIU configured with the LIU_CONFIG command HSL signaling links may not use timeslots already configured for signaling or data TDM links may not use timeslots already configured for HSL or data 397 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines 7 17 Monitoring The SIU provides the ability to act either as a high performance protocol monitor or to act ina mixed mode both terminating as well as monitoring Signaling links Monitoring may be configure by specifying the board to be used for monitoring using the SS7_BOARD config txt command the LIU using the LIU_CONFIG command and the specific monitoring link using the LIU_CONFIG command A typical monitoring application requires that the monitoring E1 T1 must be configured as high impedance to avoid corruption of the signal on the line High impedance can be configured on the LIU by setting the liu_type parameter to 6 for E1 high impedance or 7 for T1 high impedance A monitor link can be configured using the MONITOR_LINK command in the config txt file The following example demonstrates monitoring of signaling on timeslot 16 on a PCM where both the send and receive are
301. hows the operating mode which is either SIU SWS DSH or TEST If the operating mode is not correct and needs to be changed this can be achieved by restarting the software with the following MNRSI command for example MNRSI SYSTYPE SIU Apply the configuration to the unit see Section 4 2 5 Configuration Procedure on page 43 See also Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines for some example configurations In SIU mode the Signaling Server is typically used in a complete system with one or more host platforms but may also be used standalone for Message Router applications In SWS mode the Signaling Server can work with one or more Web Service Clients The BorderNet DSH does not require and application host or Web Service Client 2 2 1 Connecting a VT100 Terminal A VT100 compatible terminal can be connected using a cable to the DB 9 serial port on the rear of the unit After pressing the carriage return Enter key the Signaling Gateway interface prompt is displayed Default serial port settings are 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bits and no parity bits 22 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The output on the VT100 screen is similar to the following SS7G41 SIU logged on at 2011 01 20 14 52 29 lt The user should then configure the initial IP address shown in Section 2 2 3 Initial IP Configuration on page 24 2 2 2 Connecting via Telnet The
302. iagnostics Alarms and LOOS rarriisii rerin ranir ei ra Ene aei e nE E KE Ea 39 4 3 Automati MMI LOGG NG kinisi irerinsrnisiona roii ree aP E EEEE ENEE ERAEN R I 40 4a Alar BISING ies esirin ar a dad iaaii a a E Aa 40 4 5 SIGTRAN Throughput Licensing cece cece eee eee ee eee eee eee 48 AEG SNMP ae cates cece arin nee E puncte merce teats baste ta tae en pada eae eae eer aaa tongs 49 4 6 1 DSM SNMP cercen tn o aE cise etek A a AOE AEO ESTE EROE tad 49 4 7 Lights Out Management ssssssrsssrserntrtrerttrtrttttn enna neta ened 49 4 7 1 Using the Remote Management Interface cece eee eee eee eee ener tana 49 4 7 2 Changing the IP Address of the Remote Management Interface 65 50 4 8 Hard Disk Management iicccalicis ccc laces dacs Made nae tina AE EE E AEN ian nidiadeae diets 51 4 8 1 Hard Disk Drive RAID Management ccice cece cere eee eect te ee eae e nena eaten 51 4 9 System Backup and Restoration ccc eee nent need 52 Contents 5 Configuration Command 0 6c Er netfee teas 55 Ball Overview a wiohoa al seus A E E A 55 5 1 1 Syntax Conventions s s ssssssssresrererrtrerstrtrttn etun n trutta ee ee ee eee eee a eee 56 5 E2Z Dynamic Configuration 2 4 vi ac4 se A ea ae ee es 57 5 1 3 Programming Circuit Group Configuration cccececeeee eee eee eee ee teen ea eaed 57 5 2 Command Sequence sirean p te eee tena eee EEEa 57 5 3 Detection of
303. ically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNCSI CSSRLID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt SCCP CSSRs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The Concerned Sub System List ID has not been initiated The Concerned Sub System List ID is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present 164 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The Concerned Sub System Resource is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNCSI CSSRLID 1 6 3 14 CNCSP SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource Configuration This command displays Concerned Sub system configuration data Syntax CNCSP CSSRLI D CSSR NC Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt SCCP CSSRs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNCSP CNCSP CSSR LSS CNCSP NC 0 Output Format SCCP Concerned Subsystem Resource Configuration CSSRLID NC CSSRID SSRID CSSR CSPC CSSN SSR SPC SSN 0 NC1 T 11 LSS 13 RSP 3 1 NC1 2 23 LSS 13 RSS 3 8 2 NC2 4 34 LSS 253 RSP 4 3 NC2 8 35 LSS 253 RSS 4 8 4 NCO 9 36 LSS 253 RSP 2
304. ication Server Status STRLP Remote Server Link Status STSLP SS7 Link Status STSRP SIGTRAN Route Status STSSP SCCP Subsystem Resource Status STSTP SIGTRAN Signaling Link Status STSWP System Software Status STSYP System Status STTDP TCAP Dialogue Status STTPP NTP Server Status STTRP TCAP Resource Status STUAP User Account Status 298 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 13 1 STBOP Board Status This command displays the status of all configured signaling boards Syntax STBOP Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt Boards gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STBOP Output Format Board status BPOS BRDTYPE SERIAL_NUMBER BRD_STATUS 0 SS7MD PX8000001 ACTIVE 1 SS7MD PX8000002 ACTIVE The parameters have the following meanings e BPOS Board position e BRDTYPE Board type Possible board types are SS7LD or SS7MD e SERIAL_NUMBER The serial number of the board If a board is replaced or a new board added then the board type should be set changed on the board configuration command and the system restarted after which it will extract the new serial number of the board e BRD_STATUS The state the board is in Possible state values are INACTIVE RESETTING ACTIVE FAILED 6 13 2 STCGP Circuit Group Status This
305. ications required by operators for maintenance purposes SS7G41 SIU Mode An SS7G41 with the SIU Mode software license installed and enabled operates as a Signaling Interface Unit SIU providing an interface to SS7 networks for a number of distributed application platforms via TCP IP LAN In this mode an application developed by the user can use the Dialogic DSI message API to interface with the SS7 or SIGTRAN protocols MTP3 M3UA ISUP BICC SCCP TCAP MAP IS41 and INAP operating on the unit In addition when fitted with Dialogic DSI SS7 Boards the SIU can be used to build high performance monitoring applications For a detailed description and use of the system acting as a Signaling Interface Unit see the Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 SIU Developers Manual An SS7G41 with SIU Mode software license installed and enabled may also be configured to operate as a Message Router The Message Router capability provides the ability to flexibly route messages between the Network Domain MTP or M3UA User Parts and Sigtran Application Servers using M3UA The routing is based on the MTP routing label and allows messages from a specific Origin to use individual Routing Keys to selectively match routing label parameters and determine which Destination to be sent towards The Message Router can be configured to act as a Sigtran Signaling Gateway or basic Signaling Transfer Point STP The Signaling server can also behave as an SCCP Router b
306. ice were last reset 6 11 12 MSMLP SS7 Monitor Link Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for Monitor links When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSMLP RESET PAGE Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Monitor Links gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSMLP MSMLP RESET Y MSMLP PAGE 2 Output Format SS7 Monitor Link Measurements Page 1 of 2 MLINK RXOCT RXMSU PERIOD 0 3333 822 00 12 00 1 0 0 00 12 00 Monitor Link Measurements Page 2 of 2 MLINK FFRAME FRAME MFRAME LFRAME ABORT CRC DISC RBUSY PERIOD 0 22 375 8220 16320 124306 0 0 3 00 12 00 1 0 0 333 4343 1233 434126 0 0 00 12 00 276 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows MLINK Monitor link RXOCT Number of Signaling Information Field SIF and Service Information Octets received RXMSU Number of message signaling units octets received PERIOD Time since measurements on the port were last reset FFRAME The number of error free frames received excluding any duplicate frames discarded as a result of the internal filtering mechanism FRAME The total number of error free frames received including any duplicate frames discarded as a result of the internal filtering mechanism MFRAME The numbe
307. ides the ability to configure the QSAAL protocol timers from the configuration file Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax QSAAL_TIMER NC NCO TIMID TSEC TMSEC Example QSAAL_TIMER TIMID CC TMSEC 1600 QSAAL_TIMER NC NC1 TIMID T3 TSEC 110 Parameters The QSAAL_TIMER command includes the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network for which the QSAAL timer is being configured Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 and NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed e TIMID A text identifier for the timer to be configured It should be set to one of the following CC KEEP_ALIVE NO_RESP POLL IDLE T1 T2 T3 e TSEC The timer value specified in seconds e TMSEC The timer value specified in milliseconds with a millisecond granularity Any timers not configured continue to be set to the values shown in the following table 83 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Timer ID Default Value Range min max ms CC 1 500 15 2 500 KEEP_ ALIVE 300 15 2 500 NO_RESP 1 500 100 10 000 POLL 100 20 600 IDLE 100 20 600 T1 5 000 1 000 20 000 T2 120 000 10 000 300 000 T3 10 1 30 5 6 8 MTP_USER_PART MTP User Part Synopsis The MTP_USER_PART command is used to inform the MTP that a user supplied user part exists on the host In dual redundant operation when a user application sends a
308. ig fail 22 System overload 24 Evaluation mode 25 CPU temperature 28 Board fail 30 CPU warning Salt Voltage warning 32 Memory warning 34 Sigtran link fail 38 Traffic congested 39 Traffic enforce 41 Restart required 42 System restart 45 NTP sync fail 52 Drive unavail 67 CMOS battery low 69 Insufficient hosts 70 SDP congestion RI File sys warning 72 DB unavail 73 CRT test alarm 150 MAJ NR AJ RT S GIE GOTE CNAE S vs D G Qe a D C z AJ ES D D Q c NR G oa O O a R OG O O ea Po Z 2 NN OAWBN DON PP UUN POH OO RARU RAAN N DDD WBNN ONY NN NWN LH SEVERITY TYPE CAUSE 8 6 1 571 12 522 573 573 308 107 107 123 566 566 307 307 564 307 59 68 59 522 152 566 343 343 537 158 306 508 105 306 343 508 17 570 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 74 MAJ test alarm MAJ 2 570 75 MNR test alarm MNR 2 570 78 SCTP path fail MNR 2 574 EXECUTED 6 2 2 ALLI P Active Alarm List Command to display the list of any active alarms In the event that Parse Errors are listed as an active alarm further information on the cause of the error can be obtained using page 2 of the command Syntax ALLI P Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Alarms gt Status Operations gt Alarms Footer gt Alarms Applicability Operating Modes ALL DSH Permission
309. iguration connectivity and remote equipment 4 5 SIGTRAN Throughput Licensing The SIGTRAN license installed on the unit determines the number of SIGTRAN links that can be configured on the system For license descriptions see Section 2 1 2 Supported Licenses on page 20 Throughput is restricted through a congestion mechanism which allows a system to briefly exceed the licensed throughput provided that the average throughput does not exceed the licensed limit If a system exceeds the limit for a sustained period of time then the licensed limit will be enforced and traffic throttling will reduce throughput until sufficient credit is gained to return to normal operation Two alarms provide indications of throughput congestion and throughput enforcement Traffic congest indicates that enforcement will be reached unless traffic is reduced Traffic Enforce indicates that the system is actively throttling the traffic to the licensed rate In addition the API command API_MSG _SIU_STATUS will provide the following indications of congestion and enforcement to the management module Value Event ID Ox2b Traffic congestion 0 Ox2c Traffic enforcement 0 Ox2d Clearing traffic congestion and 0 enforcement if active The MMI command STLCP Software License Capability Status will report the status of the licensable capabilities of the system such as protocols or different modes of operation The
310. iguration of each network interface Syntax IPNIP NETIF Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Network Interfaces gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Output Format Tp Intextace Gandiguvstion NETIF LABEL BONDO Management ETHO ETH1 ETH2 ETH3 IPNIP NETIF ETH3 IP Interface Device Configuration NETIF ETH3 IP4ADDR 172 28 148 126 24 IP6ADDR d77 19a9 8cf0 148 20e cff fec7 4b34 64 BOND NONE LABEL Sigtran 6 6 15 IPHNTKE IP Host NameToken Configuration End This command removes configuration related to an IP Host Token Note Configuration may be dynamically removed by 1 Deleting a configuration command P_TOKEN entry from the config txt file 2 Executing the PHNTKE MMI command to unload it from the system Syntax IPHNIPTKE IPTOKEN 230 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt IP HostTokens Names gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The IP token has been initiated Example IPHNIPTKE PTOKEN 1 6 6 16 IPHNIPTKI IP Host NameToken Configuration This command adds configuration related to an IP HostToken Note Configuration may be dynamically added by 1 Entering an addition
311. ing this command to unload the route from the system Syntax CNSRE SNRT Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Routes gt Configuration 203 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN Route ID has been initiated The SIGTRAN Route is not present in the config txt file The SIGTRAN Route is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN route is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNSRE SNRT 1 6 3 75 CNSRI SIGTRAN Route Initiate This command adds a new SIGTRAN route Note SIGTRAN routes are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNSRI SNRT Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Routes gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN Route ID has not been initiated The SIGTRAN Route is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN route is present in the
312. int Codes with this Global Title Load Share table GLST The GLST can then be assigned to a SCCP address using the DPC parameter on the SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS command Syntax SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE NC NCO0O LST OPTIONS 0 Example SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE NC NC0 LST LST 5 OPTIONS 0x00000001 SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLENC1LST 70x00000003 117 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Parameters e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter identifies the SS7 network in which the Destination Point Code exists Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed e LST logical id of the LST instance in the range 0 255 The value is prefixed with the string LST so that when it is assigned to an SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS it can be distinguished from an individual Point Code e OPTIONS e Bit O If set the availability test for each GLST entry requires that both the Point Code and the Sub system are available If not set only the GLST Point Code is tested for availability e Bit 1 When set to 0 to Point Code selection can be made using the Signaling Link Selection SLS value for messages received from the network or Sequence Control SEQ CTRL parameter for messages received from the User Part When set to 1 messages will be distributed across the point codes on a Round Robin basis ignoring SLS values e Bits 2 31 Reserved for future used Should be set to 0 5 10 3 SCC
313. is command can configure a combined link set to a remote Destination Point Code DPC An MTP route exists within a particular Network Context and may not use link sets operating within differing Network Contexts MTP routes can be designated as default routes and can be used to convey traffic for multiple destinations without the need to configure each DPC as an explicit MTP route Typically this is useful when a signaling point connects simply to a single STP or a mated pair of STPs and all traffic can be sent to the STP irrespective of the current network status Two types of default route are supported one associated with a real DPC In this case the default route is deemed to be accessible whenever the specified DPC is accessible The other associated with a pseudo DPC which is a point code that does not exist within the network for example zero In this case the default route is deemed to be accessible as soon as the link sets within the route are available A maximum of one default route for each supported Service Indicator or user part is permitted Note The MTP_ROUTE command must be used for each destination point code to be accessed including the adjacent point code There may be only one MTP_ROUTE command for each destination Note Attempting to mix in the same configuration file lines that use current command formats with lines that use older command formats may give rise to restart errors indicating
314. isk drive is non operational as one or more of the Raid devices on this drive is faulty e RESTARTING One or more of the raid devices on this drive is synchronizing with another Raid device The disk is considered non operational until synchronization is complete e INACTIVE The drive is not configured as part of the RAID array and therefore is not in use This may be due to user action through MMI the drive not being physically present at startup or a failed drive being removed by the operating software at start up from the RAID array Caution Before replacing a failed drive the drive must first be taken out of service using the MNINI command Once the replacement drive is in place the disk can be restored to service using the MNINE command 6 13 5 STDBP Subscriber Database Service Status This command displays status associated with Subscriber Database Services Syntax STDBP 301 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt Subscriber Database gt Services gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STDBP Output Format Subscriber Database Service Status DBSVCTYPE MNP DBSVCID 5 DBO O PRI DB1 3 FAILED DB2 4 PRI DB3 5 PRI DB6 1 FAILED DB7 2 SEC The meaning of each field in the output is as follows DBSVCID the Service ID DBSVCTYPE the Service type DBO DB15 the status of the database via each host The p
315. isplays the configuration associated with Subscriber Database Services Syntax DBSVP Web Management Location System Administration gt Subscriber Database gt Services gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example DBSVP Output Format Subscriber Database Service Configuration DBSVCID 0 DBSVCTYPE MNP DBSVCNAME DSILNP OPTIONS 0x00000000 RETRIES 1 RECOVERY CONTINUE TESTMSISDN 123456789 DBO 0 PRI DB1 3 PRI DB2 4 PRI DB3 5 PRI DB6 1 SEC DB7 2 SEC 6 4 2 DBSVS Subscriber Database Service Change This command updates a specific Database service The DBSVCTYPE is the type of database service and must be set to MNP the DBSVCNAME is the actual service name for the database and the TESTMSISDN identifies the test MSISDN that is present in the MNP database and is used to validate operation of the MNP service The RETRIES parameter indicates number database retries to attempt before declaring failure and the RECOVERY parameter identifies the recovery mechanism to use should a database lookup fail DBO DB15 identifies the hosts used for connectivity to the database Each host is identified in a compound parameter of the form x y where x is the Host ID and y is set to either PRI or SEC to determine the intended usage of the host Note If a the number of retries allowed is set to a value equal to or greater than the numbe
316. it enables or disables additional features of the remote signaling point The meaning for each bit is as defined for the options parameter defined in the Configure Sub System Resource Request section of the SCCP Programmer s Manual e PCMASK A 32 bit value that specifies the part of a destination point code that must match the lt remote_spc gt value in order for an SCCP transmit message to be sent down to this destination sub system Bits set to zero indicate that the corresponding bit position in the transmit message destination point code must match the bit position of the remote SPC Bits set to 1 indicate bit positions in the message destination point code that do not need to match the remote SPC set for this RSP This allows configuration of a default destination sub system for example a gateway SCP RIID Routing Indicator ID e LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional SCCP Remote Signaling Point configuration is viewed using the CNSSP MMI After startup additional Remote Signaling Points can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNSSI command Remote Signaling Points are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNSSE MMI command 10 8 SCCP_LSS SCCP Local Sub Systems Synopsis Each local SCCP sub system is configured using an SCCP_LSS command specifying the local sub
317. it represents a run time option for the circuit group The meaning of the lower 16 bits are as defined in the options parameter described in the Configure Circuit Group Request section of the ISUP Programmer s Manual The meaning of the upper 16 bits are as defined in the ext_options parameter described in the Configure Circuit Group Request section of the ISUP Programmer s Manual 112 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 USER_HOST The logical identifier of the host to which receive indications and circuit group supervision indications for this group are to be sent USER_ID Specifies a user application module ID for this circuit group This overwrites the user_id specified in the ISUP_CONFIG command e OPC Specifies an Originating Point Code OPC value for this group and overwrites the default local signaling point code specified with the SUP_CONFIG command This parameter enables the Signaling Server to behave as a different local point code for each circuit group such a configuration is used when connecting to multiple networks This also facilitates the loop back of ISUP routes locally for local loop back testing e SSF Specifies a sub service field value for this circuit group This overwrites the ssf specified using the ISUP_CONFIG command e VARIANT An 8 bit field that is mapped directly to the variant field in the ISUP Circuit Group Configuration message The following t
318. it will extract the new serial number of the board Parameters associated the SS7_ BOARD command in config txt will only be displayed if a SS7_BOARD command is present for the board in config txt Syntax CNBOP Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt Boards gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access 158 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example CNBOP Output Format Board Configuration BPOS BRDTYPE OPTIONS 0 SS7MD 0x00000001 I SS7MD 0x00000001 Note See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command SS7_BOARD for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 5 CNBOS Board Set This command specifies the boards a user requires in a system Note The board serial number does not need to be set or changed as it is determined automatically If a board is added or replaced then the board type should be set or unset and reset when replacing and the system restarted after which it will extract the new serial number of the board Syntax CNBOS BPOS BRDTYPE Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt Boards gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The board type must match that of the fitted board in the specified position Example CNBOS BPOS
319. ith a Sigtran Route e A DPC associated with a Sigtran Remote Application Server e An OPC associated with an MTP Link Set e or an OPC associated with a Sigtran Local Application Server CONC_DOMAIN The Concerned Domain that is to be notified of the change in status Possible values are e AS The Concerned Entity is an Application Server which has been configured as a Sigtran Remote Application Server e NETWORK The Concerned Entity is an Adjacent Point Code in the NETWORK domain e UPART The Concerned Entity is a User Part identified by Service Indicator The User Part associated with the Service Indicator should already be specified on a routing origin command CONC_NC The Network Context in which the Concerned Entity exists For ASP entities it must be the same NC as that used on the ASLINK If not specified CONC_NC defaults to the same value as NC 109 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands CONC_ENT The Concerned Entity which is a reference to a specific entity in the Concerned Domain which will be informed of the change in status of the DPC If CONC_DOMAIN NETWORK then CONC_ENT is the adjacent point code that needs to be notified If set to ANY then all point codes in the CONC_NC will be informed If CONC_DOMAIN AS then CONC_ENT is the Remote Application Server RAS that is concerned about the status of the DPC If set to ANY then all Remote Application Servers in the CONC_NC will be informed If CONC_DOMAIN UPART t
320. ither the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command LIU_CONFIG for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 55 CNRAE SIGTRAN Remote Application Server End This command removes an SIGTRAN Remote Application Server RAS Note SIGTRAN RASs are dynamically removed by first deleting the SIGTRAN RAS from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the SIGTRAN RAS from the system Syntax CNRAE RAS Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Servers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN RAS has been initiated The SIGTRAN RAS is not present in the config txt file The SIGTRAN RAS is not used in any other configuration 191 Chapter 6 Management Commands There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN RAS is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNRAE RAS 1 6 3 56 CNRAI SIGTRAN Remote Application Server I nitiate This command adds a new SIGTRAN Remote Application Server RAS Note SIGTRAN RASs are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration
321. itoring type Received signaling messages are passed directly to a user application without further processing The parameters required and their usage is different for each mode of operation Note Often applications that use MONITOR_LINK also require the line interfaces to operate in high impedance pr protective monitoring point mode High impedance or protective monitoring point mode can be selected for a particular LIU using the lt liu_type gt parameter in the LIU_CONFIG command Applicability SIU Syntax ATM Links MONITOR_LINK lt MLINK gt ATM lt BPOS gt lt BLINK gt lt CELLSTR gt lt VPI gt lt VCI gt lt USER_ID gt lt USER_HOST gt lt OPTIONS gt HSL LSL Links MONITOR_LINK lt MLINK gt ATM lt BPOS gt lt BLINK gt lt CELLSTR gt lt VPI gt lt VCI gt lt USER_ID gt lt USER_HOST gt lt OPTIONS gt Example MONITOR_LINK 1 TDM 0 1 0 1 1 Oxld 1 0x00000001 MONITOR_LINK 0 ATM 1 1 1 1 10 0x0d 0 0x00000001 Parameters The MONITOR_LINK command includes the following parameters e MLINK The monitor link s unique logical identity within the Signaling Server It must be in the range 0 to one less than the maximum number of monitor links supported The value must not already be allocated to another MONITOR_LINK or MTP_LINK 85 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 86 e IFTYPE The interface type identifies the type of object being monitored The monitoring type should be set to one of the following
322. ivate the software license If you agree the software license terms you can continue with Step 3 3 The next stage is to identify the Dialogic DSI Signaling Server product s on which the software option is to be activated To do this you need to obtain the UNIT ID for the Signaling Server which is done by executing the CNSYP MML command on the target Signaling Server 4 Once you have the License ID and the UNIT ID the license can be activated on the Signaling Server License Activation is the process of submitting the License ID and UNIT ID so that a License File can be generated and sent for installation on the target Signaling Server The License Activation process is web based and the License File is sent by email To activate the license perform the following steps a Visit the following web site http membersresource dialogic com ss7 license license asp or an alternative URL if listed on the License Certificate b Provide the following information Name Company Country Email address this will be used to send the License File 19 Chapter 2 Licensing Installation and Initial Configuration c Provide the following information about the Signaling Server Operating System Enter Signaling Server Host ID Enter the UNIT ID User machine identification A string typically the Signaling Server name used by you to identify the unit This may be any value relevant to you for exam
323. ive utilization in a 10s period OR1H Percentage 1 hour peak link receive utilization in a 10s period OR1D Percentage 1 day peak link receive utilization in a 10s period NT5M Peak rate of MSUs transmitted during the last 5 minutes msu s 283 Chapter 6 Management Commands NT1H Peak rate of MSUs transmitted during the last hour msu s NT1D Peak rate of MSUs transmitted during the last day msu s NT1D peak rate of MSUs transmitted during the last day msu s OT5M percentage 5 mins peak link transmit utilization in a 10s period OT1H percentage 1 hour peak link transmit utilization in a 10s period OT1D percentage 1 day peak link transmit utilization in a 10s period 6 11 20 MSSRP SIGTRAN Route Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for SIGTRAN Routes When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSSRP SNRT RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Routes gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSSRP SNRT 4 Output Format SIGTRAN Route Measurements SNRT TXPKT NOOS PERIOD 4 4343 0 01 17 45 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e SNRT The SIGTRAN Route identifier e TXPKT M3UA Packets transmitted e NOOS Number of times the Route was down e PERIOD Measurement collection period 6 11 21 MSSTP SIGTRAN Link Measurements
324. ivity and remote equipment 38 Traffic PROTOCOLID MNR Traffic throughput through the licensed congested module is at or near the licensed capacity 20 M3UA NCO 21 M3UA NC1 Reduce traffic throughput or obtain a 22 M3UA NC2 higher capacity license 23 M3UA NC3 30 M2PA NCO 31 M2PA NC1 32 M2PA NC2 33 M2PA NC3 39 Traffic enforce PROTOCOLID MAJ Traffic throughput through the licensed module exceeds licensed capacity 20 M3UA NCO Reduce traffic throughput or obtain a 21 M3UA NC1 higher capacity license 22 M3UA NC2 23 M3UA NC3 30 M2PA NCO 31 M2PA NC1 32 M2PA NC2 33 M2PA NC3 45 Chapter 4 System Management Alarm IDs Severity Description and Clearance Actions Continued CODE 41 TITLE Restart required ID SEVERITY CRT DESCRIPTION ALARM CLEARANCE ACTION A system restart is required before the system changes can take place Invoke a manual restart to clear the fault 42 System restart CRT The system is re starting This condition will clear when the system is fully in service This is a normal alarm condition during a restart that should clear after a few minutes If the alarm persists investigate other active alarms that should indicate the reason for a restart failure 45 NTP sync fail CRT Failure to sync with a remote NTP server Check configuration connectivity accessibility and operation of remote NTP server s 52 Drive unavail DRIVE MAJ
325. lation Bit 2 Autocorrect invalid cells if possible Note Either Payload Scrambling or ATM Coset mode or both must be enabled Payload Scrambling is a requirement G 804 operation on an E1 DEFVPI A default AAL5 link will be configured for the cell stream to signal incoming active connections This is the VPI that will be used for this connection DEFVIC A default AAL5 link will be configured for the cell stream to signal incoming active connections This is the VCI that will be used for this connection Values 0 3 and 4 are reserved and should not be used ATM Cell Stream configuration is viewed using the CNACP MMI command Cell Stream measurements read using the MSACP MMI commands After startup additional Cell Streams can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNACI command Cell Streams are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNACE MMI command 6 MTP Commands The MTP commands include MTP_CONFIG Global MTP Configuration MTP_LINKSET MTP Link Set MTP_LINK MTP Signaling Link MTP2_ TIMER MTP2 Timer Configuration MTP3_ TIMER MTP3 Timer Configuration QSAAL_TIMER QSAAL Timer Configuration MTP_ROUTE MTP Route MTP_USER_PART MTP User Part MONITOR_LINK Monitor Link Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 6 1 MTP_ CONFIG Global MTP Configuration Synopsis The MTP_ CONFIG command defines the global confi
326. ling Server via FTP or SFTP Installing the Configuration by FTP or sFTP Transfer The procedure to install a configuration by FTP or SFTP transfer is as follows Note Secure FTP STP users will by default log into the parent directory of siguser and will then need to change to the ftpuser directory before commencing the following operation Most Secure FTP clients provide an option to configure the default initial directory If available users may choose to use this instead of manually changing to the ftpuser subdirectory 1 Establish an FTP STP session 2 Set the FTP STP transfer mode to ASCII since the configuration file is a text file 3 Transfer the configuration to the Signaling Server by typing the command put config txt config txt Note The Signaling Server uses a case sensitive file system Therefore it is necessary to specify config txt in lowercase 4 Terminate the FTP STP session by entering quit or bye 5 Establish an MML session and restart the unit by typing the MNRSI command The machine then boots and modifies the configuration Once the modification is complete the machine is accessible via the MML interface Note This procedure may also be used to update overwrite previous configuration files Once the Signaling Server has been configured the host software should be installed and configured on each application platform Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issu
327. lly added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNLAI LAS Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Local Servers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN LAS has not been initiated The SIGTRAN LAS is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present 177 Chapter 6 Management Commands The SIGTRAN LAS is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNLAI LAS 1 6 3 34 CNLAP SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration This command displays the configuration of SIGTRAN Local Application Servers on the system Syntax CNLAP Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Local Servers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNLAP Output Format SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration LAS NC OPC RC TRMD OPTIONS LABEL 1 NCO 1200 1 LS 0x0000 2 NC1 1300 2 OR 0x0000 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command STN_LAS for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 35 CNLCP Software License Capability Configuration This comm
328. ly identifies the SS7 network that the M2PA timer is being configured for Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 and NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed TIMID A text identifier for the timer to be configured It should be set to one of the following T1 T2 T3 T4N T4E T6 or T7 TSEC The timer value specified in seconds TMSEC The timer value specified in milliseconds 101 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands Any timers not explicitly configured continue will be set to the default values shown in the following table Mnemonic Default Granularity M3UA Timeout T1 45s 100ms Alignment Ready timer value T2 30s 100ms Not Aligned timer value T3 1 2s 100ms Aligned timer value T4N 8 2s 100ms Normal Proving timer value T4E 0 5s 100ms Emergency Proving timer value T6 5 5s 100ms Remote Congestion timer value T7 1 7s 100ms Excessive Delay Of Acknowledgement timer value 5 7 11 M3UA_ TIMER M3UA Timer Configuration Synopsis The M3UA_TIMER command provides the ability to configure the M3UA protocol timers from the configuration file Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax M3UA_TIMER NC NCO TIMID TSEC TMSEC Example M3UA_TIMER NC NC1 TIMID TACK TSEC 3 Parameters NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that the M3UA timer is being configured for Supported values are NCO
329. mand removes an SCCP GTT Pattern Note SCCP GTT Patterns are dynamically removed by first deleting the Gateway List from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the Gateway List from the system Syntax CNGPE GTPID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt GTT Patterns gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SCCP GTT Pattern ID has been initiated The SCCP GTT Pattern is not present in the config txt file The SCCP GTT Pattern is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SCCP GTT Pattern is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNGPE GTPID 1 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command STN_RSGLIST for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 172 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 3 26 CNGPI SCCP GTT Pattern Initiate This command adds a new SCCP GTT Pattern Note SCCP GTT Patterns are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNGPI GTPID We
330. messages monitored by the board for this link The monitored messages are received in the APL MSG_RX_INDT message type to accommodate the timestamp as well as the received message Bits 10 and 11 select either 64 56 or 48 Kbps operation is being monitored and are used when a link operates over a T1 or E1 timeslot Use of these bits is as follows 87 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 88 Bit 11 Bit 10 Rate Timeslot Usage 0 0 64 Set both to zero for E1_ FRAMED and T1_FRAMED Kbps operation HSL framed operation uses these bits in a similar manner to single timeslot signaling to select 64 Kbps 56 Kbps or 48 Kbps operation that applies to all timeslots within the HSL link 0 1 48 bits 7 amp 8 not used Kbps 1 1 56 bit 8 not used Kbps Bit 12 sequence number length Set to 1 the HSL signaling link will use a 12 bit sequence number Set to 0 the HSL signaling link will use a 7 bit sequence number All other bits should be set to 0 For ATM only bits 0 is used Additional Prerequisites for ATM Monitoring The VPI and VCI ranges are statically defined in the initial configuration The VPI VCI range must be unique for all the virtual ports but constraints exist on the VPI and VCI value distribution as the total number of VPI VCI and cell stream combinations must be less than 65535 i e a 16bit range By default 3 bits are allocated for cell streams thus 13 bits are available for
331. meter NC SS7 Network Context This parameter identifies the SS7 network messages will be sent to Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed RAS The destination Remote Application Server to which messages will be sent This parameter is used only when DOMAIN AS The Remote Application Server associated with a Destination must be configured to be acting as a Local Signaling Gateway CP Logical identifier for a custom profile that may be used to modify the routing label AFTER the row in the destination table has been selected for routing If the parameter is set to NONE then there is no custom profile present The parameter is optional and will default to NONE DPC Destination Point Code If present the status of the configured DPC will be checked and the table row will only be selected if the DPC is available If available this DPC will be copied into the routing label of the message LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional 5 8 3 MRF_RK Message Router Routing Key Configuration Synopsis The MRF_RK command initiates a Message Router Routing Key Routing Keys are used to filter messages by matching the individual Routing Label fields from the received message with those contained in the Routing Key to determine the appropriate Destination Each Routing Key belongs
332. meter Values are blank or 1 99 When set to blank the full allocation of the server license is available to either M3UA or Network facing M2PA links however in this case both may not be configured at the same time Parameter Range Null or Number between 1 to 99 MAJOR The number of major alarms 340 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued MAP_SERVICE The MAP Web Service Parameter Range Mobile_Term_Transmit_Reqgs SMS Mobile Terminated Transmit Requests Mobile _Term_Receive_Reqs SMS Mobile Terminated Receive Requests USSD_Mobile_Init_Sessions USSD Mobile Init Sessions USSD_App_Init_Sessions USSD App Init Sessions USSD_Notify_ Reqs LBS Location Requests Location_Service_Reqs USSD Notify Requests Mobile_Orig_Transmit_Reqs SMS Mobile Originated Transmit Requests Mobile_Orig_Receive_Reqs SMS Mobile Originated Receive Requests MASK An IP network mask Parameter Range Null or IP Address of the form w x y z where w x y and z are between 0 255 MAXLIFE The maximum number of days allowed before a new password must be entered Parameter Range Null or Number between 1 to 600 MAXSIF Specifies the maximum size of a message transmitted For ISUP operation this should be 272 octets For BICC operating above M3UA a user may specify up to 544 octets to allow larger messages to be transmitted without the ne
333. min PASSWORD Di lOgic CONFIRM Di lOgic 145 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 1 6 ACUAE Account Control User Account End This command deletes a user account Syntax ACUAE USER Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Accounts gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Administration Access Example ACUAE USER operator1 6 1 7 ACUAI Account Control User Account I nitiate This command adds a user account Syntax ACUAI USER PASSWORD CONFIRM ACCESS Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Accounts gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Administration Access Prerequisites The character strings for the password and confirm parameters must be identical Example ACUAI USER operator1 PASSWORD Di lOgic CONFI RM Di Il0gic ACCESS operator 6 1 8 ACUAP Account Control User Account Configuration This command displays information related to user accounts In the output a PASSWORD and the associated CONFIRM value will be displayed as Syntax ACUAP Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Accounts gt Configuration 146 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example ACUAP Output Format Us
334. mmand OU BW YN Remove the USB device from the USB port 26 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 2 2 6 Installing Software Licenses This section describes how additional licenses are installed on a Signaling Server Each Signaling Server is licensed to run specific components of the protocol stack The STLCP command provides a printout that shows which components are licensed on a particular unit Each unit is uniquely identified by a unit identity value which is displayed as the UNITID parameter in the CNSYP command output For the SS7G41 SIU or SWS the License File purchased is a simple text file The contents of the file are similar to the following RVER localhost 0015B2A25066 NDOR dialogic E_SERVER EATURE SIU_G40 dialogic 1 000 permanent 4 HOSTID 00aabbccddee SIGN AAAA AAAA AAAA A6B6 17AC 42B4 1783 6300 B6A2 BF86 6AA8 507A 61A7 883E AAAA vn w a s VI U F J The BorderNet DSH license file is not the same as the SS7G41 and the two license file formats are different Installing the License by FTP or SFTP Transfer The procedure to install a license by FTP or SFTP transfer is as follows Note Secure FTP users will by default log into the parent directory of siguser and will then need to change to the ftpuser directory before commencing the following operation Most Secure FTP clients provide an option to configure the default initial direct
335. mmand in the config txt file and then execute the IPHNI command to load the configuration into the system To dynamically remove configuration first remove the IP_HOST command from the config txt file and then execute the IPHNE command to remove the configuration from the system Syntax IPHNI PHOST_NAME IPHNE PHOST_NAME Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt IP Host gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites There are no startup parse or configuration errors present in the alarm log Example IPHNI 1PHOST_NAME dsh 0015b2a48c04 IPHNE PHOST_NAME dsh 0015b2a48c04 6 7 19 IPHNP IP Host Configuration Print This command displays configuration related to an IP Token as configured by the IP_HOST command in config txt Syntax IPHNP IPHOST_NAME Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt IP Host gt Configuration 248 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Prerequisites If the IP Hostname is specified it must already have been initiated Example PHNP Output Format IP Host Configuration IPHOST NAME PTOKEN dsh 0015b2a48c04c Austin 6 7 20 MAUPI MAUPC MAUPE MAP USSD Profile Commands to initiate change and end configurations associated with MAP
336. mmand includes the following parameters NUM_HOSTS The number of hosts attached to the Signaling Server in the range 0 to 128 The specified number of hosts must be greater than or equal to the minimum number of host configured on the associated MMI command When NUM_HOSTS is set to 0 the Signaling Server disables all host access NUM_HOSTS should be set to 0 when the Signaling Server is acting as a Message Router and does not require Application Hosts When the NUM_HOSTS is set to ALL the Signaling Server configures the maximum number of hosts available in the system The system will then activate the minimum number of hosts required for operation as specified by the MMI command The rest are deactivated allowing you to dynamically activate or deactivate them using the MNINI and MNINE MML commands The default value for the minimum number of hosts is 1 BACKUP_HOST The backup host algorithm with of value of None O 1 or 2 as follows e When this parameter is set to None or 0 the Signaling Server does not employ the backup host mechanism e When set to a value of 1 primary and backup hosts are paired 0 1 2 3 4 5 etc If the link to host 0 fails messages are sent instead to host 1 and vice versa When the link recovers normal routing resumes Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e When set to a value of 2 primary and backup hosts are paired 0 32 1 33 2 34 etc If the link to host 0 fails
337. mmand shows the SCCP Loadshare tables defined on the system Selecting a particular ID field on the command will result in the following associated command being executed SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration CNLDP Syntax CNLTP Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNLTP Output Format SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration LST NC OPTIONS LST 5 NCO 0x00000001 LST 7 NC1 0x00000003 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_ TABLE defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 45 CNMLE SS7 Monitor Link End This command removes an SS7 Monitor Link Note SS7 Monitor Links are dynamically removed by first deleting the SS7 Monitor Link from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the SS7 Monitor Link from the system Syntax CNMLE MLINK Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Monitor Links gt Configuration 184 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SS7 Monitor Link has been initiated The SS7 Monitor Link is not present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or con
338. n 0 255 SYNCPRI PCM Synchronization priority Parameter Range Number between 0 to 32 SYSID User assigned long form system identity Null or Case sensitive text of length 0 to 31 May contain spaces chars will be converted to spaces SYSREF The system reference number Parameter Range Number between 0 to 999 357 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued SYSTYPE The operating mode of the system Parameter Range TEST Server Test Mode SIU Signaling Interface Unit SWS Signaling Web Server TACTIVE The duration since the peer has been activated 0 if this cannot be determined TCOM SNMP Trap community string Is passed in each trap to an external SNMP Manager Parameter Range Null or String of length 0 to 12 Must not contain any spaces TCONGC Total number of transactions that failed due to queue congestion TDMSHARE Only required to be set to a non blank value when both TDM and SIGTRAN links are configured at the same time This parameter is percentage share of the server license allocated to MTP2 links with the remaining percentage being available for SIGTRAN links Values are blank or 1 99 When set to blank the full allocation of the server license is available to either MTP2 or SIGTRAN links however in this case both may not be configured at the same time Parameter Range Null or Number between 1 to 99 TDOWN SNMP Trap actions in the DOWN state Pa
339. n 0 to 63 LIP1 The first Local IP Address Parameter Range An IP address entered as one of the following An PV4 Address A 15 character IPTOKEN string configured to map to an IP Address 338 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued LIP2 The second Local IP Address Parameter Range Null or IP address entered as one of the following An PV4 Address A 15 character IPTOKEN string configured to map to an IP Address LIUTYPE Specifies the physical type of interface required If displayed the value in brackets represents the alternative integer value that can be used when entering the LIU type during configuration of the PCM Note Use of the Buildout parameter is not relevant when high impedance is configured on a PCM Users are required to set it to a value of 0 for when either E1 high impedance or T1 high impedance is configured on the PCM Parameter Range T1 4 T1 E1 5 El balanced E1HIGHZ 6 E1 high impedance for monitoring applications T1HIGHZ 7 T1 high impedance for monitoring applications E1PMP 8 E1 protective monitoring point for monitoring applications T1PMP 9 T1 protective monitoring point for monitoring applications LOCAL_ IPADDR Local IP address Parameter Range Null or IP address entered as one of the following An PV4 Address An IPV6 Address LO
340. n Update Access Prerequisites The Circuit Group ID has not been initiated The Circuit Group is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Circuit Group is present in the config txt file 160 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNCGI GID 1 6 3 8 CNCGP Circuit Group Configuration This command displays circuit group configuration data Syntax CNCGP GID PAGE Web Management Location System Administration gt Call gt Circuit Groups gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNCGP CNCGP PAGE 2 CNCGP GID 0 CNCGP GID 0 PAGE 2 Output Format Circuit Group Configuration GGID NC OPC DPC 0 NCO 1 2 1 NCO 1 2 2 NCO 1 3 3 NCO 1 3 Circuit Group GID SSF US Configuration 0 0x8 0 1 0x8 0 2 0x8 0 3 0x8 0 0 32 64 96 Page 1 of 2 BCIC BCID 33 65 97 Page 2 of 2 CIC_MASK OxfffLfLELE OxffffffLE Oxfff LELE Oxfff LELE VARIANT ITU_2000 ITU_2000 ITU_2000 ITU_2000 OPTIONS 0x0000001c 0x0000001c 0x0000001c 0x0000001c ER_HOST USER_ID MNGT_HOST MNGT_ID MAINT_HOST MAINT_ID LABEL Oxld 0x1d Ox1d Oxld 0 0 0 0 Ox1d Ox1d Ox1ld Ox1ld 0 0 0 0 Ox1ld Ox1ld Ox1ld Ox1ld OPTIONS2 LABEL 0x00000000 0x0
341. n config txt to represent an Pv4 or IPv6 address e IPADDR An IPV4 or IPV6 address associated with an IP host Once operational additional IP tokens can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the IPHNI command IP Host names are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the IPHNE MMI command 4 2 IP_HOST IP Host Configuration Synopsis Command to configure an IP host Applicability Operating Mode DSH Syntax 1P_HOST IPHOST_NAME I PTOKEN Example P_HOST PHOST_NAME dsh 0015b2a48c04 IPTOKEN Austin Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Parameters This command includes the following parameters e IPHOST_ NAME A name that is used in system configuration to represent an Pv4 IPv6 address e IPTOKEN A token used within config txt to represent an Pv4 or IPv6 address 5 4 3 MULTI_NODE Multi Node Configuration Synopsis This command configures a Node within a Multi Node Cluster A Multi Node configuration is viewed using the CNMNP command After startup additional nodes can be dynamically added and removed using the CNMNI and CNMNE commands Applicability Operating Mode DSH Syntax MULTI_ NODE MNID MNMODE IPHOST_NAME Examples MULTI_ NODE MNID 1 MNMODE MASTER PHOST_NAME dsh 0015b2a48c04 Parameters This command includes the following parameters e MNID The Node id for nodes within a Multi Node cluster e
342. naling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 13 26 STTRP TCAP Resource Status This command shows the status of TCAP resources Syntax STTRP Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt TCAP Resources gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STTRP Output Format TCAP Resource Status ICD OGD INVK CPT DBUF 122 12233 2222 222 22 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e ICD Number of active incoming dialogs e OGD Number of active outgoing dialogs e INVK Number of active invokes e CPT Number of allocated component structures These are used temporarily for pending component requests until an appropriate dialog request is received e DBUF Number of allocated dialog buffers These are used temporarily for building dialog request messages from pending components 6 13 27 STUAP User Account Status This command displays which users are logged on and where Syntax STUAP Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt User Accounts gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STUAP 319 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format STUAP MMI Interface Port Configuration USER LOGGED_ON LABEL user2 2012 03 23 10 23 12 Telnet port 8100 siguser 2012 03 23 14 49 54 Telnet port 8101 user2 2012 03 23 12 23 21 Web MMI 6 14 C
343. nation Measurement c ecseceeeeeteeeeeenees 270 6 11 6 MSDHP DTS Host MeaSurementS cceccece cece eee reece eee eee ea teen teense teeta eae ea 271 6 11 7 MSFEP Flow Environment Measurements ccceeee cent ee eee eee ee ee eee na ened 272 6 11 8 MSHLP Host Link Measurements ce ceee cece eee eaten 273 6 11 9 MSHPP Diameter Peer Measurement ceceeeee cece eee ee eet nena teen e ea eaed 274 6 11 10MSLCP Software License Capability Measurements cceeeeeeeeeee eee 274 6 11 11MSLTP SCCP Loadshare Table Measurements 0 cccceeeee eset tees eee ee teenie 275 6 11 12MSMLP SS7 Monitor Link Measurement eeeeeee eee ene e eee teeta ea ed 276 6 11 13MSNIP Network Interface Measurement ccec eee eee ee eee e eee teeta ened 277 6 11 14MSOGP Message Router Origin Measurement ccceeee nent ee ee ee eee ee aes 278 6 11 15 MSPCP PCM Measurements cece teeter eee eae teen eed 279 6 11 16MSRAP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Measurements 06 000 280 6 11 17MSRKP Message Router Routing Key Measurement cceeeeeeeeeee eee 280 6 11 18MSRLP Remote Server Link Measurements c ccceeeee eee ee eee e neta teeta ened 281 6 11 19MSSLP SS7 Link Measurement cece erent eee teeta 282 6 11 20MSSRP SIGTRAN Route Measurements cccece eect eee ee eee tees neta teat teen ees 284 6 11 21MSSTP
344. ne in the configuration file The following conventions apply e Each line starts with a keyword and is followed by a number of lt parameters gt e Items in square brackets are optional e The first in a line indicates that the remainder of the line is a comment with no syntactical significance to the operation of the Signaling Server Each lt parameter gt may be e A numeric value specified in decimal format for example 1234 or in hexadecimal format by prefixing the value with Ox for example 0x4d2 e Specified as bit field values where each bit set to 1 specifies a particular configuration option The least significant bit is designated bit 0 e A token where the possible values are defined in the relevant section Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 1 2 Dynamic Configuration Dynamic configuration is a feature supported by the Signaling Server providing a user with the ability to add or remove configuration elements on the unit without affecting the status of other elements and without the need for a system restart The update to the configuration is achieved by allowing a user to 1 Modify the configuration file and transfer it into the unit via FTP 2 Apply the appropriate MML command to update the configuration of the unit This allows users to modify configuration by adding or removing resources at runtime without the need to apply a system restart to the unit In the ca
345. nection is made manually to allow the Client accept the SWS Host Key Using Linux and OpenSSH The following script initiates a single SSH tunnel The SSH Client exits rather than attempting to re establish the tunnel should the IP link be interrupted or the SIU restarted so the loop ensures that the SSH client is restarted This configuration may also be used with Solaris and Sun SSH tunnel sh contains bin sh tunnel sh configures a SSH tunnel to the SWS 1 while true do ssh 1 ftpuser i ssh priv_key N C L 9000 1 9000 1 done The tunnel script is started prior to starting the GCT environment with the command tunnel sh lt SWS IP Address gt 33 Chapter 3 Access Control and Security 34 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 4 System Management The Signaling Server supports the MMI Console A console based interface over telnet or serial port to configure and manage the system Also provides easy access to diagnostic and statistics from the system This manual provides a complete definition of the MMI commands and parameters as well as providing examples of their use e Web Interface The Web management interface provides an alternative management interface the MMI console This interface architecturally sits on top of the MMI interface and is intended to provide the user with a graphical alternative to that interface The Web management interface is intended to be essenti
346. ned Entity gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MRCEP Output Format Message Router Concerned Entity Configuration CONCID NC DPC CONC_DOMAIN CONC_NC CONC_ENT ALIAS 0 NCO 44343434 NETWORK NCO 2332 1 NCO 123233 AS NCO ANY 6 10 4 MRCPE Message Router Custom Profile End The command removes a new Custom Profile Note Configuration may be dynamically removed by 1 Deleting a configuration command MRF_CP entry from the config txt file 2 Executing the MRCPE MMI command to unload it from the system Syntax MRCPE CP 257 Chapter 6 Management Commands Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Custom Profile gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The Custom Profile has been initiated The Custom Profile is not present in the config txt file The Custom Profile is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Custom Profile is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example MRCPE CP 1 6 10 5 MRCPI Message Router Custom Profile I nitiate This command adds a new Custom Profile Note Configuration may be
347. nfiguration All other bits are reserved and should be set to zero e OPC The local signaling point code for this link set 73 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 74 e LABEL Optional user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes e SSF The value to be used in the sub service field of level 3 messages for this link set The valid range is O to 15 For ANSI operation the two least significant bits B and A must be set to 1 to assign a message priority of 3 to all MTP3 generated messages The remaining two bits are the network indicators bits C and D Note For correct Signaling Server operation the adjacent point code must also appear in an MTP_ROUTE declaration MTP Link set configuration is viewed using the CNLSP MMI command After startup additional Link Sets can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNLSI command Link Sets are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNLSE MMI command 6 3 MTP_LINK MTP Signaling Link Synopsis The MTP_LINK command allows the user to configure terminated links for HSL LSL M2PA and ATM signaling The parameters required and their usage is different for each mode of operation Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE M2PA LINKSET REF SLC BLINK OPTIONS 0x0006 LABEL MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE TDM LINKSET REF SLC
348. nfiguration measurements and status that are associated with an object Particular objects also allow actions such as add delete change block and reset 4 1 1 DSH Flow Management Menu This menu offers access to the DSH Flow Management and Routing control functionality Flow Design and Management Flexible flow configuration and message manipulation at the AVP level for multiple protocols Routing Rule Design and Management Allows control of Diameter based routing actions Audit Trail View previous user actions and activity on the unit Overview Provides a summary of the flows and flow status on the unit Dashboard Provides system wide and flow specific graphs of transaction rates and transaction success rates 37 Chapter 4 System Management 38 The Flow Management and Routing functionality of the product are covered in more detail in the BorderNet Diameter Services Helix Flow Management Manual Note This menu is not visible for SIU or SWS SS7G41 operating modes or for DSH when in TEST mode DSH 2014 09 30 10 00 34 ORT 1 MALO MNR 0 BorderNet Diameter Services Helix System Administration Session Options Flow Manaqement Operations Flow Design amp Management Configuratio Routing Rule Design amp Management Audit Trall System Type oe Overview 399 Node System ID System Reference O Up Time 23 49 18 Warning Alarms Minor Alarms Major Alarms Critical Alarms i Refresh The example shown below
349. ng should be the same as that for other rows Output Format SS7G40 SIU System Configuration UNITID 0014b2a2ee2c NODE sysnode SYSID normal system_id SYSREF 0 CONTACT acontact address com LOCATION normal location LEDID N TRACELOG DUAL TRACEFMT DUAL TDMSHARE M3UASHARE 50 LINES 0 TLO 30 DEBUG N 6 3 85 CNSYS Configuration System Set This command changes the system level parameters Syntax CNSYS NODE SYSI D SYSREF CONTACT LOCATION LINES TLO DSE LEDI D TRACELOG TRACEFMT TDMSHARE M3UASHARE PDISPLAY Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt System gt Configuration 210 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites DSE can only be activated if the SDP license is present Cannot set TRACELOG to host or dual if there is no management host Example CNSYS SYSID Wilma 6 3 86 CNTDP Time and Date Configuration This command displays out the system date and time whether NTP is active and to display the OFFSET from UTC configured changes Syntax CNTDP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt System Time gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNTDP Output Fo
350. ng the CNDUP MMI command and status and measurement for the link to the partner Signaling Server read using the STRLP and MSRLP commands 5 5 Physical I nterface Commands 5 64 The physical interface commands include e SS7_BOARD SS7 Board Configuration e LIU_CONFIG Line Interface Configuration e STREAM_XCON Cross Connect Configuration e ATM_CELL_STREAM ATM Cell Stream Configuration 5 1 SS7_BOARD SS7 Board Configuration Synopsis The SS7_ BOARD command configures a Dialogic DSI SS7 Network Interface Board and its PCM ports Note Prior to the use of this command the board must first be configured using the CNBOS MMI where the correct board type should be associated with the board and the system restarted This configuration is required so that a physical board can be associated with a logical board position This operation is part of the initial system configuration and therefore normally no action is required of the user If a board is subsequently replaced however the CNBOS must be used to initially set the board type to NONE and then back to the correct board type and the system restarted so that the operating software is updated with the new hardware configuration Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SS7_BOARD BPOS BRDTYPE OPTIONS Examples SS7_BOARD BPOS 0 BRDTYPE SS7LD OPTIONS 0x0001 Parameters The SS7_ BOARD command includes the following parameters Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G
351. ng the group from the config txt file Example CNLDE LSTSEQ 1 6 3 37 CNLDI SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration This command adds a new SCCP Loadshare DPC Note Configuration may be dynamically added by 1 Entering an additional configuration command SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_ DPC in the config txt file 2 Executing the CNLDI MMI command to load that configuration 179 Chapter 6 Management Commands Syntax CNLDI LSTSEQ Web Management Location System Administration gt SCCP gt Load Share Tables gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The SCCP Loadshare DPC ID has not been initiated The SCCP Loadshare DPC is present in the config txt file Example CNLDI LSTSEQ 1 6 3 38 CNLDP SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration This command shows the SCCP Loadshare tables defined on the system Syntax CNLDP Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNLDP Output Format SCCP Loadshare DPC Configuration LSTSEQ DPC LST 5 0 2222 LST 5 1 2223 LST 6 0 1011 LST 6 1 1014 LST 6 2 1015 LST 7 0 1011 Lot T 1 1013 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 180 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers
352. ntaining the OPC will be considered to match the aspect of the origin RKTAB Logical Identifier for the table of Routing Keys associated with this Origin A number in the range 0 49 104 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 CP Logical identifier for a custom profile that may be used to modify the routing label AFTER the routing table has been determined for routing If the parameter is omitted or set to NONE then there is no custom profile present The parameter is optional and will default to NONE LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional 5 8 2 MRF_DE Message Router Destination Configuration Synopsis The MRF_DE command initiates a Message Route Destination Destinations can be used to route traffic to a Remote Application Server in the AS DOMAIN to the SS7 Network in the NETWORK DOMAIN or to a local user application in the UPART DOMAIN where the destination module id will be determined by Network Context and Service Indicator in the message to be transmitted The command may also router traffic to a DOMAIN of PARTNER Traffic routed to a partner Signaling Server will be considered on the receiving signaling server to be either from the original NETWORK AS or USER domains of the transmitting Signaling Server A Destination is selected as a result of a Routing Key match The hunting algorithm use to search thro
353. ntered by the alarm MIB or ona per DSMI object basis such that the remote SNMP manager is notified whenever a DSMI object e g SS7 link is created destroyed or the object state changes By default per object state change traps will be generated towards a configured SNMP manager The DSMIEVENT field on the CNSNx MMI command can be used to configure the generation of per object traps alarm traps or both alarm and per object traps If per object traps are configured the CNOBx MMI command can be used to configure whether simple DSMI object state change traps are generated or both configuration as well as state change traps are sent For details of the DSMI SNMP MIB supported alarms SNMP traps and configuration refer to the Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SNMP User Manual 4 7 Lights Out Management Lights Out Management allows you to monitor and manage the Signaling Server remotely using a dedicated management channel regardless of whether the server is powered on A remote management interface is included with the Dialogic DSI Signaling Server model 4 7 1 Using the Remote Management I nterface The remote management interface uses the eth3 interface on the Signaling Server and has the following default IP network configuration e IP address 192 168 0 2 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 e Gateway none The eth3 interface is shared between the operating system and the management module The interface has two MAC addresses and two IP addresses
354. nts are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSHTP RESET PAGE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt HLR gt HLR Tx gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSHTP MSHTP PAGE 2 MSHTP PROFILE 2 MSHTP RESET Y Output Format MAP HLR Tx Services Measurements Page 1 of 2 MAP_ SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD Tx_Alert_SC 0 0 01 29 16 MAP HLR Tx Services Measurements Page 2 of 2 PROFILE MAP_ SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 Tx_Alert_SC 0 0 01 29 16 288 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with a MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 6 11 25 MSORP MAP MO SMS Rx Measurements Command to display traffic measurements associated with MAP Received MO SMS Services Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP service When a profile is specified Page 2
355. oard in a signaling server the configuration Figure 5 would be as follows For Signaling Server A MTP3 Options Configuration MTP_CONFIG NC NC0 OPTIONS 0 MTP_CONFIG lt SS7 Link Set Configuration MTP_LINKSET NC NCO LINKSET OPC APC NLINKS 2 SSF 0x8 OPTIONS 0 LABEL MTP_LINKSET LINKSET 0 OPC 100 APC 100 NLINKS 1 OPTIONS 0x8000 LABEL To_Partner MTP_LINKSET LINKSET 1 OPC 100 APC 200 NLINKS 1 OPTIONS 0x0000 LABEL To_Network SS7 Link Configuration MTP_LINK LINK IFTYPE LINKSET REF SLC BPOS BLINK STREAM TS OPTIONS 0x00000006 LABEL MTP_LINK LINK 0 IFTYPI LINKSET 0 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 1 STREAM 3 TS 1 OPTIONS 0x00000006 MTP_LINK LINK 1 IFTYPE TDM LINKSET 1 REF 0 SLC 0 BPOS 0 BLINK 2 STREAM 0 TS 16 OPTIONS 0x00000006 MTP route Configuration MTP_ROUTE NC NC0 C7RT DPC LS1 UPMASK 0x0028 OPTIONS 0 LS2 0 LABEL MTP_ROUTE C7RT 0 DPC 100 LS1 0 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0000 LABEL To_Partner MTP_ROUTE C7RT 1 DPC 200 LS1 1 UPMASK 0x0020 OPTIONS 0x0001 LS2 0 LABEL To_Network E E 378 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 For Signaling Server B MT MT MT P_LINK LINK IFTYP P_LINK LINK 0 IFTY P_LINK LINK 1 IFTY MTP3 Options Configuration MTP_CONFIG NC NC0O OPT
356. oards The following table shows the permitted values and their meaning Value Usage for SS7MD Board Usage for SS7LD Board 0 Setting for E1 devices Setting for E1 devices 1 T1 Default short haul T1 Default short haul 2 T1 short haul 0 133 ft T1 short haul O 110 ft 3 T1 short haul 133 266 ft T1 short haul 110 220 ft 4 T1 short haul 266 399 ft T1 short haul 220 230 ft 5 T1 short haul 399 533 ft T1 short haul 330 440 ft 6 T1 short haul 533 655 ft T1 short haul 440 550 ft 7 not valid T1 short haul 550 600 ft 8 T1 long haul LBO OdB T1 long haul LBO 0dB 9 T1 long haul LBO 7 5dB not valid 10 T1 long haul LBO 15dB not valid 12 T1 long haul LBO 22 5dB not valid 67 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 68 OPTIONS A 16 bit value used to configure run time configuration This field is reserved for future used and should be set to 0 e LABEL Optional user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes PCM configuration is viewed using the CNPCP MMI command and its status and measurements read using the STPCP and MSPCP MMI commands After startup additional PCMs can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNPCI command PCMs are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNPCE MMI command 5 3 STREAM_XCON Cross Connect Configuration Synopsis
357. od of time When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSSYP RESET Y Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt System gt Stats 285 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSSYP Output Format System Measurements NOVLD 0 MAX LOAD 28 81 LOADAVG 2 28 PERIOD 18 36 55 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e NOVLD the number of periods of overload e MAX_LOAD maximum load average measurement taken over 1 minute e LOADAVG the average load on the system e PERIOD the period the measurement was taken over 6 11 23 MSHRP MAP HLR Rx Measurements Command to display traffic measurements for Receive MAP HLR Services Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP service When a profile is specified Page 2 measurements are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSHRP RESET PAGE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt HLR gt HLR Rx gt Stats Applicability
358. odule processing TPORT SNMP destination port for SNMP Traps Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 TQUIESCE SNMP Trap actions in the QUIESCED state Parameter Range ALL Any event when the object is in this state will result in a trap NONE No event when the object is in this state will result in a trap CREATE Configuration events resulting in a transition to this state will result in a trap CHANGE Change events in this state will result in a trap DESTROY Configuration change events in this state will result in a trap TRACEFMT Identifies the format used for trace messages sent to file Parameter Range TEXT Trace messages will be logged to file in TEXT format PCAP Trace messages will be logged to file in PCAP format DUAL Trace messages will be logged to file in both PCAP and TEXT format TRACELOG Identifies where trace messages should be logged Parameter Range FILE Trace messages will be locally logged to file but not transmitted to a management host HOST Trace messages will be transmitted to a management host but not locally logged to file DUAL Trace messages will be locally logged to file and transmitted to a management host TRACELVL Flow environment debug trace level Number from 0 to 6 TRANS Total number of successful transactions 360 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued TR
359. of that port to the failover adapter enabling it to act as the active port in the team Data loss may occur between the actual failure of an IP connect and the detection of that failure and subsequent switching to the standby port All adapters in a team should be connected to the same hub or switch with Spanning Tree STP set to off Whenever bonding is activated or deactivated MMI sessions using those ports are reset Once configured the status of Ethernet ports in a bonded team may be checked using the STNIP Status Network Interface command 367 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines 7 3 Sharing Licensed Throughput Between Protocols and Networks The SIU and SWS license SKUs identified in Section 2 1 2 Supported Licenses on page 20 identify a throughput element in terms of link equivalents If the system is configured to use both TDM and SIGTRAN or configured to use more than one Network Context then a portion of the license must be allocated to TDM M3UA and M2PA as applicable If M3UA is split across multiple Network Context the M3UA portion of the license must further be split with a portion allocated to each Network Context When both TDM and SIGTRAN signaling are required on the server then the TDMSHARE parameter on the CNSYS MMI command should be specified to indicate the percentage share of the throughput aspect of the license that should be allocated to TDM signaling with the remainder being available to SIGTRAN
360. ogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 7 SIGTRAN Configuration Commands The SIGTRAN commands include e STN_CONFIG SIGTRAN Configuration e STN_LAS SIGTRAN Local Application Server Configuration e STN_LINK SIGTRAN Link Configuration e STN_RAS SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration e STN_RASLIST SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Configuration e STN_ROUTE SIGTRAN Route Configuration e STN_RSGLIST SIGTRAN Route Signaling Gateway List Configuration e STN_LBIND SIGTRAN Local Bind Configuration e SCTP_TIMER SIGTRAN SCTP Timers e M2PA_TIMER SIGTRAN M2PA Timers e M3UA_TIMER SIGTRAN M3UA Timers 5 7 1 STN_ CONFIG SIGTRAN Configuration Synopsis This command identifies the Network Context and point code size to be used by M3UA Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax STN_CONFIG NC NC0 SS7MODE OPTIONS 0 SHARE 100 Example STN_CONFIG NC NC0 SS7MODE ITU14 SHARE 50 STN_CONFIG NC NC1 SS7MODE ITU14 SHARE 50 Parameters The STN_NC command has the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context uniquely identifies a SS7 network Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 SWS operation can only use NCO 89 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 90 e SS7MODE The SS7 mode of the network context Possible values are ITU14 ITU 14 bit operation ITU16 ITU 16 bit operation ITU24 ITU 24 bit operation ANSI ANSI 24 bit operation OPTIONS
361. ols on the Signaling Server This command should only be used if the SCCP and TCAP software has been licensed and configured on the Signaling Server A SCCP_CONFIG command for NCO must be configured prior to configuring SCCP_CONFIG commands for other Network Contexts Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCCP_CONFIG NC NC0O OPC SSF OPTIONS 0 OPTIONS2 0x00000001 Example SCCP_CONFIG NC NCO OPC 123 Parameters The SCCP_CONFIG command includes the following parameters NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network for which SCCP is being configured Supported values are NC1 NC2 and NC3 e OPC The local point code of the Signaling Server e SSF The sub service field value that SCCP uses when exchanging messages with the MTP This must always be set so that the Network Indicator bits the two most significant bits of the 4 bit ssf value match those set in the MTP_LINKSET command 116 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e OPTIONS A 32 bit value containing run time options for the operation of the SCCP module The 16 most significant bits provide ext_options as defined in the SCCP Programmer s Manual Bit 0 should always be set to 0 Bit 1 should always be set to 1 Bit 20 should be set to 1 when using SCCP in conjunction with DTS and dual resilient configuration The meaning of the remaining bits are as defined for the option
362. ommand Parameters Table 1 Command Parameters Dialog hunt mode Parameter Range CYCLIC 0 Cyclic Selection BALANCED 1 Load Balanced Selection SEQUENTIAL 2 Sequential Selection AC The application context Parameter Range String of length 4 to 34 Must not contain any spaces AC_REF A logical identifier for this application context Parameter Range Number from 0 to 1023 ACCESS The name of an access profile that can be applied to a user giving them particular access privileges Parameter Range String of length 1 to 15 Must not contain any spaces ACTIVE Determines whether something is active Y or inactive N An example of its use is the activation or deactivation of trace masks see the CNTMS command ADDR_FMT Address Format Parameter Range PDU 0 If configured to use ITU T PDU formats options bit 1 not set use ITU T Q 713 SCCP address format If configured to use ANSI PDU formats options bit 1 set use ANSI T1 112 SCCP address format 1TU14 1 ITU 14 bit operation ITU24 2 ITU 24 bit operation ANSI14 3 ANSI 14 bit operation ANSI24 4 ANSI 24 bit operation 320 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued ADDR_TYPE The type of IP address and how it was derived Parameter Range STATIC_IPV4 IPV4 Address entered through configuration STATIC_IPV6 Global PV6 Address entered thr
363. ommand is used IPGWI PGW 1 GATEWAY 192 168 0 255 IPNW DEFAULT The current settings may be displayed by entering the appropriate commands IPNIP IPNIP NETIF ETHO IPGWP The configuration is displayed in the following format lt ipnip Network Interface Configuration ETIF LABEL tho thi th2 th3 XECUTED 2 Hooo o lt ipnip netif eth0 Network Interface Configuration NETIF eth0 IP4ADDR 192 168 0 1 24 IP6ADDR BOND NONE LABEL EXECUTED lt ipgwp IP Gateway Configuration IPGW GATEWAY IPNW 0 192 168 0 255 DEFAULT EXECUTED The new IP address parameters are initialized with immediate effect If the IP address used to login to the unit for the telnet session is changed you are automatically logged out of the session You can however login again without delay using the new IP address Note Network infrastructure may introduce a delay while MAC addresses and newly configured IP addresses are reconciled The Ethernet connection should be verified by attempting to ping the Signaling Server from a computer connected to the same Ethernet network using the following command ping 192 168 0 1 If the Signaling Server has been configured correctly it responds to the ping and the host machine displays a message confirming communication with the Signaling Server the exact format and response of this message is operating system dependent Dialogic DS
364. on applies When GTTSRC LOCAL the command only applies for messages generated by a local sub system i e Outgoing messages When GTTSRC REMOTE the command only applies to messages passed up to SCCP from the network i e Incoming messages If GTTSRC ANY or the parameter is omitted the command applies to all messages GWADDR Gateway Address Digits Parameter Range Case sensitive string containing 0 9 a b or c characters of length 1 to 30 330 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued GWNP Gateway Numbering Plan Parameter Range Unknown ISDN Reserved2 Data Telex ServiceCentreS pecific5 ServiceCentreS pecific6 Reserved7 National Private ERMES Reserved11 Reserved12 Reserved13 Reserved14 Reserved GWTON Gateway Type Of Number Parameter Range Unknown International National NetworkSpecific Subscriber Alphanumeric AbbreviatedNumber Reserved HDPR Identifier of the Helix Diameter Peer HLRADDR HLR Address Digits Parameter Range Case sensitive string containing 0 9 a b or c characters of length 1 to 30 331 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued HLRNP HLR Numbering Plan Parameter Range Unknown ISDN Reserved2 Data Telex ServiceCentreS pecific5 ServiceCentreS pecific6 Reserved7 National Private ERMES Reserved11 Reserve
365. ons Please see http www dialogic com company terms of use aspx for more details Due to differing national regulations and approval requirements certain Dialogic products may be suitable for use only in specific countries and thus may not function properly in other countries You are responsible for ensuring that your use of such products occurs only in the countries where such use is suitable For information on specific products contact Dialogic Inc at the address indicated below or on the web at www dialogic com It is possible that the use or implementation of any one of the concepts applications or ideas described in this document in marketing collateral produced by or on web pages maintained by Dialogic may infringe one or more patents or other intellectual property rights owned by third parties Dialogic does not provide any intellectual property licenses with the sale of Dialogic products other than a license to use such product in accordance with intellectual property owned or validly licensed by Dialogic and no such licenses are provided except pursuant to a signed agreement with Dialogic More detailed information about such intellectual property is available from Dialogic s legal department at 6700 de la Cote de Liesse Road Suite 100 Borough of Saint Laurent Montreal Quebec Canada H4T 2B5 Dialogic encourages all users of its products to procure all necessary intellectual property licenses required to implement any concepts or ap
366. onto the system Syntax CNRAI RAS Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Servers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN RAS has not been initiated The SIGTRAN RAS is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN RAS is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNRAI RAS 1 6 3 57 CNRAP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration This command displays the configuration of SIGTRAN Remote Application Servers on the system Syntax CNRAP 192 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Servers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNRAP Output Format SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration RAS NC DPC RC NASP OPTIONS LABEL 1 NCO 2200 1 1 0x0000 2 NC1 2300 2 1 0x0000 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command STN_RAS for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 58 CNRDI Configuration Restore Default I nitiate This command restores the protocol configuration config txt file to the original default The file do
367. or IN_dialogue_open API function This reference is used instead of the destination or origination address parameter Applicability SIU Syntax INAP_FE lt NC gt lt FE_REF gt lt OPTIONS gt lt SCCP_ADDR gt Example INAP_FE 0x00000007 0x01 0x430100 0 INAP_FE NC1 0x00000008 0x01 0x430200 0 Parameters The INAP_FE command includes the following parameters NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network the FE is being configured for Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 When not specified a value of NCO is assumed FE_REF Logical identifier for this Functional Entity FE in the range 0 to 127 max 128 with a maximum of 32 identifiers per Network Context e OPTIONS A 16 bit FE options value Bit O set to 1 identifies a local FE Other bits should be set to 0 e SCCP_ADDR The SCCP address of the local FE in Q 713 format commencing with the address indicator as a string of hex characters up to 18 characters in length The Signaling Server supports up to 32 functional entities 140 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 16 4 INAP_AC INAP Application Context Synopsis This command is used to configure the INAP Application Context AC records for use These control the application context negotiation that the module conducts during dialog establishment All supported application contexts must be individually configured usin
368. or M2PA 3 For M3UA set to 1 when the NA parameter value will be used Not applicable for M2PA 4 When set to zero the Signaling Server end of the link is acting as an Application Server Process When set to one the Signaling Server is acting as a Signaling Gateway in which case bit 2 of the options must be set to zero When set to 1 the SIGTRAN link may only be used to connect to a Remote Application Server Bit 3 of the associated STN_ RAS command s options field should also be set 5 When this bit is set the server ignores NA parameters in received messages M3UA can therefore be configured to not send a NA and ignore any NA it receives 6 When set M3UA heartbeats will be enabled for this association 7 When set designates the path associated with the first remote IP address RIP1 as the primary SCTP path that is available and will always be used 8 When set disables use of the Nagle algorithm to ensure that outgoing packets are transmitted without delay 9 When set disables the path of MTU discovery and selects a fixed MTU value of 1438 10 14 Reserved and should be set to zero 15 When set a M3UA link is nominated by M3UA as a host link If any SIGTRAN links have been configured as host M3UA links and all these links are down then all MTP and any non host M3UA links will be deactivated until at least one host M3UA link returns to service e RSG Remote Signaling Gateway RSG Identifies a remote server
369. or a custom profile that may be used to modify the routing label AFTER the routing key has been matched and the destination table has been determined for routing If the parameter is set to NONE then there is no custom profile present The parameter is optional and defaults to NONE LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional 5 8 4 MRF_CP Message Router Custom Profile Configuration Synopsis The MRF_CP command initiates a Custom Profile which can be used by an Origin Routing Key or Destination to modify the routing label of messages passing through the Message Router Syntax MRF_CP CP OPC DPC NI SI LABEL Example MRF_CP CP 1 OPC 1423 DPC 2322 Parameters CP Logical identifier for the custom profile in the range 0 4095 OPC If the value is not NONE then the OPC specified will replaced the OPC in the message the profile is being applied to This parameter is optional and defaults to NONE DPC If the value is not NONE then the DPC specified will replaced the DPC in the message the profile is being applied to This parameter is optional and defaults to NONE If the value is not NONE then the Network Indicator specified will replaced the Network Indicator in the message the profile is being applied to This parameter is optional and defaults to NONE SI If the value is not NONE then the
370. or configuration errors present The Routing Key is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example MRRKI RKI 1 263 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 10 14 MRRKE Message Router Routing Key End The command removes a new Routing Key Note Configuration may be dynamically removed by 1 Deleting a configuration command MRF_RK entry from the config txt file 2 Executing the MRRKE MMI command to unload it from the system Syntax MRRKE RKI Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Routing Key gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The Routing Key has been initiated The Routing Key is not present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Routing Key is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example MRRKE RKI 1 6 10 15 MRRKI Message Router Routing Key Initiate This command adds a new Routing Key Note Configuration may be dynamically added by 1 Entering an additional configuration command MRF_RK in the config txt file 2 Executing the MRRKI MMI command to load that configuration Syntax MRRKI RKI Web
371. ore detail of Management of Access to the Web interface 35 Chapter 4 System Management Once a user has entered the URL of the Signaling Server on a Web browser they will either optionally be requested to enter their user name and password or they will presented with the default landing page of the Signaling Server This landing page requests a that a user login for a management session Up to eight users may log into the Web interface at a time A user will automatically be logged out after a period of time if the system detects there has been no activity in the browser session The screenshot below shows the session landing page Operations Once a user has logged into a session the follow appears SS7G41 SIUA System Administration Software Server Management Access Control Diagnostics DSI Hosts A page on Web management interface consists of the status bar a Navigation and Control bar and a data table The data tables report the same configuration status and measurements that are provided over the MMI interface 36 Session Options M3UA Protocol Links Local Servers Remote Servers Remote Server Links Routes Remote Gateways Local Binds SIGTRAN Timers Dialogic Signaling Server SS7G41 SIUA User siguser Password Submit Cancel 2013 09 27 10 10 02 Dialogic Signaling Server Operations Configuration Status Stats System Configuration Unit Identity 0015b2a1f8ac Unit Serial Number System
372. ors Manual Issue 11 MSHRP MAP HLR Rx Measurements MSHTP MAP HLR Tx Measurements MSORP MAP MO SMS Rx Measurements MSOTP MAP MO SMS Tx Measurements MSRTP MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile Measurements MSSPP MAP Subscriber Profiling Measurements MSTRP MAP MT SMS Rx Measurements MSTTP MAP MT SMS Tx Measurements MSUPP MAP USSD Measurements 11 1 MSACP ATM Cell Stream Traffic Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for ATM Cell Streams When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSACP RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt Cell Streams gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSACP MSACP RESET Y Output Format ATM Cell Stream Traffic Measurements CELLSTR RXFRAME RXOCT RXDISC RXERR TXFRAME TXOCT TXDISC TXERR PERIOD 1 700 15430 0 0 721 14322 1 O 01 00 00 2 10 80 0 0 11 90 0 O0 01 00 00 3 356 8220 0 0 321 7211 0 O 01 00 00 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows CELLSTR ATM Cell Stream ID as configured in config txt file RXFRAME Number of valid AAL5 frames received RXOCT Number of data octets received RXDISC Number of received AAL5 frames discarded RXERR Number of frames with errors received 267 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 268 TXFRAME Number of
373. ory If available users may choose to use this instead of manually changing to the ftpuser subdirectory The license file should be installed on the Signaling Server product s as follows 1 Rename the purchased FTP SFTP license file to sgw lic SIU SWS or helix hlx BorderNet DSH only 2 Establish an FTP SFTP session 3 Set the FTP SFTP transfer mode to ASCII since the license file is a text file 4 Transfer the software license to the Signaling Server by typing the command for example out sgw lic sgw lic Note The Signaling Server uses a case sensitive file system Therefore it is necessary to specify sgw lic in lowercase 5 Terminate the FTP STP session by entering quit or bye 6 Establish an MML session and restart the unit by typing the MNRSI command The machine then boots and completes the upgrade Once the upgrade is complete the machine is accessible via the MML interface 7 Check the licenses using STLCP command If the licensing upgrade fails the unit restores the previous licensing level Further licenses can be added at a later date 27 Cha pter 2 Licensing Installation and Initial Configuration 2 3 Configuration 28 Once the system architecture and protocol configuration is known it is necessary to set this configuration in the Signaling Server by editing the config txt file See Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines for details This can be transferred to the Signa
374. ough configuration LOCAL_ PV6 Local IPV6 Address for a particular Network Interface AISGEN The mode used to generate the Alarm Indication Signal Blue alarm ALTMSU APC ALTMSU MSUs Sent to Alternate Peer Number of messages redirected to an alternative peer Adjacent Point Code Parameter Range Number between 0 to 16777215 ASC AUTH AUTO Automatically acknowledge AlertSC indications This is the default value OFF Always reject MAN Enable user access of AlertSC via web service API If this option is set user is required to retrieve AlertSC indications if not retrieved before timeout they will be rejected V3 SNMP Authentication encryption protocol used to ensure that V3 SNMP requests have not been modified during transit Parameter Range NONE SHA MD5 AUTHPASS Identifies the authentication password for an SNMP User Account The authentication protocol parameter must be present Parameter Range Null or Password string of length 1 to 19 AVG_PING AVG_PING Average Ping The average time in milliseconds the set of pings took to reach and return from the target IP node 321 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued BACKUP_HOST BAK_DUAL The backup host algorithm The ability to configure backup hosts allows management and or signaling messages to be redirected to a backup host application in the event of prima
375. ove an Origin first remove the MRF_OG command from the config txt file and then execute the MROGE command to remove the configuration from the system Syntax MROGE OGID Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Origin gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access 261 Chapter 6 Management Commands Prerequisites The Origin has been initiated The Origin is not present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present in the alarm log In order to dynamically remove an Origin there must be at least one other active Origin using the same NC DOMAIN SI combination Example MROGE OGID 1 6 10 11 MROGI Message Router Origin Configuration 6 Command to dynamically add a new Message Router Origin To dynamically add a new Origin first add a new MRF_OG command in the config txt file and then execute the MROGI command to load the configuration into the system Syntax MROGI OGI D Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Origin gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites There are no startup parse or configuration errors present in the alarm log The Origin is present in the config txt file In order to dynamically add an Origin there must already be at least one active Origin using the same N
376. owing parameters e NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context together with a Signaling Point Code SPC uniquely identify an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e GID The unique logical identifier of the circuit group within the Signaling Server This parameter should be in the range 0 to one less than the maximum number of circuit groups that ISUP processes set by the ISUP_CONFIG lt num_grps gt parameter e DPC The Destination Point Code DPC at which the voice circuits in this group terminate e BCIC The Circuit Identification Code CIC that is allocated to the first circuit in the circuit group e BCID The logical ID for the first circuit in the circuit group It must lie in the range 0 to one less than the number of circuits supported e CIC MASK Each circuit group may contain up to 32 circuits Setting bits in lt cic_mask gt identifies the circuits allocated to the circuit group The least significant bit bit 0 corresponds to the first CIC and must always be set Bit n in the lt cic_mask gt corresponds to circuit identification code lt base_cic gt n and circuit identifier lt base_cid gt n If the bit is not set then this CIC and CID can instead be allocated to a different circuit group Note A single circuit group may not span more than 32 CICs e OPTIONS A 32 bit value where each b
377. p system files identified above or to install a new text configuration file using FTP rather than from portable media In this case they should ftp the files onto the unit using the procedures defined in this manual 53 Chapter 4 System Management 54 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 Configuration Commands 5 1 Overview Initial SIU protocol and physical interface configuration is determined by a text file containing the parameters that are specific to a particular installation It is necessary for you to modify this file to configure the unit for the desired operation After this initial configuration the unit must be restarted before the configuration is applied Modifications to the configuration require that the text file be updated If the modifications are to configuration elements capable of dynamic configuration see Section 5 1 2 Dynamic Configuration on page 57 an update can take place without impact to other configuration elements in the system If the configuration command cannot be dynamically configured the Signaling Server requires a restart before the configuration updates can take effect To simplify entry of IP addresses and avoid the need to type the same IP address multiple times the user can define tokens to represent IP addresses This is achieved using the I P_TOKEN IP Token command An IP host name used in the multi node configuration can be configured using the P_H
378. plays the status of the configured Inter SIU Ethernet links Syntax STRLP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Dual Operation gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access MMI Prerequisites The SIU must be a member of a dual pair Example STRLP Output Format Remote SIU Link Status LINKID RSI_STATUS LOCAL_TIPADDR REMOTE_IPADDR 0 ACTIVE 192 168 0 126 9000 192 168 0 126 39005 Possible RSI_STATUS values are ACTIVE FAILED DEACTIVATED 6 13 18 STSLP SS7 Link Status This command displays the status of configured SS7 signaling links If the LINK parameter is specified the status of the corresponding link is displayed If the LINK parameter is not specified the status of all configured SS7 signaling links is displayed Syntax STSLP LINK Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Links gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STSLP 312 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Output Format SS7 Link Status LINK L3_STATUS L3_STATUS L3_BLOCKING_STATUS 0 OUT OF SERVICE UNAVAILABLE 1 OUT OF SERVICE UNAVAILABLE INHL INHR 2 OUT OF SERVICE UNAVAILABLE INHL 3 OUT OF SERVICE UNAVAILABLE INHL
379. ple SIU_TEST_UNIT1 d Provide the License ID taken from the License Certificates for each protocol that is to be licensed on the target Signaling Server e Submit the form You will receive confirmation that your request has been submitted Subse quently you will receive your License File by email 2 1 2 Supported Licenses SS7G41 SIU Software License SKUs Part Product ID Description G06 092 SS7SBG40SIU8 SIU 8 link equivalents TDM or SIGTRAN G02 092 SS7SBG40SIU16 SIU 16 link equivalents TDM or SIGTRAN G07 092 SS7SBG40SIU32 SIU 32 link equivalents TDM or SIGTRAN G03 092 SS7SBG40SIU64 SIU 64 link equivalents TDM or SIGTRAN G04 092 SS7SBG40S1U128 SIU 128 link equivalents TDM or SIGTRAN G05 092 SS7SBG40SIU256 SIU 256 link equivalents TDM or SIGTRAN G01 093 SS7SBG40TCAP SIU TCAP G02 093 SS7SBG40MAP SIU MAP G03 093 SS7SBG401S41 SIU IS 41 G04 093 SS7SBG40INAP SIU INAP G05 093 SS7BG40DSE SIU DSE Interface Note SIU licenses include the MTP3 M2PA M3UA SCCP BICC and ISUP protocol layers 20 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 SS7G41 SWS Software License SKUs Part Product ID Description G06 094 SS7SBG40SWSM8 SWS Messaging Location 8 link equivalents TDM or SIGTRAN G02 094 SS7SBG40SWSM16 SWS Messaging Location 16 link equivalents G07 094 SS7SBG40SWSM32 SWS Messaging Location
380. plications and does not condone or encourage any intellectual property infringement and disclaims any responsibility related thereto These intellectual property licenses may differ from country to country and it is the responsibility of those who develop the concepts or applications to be aware of and comply with different national license requirements Dialogic Dialogic Pro Dialogic Blue Veraz Brooktrout Diva BorderNet PowerMedia ControlSwitch Gate Mobile Experience Matters Network Fuel Video is the New Voice Making Innovation Thrive Diastar Cantata TruFax SwitchKit Eiconcard NMS Communications SIPcontrol Exnet EXS Vision inCloud9 NaturalAccess and Shiva among others as well as related logos are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Dialogic Inc and its affiliates or subsidiaries Dialogic s trademarks may be used publicly only with permission from Dialogic Such permission may only be granted by Dialogic s legal department at 6700 de la Cote de Liesse Road Suite 100 Borough of Saint Laurent Montreal Quebec Canada H4T 2B5 Any authorized use of Dialogic s trademarks will be subject to full respect of the trademark guidelines published by Dialogic from time to time and any use of Dialogic s trademarks requires proper acknowledgement The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein are the trademarks of their respective owners Publication Date October 2014 Document Number 64 1186 11 Dialogic
381. put Format Alarm Log SEQUENCE CODE STATE SEVERITY ID G 19 18 LF 69 42 ENU ACT ACT CLR CLR ACT System restarting 4 CRT CRT CLR CLR CRT 158 0 0 0 0 0 DIAG1 oooO DIAG2 oooo0oo0o 6 2 4 ALTEE Alarm Test End Clears a test alarm Syntax ALTEE CLA 5 CLA 4 CLA 3 Web Management Location OCCURRED 2014 04 15 2014 04 15 2014 04 15 2014 04 15 2014 04 15 12 12 12 12 12 224 224 24 24 24 CLEARED 04 04 04 2014 04 15 12 24 07 04 2014 04 15 12 24 07 03 System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Alarm Test gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Example ALTEE CLA 3 6 2 5 ALTEI Alarm Test I nitiate TITLE TYPE CAUSE Parse errors 4 307 SIU link failed 2 566 Host link failed 2 Insufficient hosts 2 566 306 The command generates an active test alarm of the specified class which is entered in the alarm log Alarm tests can be used to validate the operation of hardware such as LEDS on the front panel of the server Syntax ALTEI CLA 5 CLA 4 CLA 3 152 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Alarm Test gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Example ALTEI CLA 3 6 3 Configuration Commands CNACE
382. r Link End cece eaea 184 6 3 46 CNMLI SS7 Monitor Link Initiate eee etter 185 6 3 47 CNMLP SS7 Monitor link Configuration cece e eee eee nent eee ened 186 6 3 48 CNMNI CNMNE Multi Node Configuration cccceee cece eens ee eee eee teenie 186 6 3 49 CNMNP Multi Node Configuration Print c cece eeee eect eee ee eee teen ee etal 187 6 3 50 CNOBP SNMP Trap Configuration c cceee eee eee nent teenie 187 6 3 51 CNOBS Configuration SNMP Traps Set ccc cececee eect eect tena ea ener aed 188 6 3 52 CGNPCE PCEM ENO a eree taris cglseie cede EEE E E aa a a Nai ses tae 189 6 3 53 CNPCI PCM Initiate ao e A E EERE Y EEE AE AAN a 190 6 3 54 CNPCP PCM Configuration sssssssssrssssssrnuriretrntrrnrtnnnrnntnn turna eee ered 190 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 3 55 CNRAE SIGTRAN Remote Application Server End cccceeeeee eect eee ee eae 191 6 3 56 CNRAI SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Initiate eee eee ee 192 6 3 57 CNRAP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration 0008 192 6 3 58 CNRDI Configuration Restore Default Initiate unnec 193 6 3 59 CNRLE SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List End eccerre 193 6 3 60 CNRLI SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Initiate cee 194 6 3 61 CNRLP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Configuration 195
383. r Range ALL Any event when the object is in this state will result in a trap NONE No event when the object is in this state will result in a trap CREATE Configuration events resulting in a transition to this state will result in a trap CHANGE Change events in this state will result in a trap DESTROY Configuration change events in this state will result in a trap TIMTAB The timer table Specified as an integer TINACTIVE SNMP Trap actions in the INACTIVE state Parameter Range ALL Any event when the object is in this state will result in a trap NONE No event when the object is in this state will result in a trap CREATE Configuration events resulting in a transition to this state will result in a trap CHANGE Change events in this state will result in a trap DESTROY Configuration change events in this state will result in a trap TINSTATE The current duration that the peer has been in the present connection state 0 if this cannot be determined TLO The inactivity time in minutes before a MMI port automatically logs off 359 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued TLOW The time inactivity before a MMI port provides a logoff warning Parameter Range Number from 0 to 50 TMSEC A timer value in milliseconds TNOFLOW Total number of transactions that failed due to an unknown flow determination TPFAIL Total number of transactions that failed during m
384. r alarm event basis in the SNMP ALARM MIB and in the CSV formatted alarms log file The field is up to 9 alphanumeric characters and is set using the CNSYS command e SEQUENCE the sequential reference number of an entry in the alarm log since the last restart e CODE the unique numeric identifier of the alarm code e STATE the current state of the alarm which can be Active Acknowledged the alarm is still active but has been acknowledged by an operator or Cleared The user can acknowledge an alarm using the browser interface or by using the ALLIS command by specifying the SEQUENCE parameter e SEVERITY the perceived severity of the active alarm e ID the numeric identifier of entity to which the alarm relates e g the LINK number e DIAG1 DIAG2 the additional diagnostic information provided on the occurrence of an alarm The meaning of these fields varies based on the alarm code e OCCURRED the time the alarm occurred e CLEARED the time the alarm cleared e TITLE the descriptive title for the alarm code Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e TYPE the classification of the alarm into an alarm type from the following list e CAUSE e communicationsAlarm 2 e qualityOfServiceAlarm 3 e processingErrorAlarm 4 e equipmentAlarm 5 e environmentalAlarm 6 the probable cause for the alarm code based on the principles of ITU Recommendations M 3100 X 733 X 736 and GS
385. r between 0 to 15 REMOTE_ IPADD R The IP address of the partner System in a dual resilient configuration Parameter Range Null or IP address entered as one of the following An PV4 Address An IPV6 Address RESERVED This field is reserved and should be set to 0 Parameter Range Number between 0 to 0 RESERVED1 This field is reserved and should be set to 0 Parameter Range Number between 0 to 0 RESERVED2 This field is reserved and should be set to 0 Parameter Range Number between 0 to 0 RESET Performs a reset operation when set to Y 351 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued RESTART Restart mode Parameter Range SOFT The system will restart the System application software SOFT resets may be used for a more rapid system restart after updating system configuration PREVIOUS The system will restart the application software reverting to the previous version of the software distribution if available Note If a software distribution for a different mode of operation has been loaded then the system will not unable to revert to a previous version of any distribution type EVALUATION The system will be restarted in 1 hour evaluation mode with all licensable capabilities available for use HALT The system will shut down without a subsequent restart RETRIES The maximum number of database retries to attempt before declarin
386. r from the configuration Syntax CNTPE NTPSER Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt NTP Servers gt Configuration 213 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Example CNTPE NTPSER 1 6 3 91 CNTPI Configuration Network Time Protocol Server Initiate This command adds a specified Network Time Protocol Server to the configuration of the system The NTP service should be activated using the Configuration Time and Date Set command Syntax CNTPI NTPSER I PADDR LABEL Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Example CNTPI NTPSER 1 PADDR 192 168 0 1 LABEL Primary NTP Server 6 3 92 CNTPP NTP Server Configuration This command displays the configuration of the Network Time Protocol software Syntax CNTPP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt NTP Servers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNTPP Output Format NTP Server Configuration NTPSER IPADDR LABEL 1 192 168 0 1 Primary NTP server 2 192 168 0 2 NTP server 2 214 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 3 93 CNURC Configuration Update Resources Change This command changes the configuration data or a resource on the server The operation involve
387. r must have the same value as lt bpos gt e STREAM A reference to the logical PCM highway from which the signaling processor is to insert the signaling This must be in the range 0 to 3 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Valid values are shown in the following table Stream Port 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 TS The timeslot on the lt stream gt that should be used for signaling For a T1 port the range is 1 to 24 For an E1 port the valid range is 1 to 31 The timeslot must not have been previously assigned another MTP or Monitor link Set to zero if the MTP link is associated with an M2PA link For HSL links the timeslot parameter should be set to Oxff to indicate that the link is attached to an LIU configured with the LIU_CONFIG command HSL signaling may not use timeslots already configured for signaling or data e CELLSTR This parameter indicates the ATM_CELL_STREAM to be used VPI The VPI associated with the ATM link on the cell stream e VCI The VCI associated with the ATM link on the cell stream e USER_ID The module ID of the process that will receive the incoming signaling messages passed as SS7_MSG_RX_IND messages This should be in the range 0x0d Ox1d to Oxfd e USER_HOST The logical identifier of the host to which receives SS7_MSG_RX_IND messages OPTIONS Per link flags for monitoring operation 32 bits Bit 0 Set to 1 to enable timestamping of
388. r of hosts associated with Database services the system will treat this as a value of one less than the number of hosts configured 219 Chapter 6 Management Commands Syntax DBSVS DBSVCI D DBSVCTYPE DBSVCNAME OPTIONS RETRIES RECOVERY TE STMSISDN DBO DB1 DB2 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7 DB8 DB9 DB10 DB11 DB12 DB13 DB14 DB15 DBSVS DBSVCI D DBSVCTYPE NONE Web Management Location System Administration gt Subscriber Database gt Services gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites Upon change the service name and test MSISDN must be set to non null values If the database service type is set to a value other than NONE then at least one database instance must be configured The host identified in the host sequence must exist The database ID must be less than the number of configured hosts The subscriber DB cannot be set to a host ID already associated with a management host If the service type is set to none then the service is removed and no further parameters can be set Example DBSVS DBO 0 PRI 6 5 Helix Commands HDPRP Diameter Peer Configuration HMFES Flow Environment Configuration HMFEP Flow Environment Configuration 220 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 5 1 HDPRP Diameter Peer Config
389. r of misaligned frames received LFRAME The number of received frames that were designated as either too long or too short for a configured protocol ABORT The number of aborts received CRC Number of CRC errors received DISC The number of times that the receiver discarded incoming frames as a result of no internal buffers being available This is a count of the number of events rather than a count of the number of frames discarded RBUSY The number of times the receiver has entered the busy state as a result of the number of internal buffers falling below a set threshold 6 11 13 MSNIP Network Interface Measurements This command displays traffic measurements for each Network Interface on the system taken over a period of time When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Syntax MSNIP RESET PAGE Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Network Interfaces gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSNIP MSNIP RESET Y PAGE 2 277 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format Network Interface Measurements Page 1 of 2 NETIF RXKBYTE RXPKT RXERR RXDROP TXKBYTE TXPKT TXERR TXDROP PERIOD etho 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 34 41 eth1 96324 13570570 4204E5 28169 4444 0 0 16 34 41 eth2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 34 41 eth3 3760 3273 0 33615 12503 3455 0 0 16 34 41 Network
390. r value that can be used when entering the Service Indicator during configuration Parameter Range SCCP 3 ISUP 5 BICC 13 RESERVED4 4 RESERVED6 6 RESERVED7 7 RESERVED8 8 RESERVED9 9 RESERVED10 10 RESERVED11 11 RESERVED12 12 RESERVED 14 14 RESERVED15 15 Identifies an optional slave port where alarm conditions occurring on the LIU will be mapped to AIS on the slave port Parameter Range Number between 0 to 7 SLC The signaling link code for a signaling link Parameter Range Number between 0 to 15 SNLINK SNMP SIGTRAN link identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 SNMP active parameter Set to Y to enable operation of SNMP or N to disable operation of SNMP SNMPUSER An integer identifier for a SNMP User Parameter Range Null or Number between 1 to 31 SNRT The SIGTRAN route identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 355 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued SNTYPE Type of SIGTRAN link Parameter Range M3UA M2PA SPC Signaling Point Code Parameter Range Number between 0 to 16777215 SPEED The speed of the Ethernet port in MHz H indicates Half Duplex otherwise it is Full Duplex Parameter Range AUTO 10 100 1000 10H 100H SRTT The current calculated smoothed round trip time for the peer address in milliseconds SS7MODE SS7 Mode Parameter Range 1
391. rameter Range ALL Any event when the object is in this state will result in a trap NONE No event when the object is in this state will result in a trap CREATE Configuration events resulting in a transition to this state will result in a trap CHANGE Change events in this state will result in a trap DESTROY Configuration change events in this state will result in a trap TDROP Total number of transactions that failed during framework processing and are dropped TELSER Telnet Server access When set to SECURE the Command Line Interface can only be achieved by running Telnet SSH TESTMSISDN Test MSISDN that is present in the MNP database Note May only be null if the service type is NONE TFAIL Total number of failed transactions 358 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued TFORMAT The format of SNMP Traps sent to the external SNMP Manager Parameter Range NONE Set when using SNMP V3 V1TRAP SNMP Version 1 format V2TRAP SNMP Version 2 Notification Trap V2INFO SNMP Version 2 Information TIME Time of day Parameter Range Time in the form xx yy zz where xx is hours 0 23 yy is minutes 0 59 and zz is seconds 0 59 TIMID A string identifier the specific timer Parameter Range String of length 0 to 14 Must not contain any spaces TIMPAIR SNMP Trap actions in the IMPAIRED state Paramete
392. rd expiry disabled MGR Y Read configuration status and measurements MGW y Change Add Delete configuration MGX Y Maintenance actions block unblock reset MGS Y Security management enabled MGA Y Administrative access to add remove users MGP Y Policy access to set system policy 6 2 Alarm Commands ALLIP Active Alarm List ALLOP Alarm Log ALTEE Alarm Test End ALTEI Alarm Test Initiate 6 2 1 ALCDP Alarm Codes This command displays the list of alarm codes and the attributes associated with each code The attributes include the title severity of the alarm when active type of alarm communicationsAlarm 2 qualityOfServiceAlarm 3 processingErrorAlarm 4 equipmentAlarm 5 or environmentalAlarm 6 and the probable cause of the alarm based on the principles of ITU Recommendations M 3100 X 733 and X 736 and GSM 12 10 ETS 300 618 Syntax ALCDP Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Alarm Code gt Configuration 149 Chapter 6 Management Commands Applicability Operating Modes ALL DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example ALCDP Output Format Alarm Code Configuration CODE TITLE 1 PCM loss 2 Sync loss 4 AIS 5 Remote Alarm 6 BER5 7 BER3 8 PSU fail 9 SS7 link fail 10 SS7 linkset lost 12 SS7 link cong 13 Fan fail 14 Fan warning 16 Temperature 17 Host link fail 18 Partner link fail T9 Parse errors 20 Conf
393. rd in the Signaling Server means that in addition to supporting traditional Low Speed Links at 64 56 or 48kbps and High Speed Links in accordance with Q 703 Annex A the Signaling Server can also connect over E1 or T1 to ATM networks The Signaling Server supports termination of ATM Q SAAL links It also supports the ability to monitor ATM links at the AAL5 layer and allows the resulting monitored traffic to be sent to a specific SIU host for each AALS link The board supports software selectable high impedance or protective monitoring point mode for use in conjunction with monitoring ATM link termination is implemented in accordance with Q SAAL Q 2140 Q 2110 GR 2878 7 13 2 Configuration Example The following example configuration shows two ATM signaling links looped back on the Signaling Server LIU 1 1 to LIU 1 2 and LIU 1 3 to LIU 1 4 where the SIU acts as point codes 1 and 2 Four cell stream and MTP links are configured showing configuration for either side of the two Signaling Links Signaling Server Host Configuration Change s SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS BACKUP_HOST OPTIONS MIN_HOSTS DMHOST SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 1 BACKUP_HOST NONE OPTIONS 0 MIN_HOSTS 1 DMHOST 0 e Signaling Board Configuration SS7_BOARD BPOS BRDTYPE OPTIONS SS7_BOARD BPOS 0 BRDTYPE SS7MD OPTIONS 0x00000001 T1 E1 PCM network interface trunk Configuration LIU_CONFIG PORTID PCM LIUTYPE E1 LC HDB3 FF G704
394. re removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNSTE MMI command LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional 7 4 STN_ RAS SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Configuration Synopsis This command initiates a Remote Application Server Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax STN_RAS NC NCO RAS DPC RC NASP 1 OPTIONS 0 LABEL Example STN_RAS NC NC2 RAS 16 DPC 14065 RC 1 Parameters The STN_RAS command has the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context together with a Destination Point Code DPC uniquely identify an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 The parameter is only applicable for M3UA operation Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 RAS Remote Application Server The Remote Application Server may not have the same ID value as an existing Remote Signaling Gateway The valid range is O 255 e DPC Specifies an Destination Point Code DPC value for the Remote Application Server Only one RAS SNRT or C7RT can be configured with a particular DPC within a network context e RC The logical routing context used in communicating with a remote server An RC may not be associated with any other remote server T
395. remote equipment 19 Parse errors 0 CRT One or more syntax errors were found in the protocol configuration file Refer to page 2 of the alarm log for further information on errors Check the configuration file correct errors and restart the unit 20 Config fail 0 CRT Errors occurred during the configuration cycle Check configuration file correct errors and restart unit 43 Chapter 4 System Management Alarm IDs Severity Description and Clearance Actions Continued CODE 22 TITLE System Overload ID SEVERITY MAJ DESCRI PTI ON ALARM CLEARANCE ACTI ON System overload has occurred Current load on system exceeds the capacity the unit can support Reduce traffic load or investigate possible fault conditions that may be causing reduced system capacity 24 Evaluation mode CRT System is operating in evaluation mode and will restart after a period of 1 hour To clear this alarm obtain and install the full license 25 CPU Temperature CPUID MAJ The CPU temperature is outside a preset threshold indicating either an internal fault or failure of the cooling arrangements Inspection should take place immediately If this alarm occurs perform a hard restart of the unit If this alarm persists shut down the unit and remove and reapply power If alarm persists contact Dialogic support 28 30 Board fail CPU warning BPO
396. riber Database Service Measurements 265 Chapter 6 Management Commands MSDEP Message Router Destination Measurements MSDHP DTS Host Measurements MSFEP Flow Environment Measurements MSHPP Diameter Peer Measurements MSHLP Host Link Measurements MSLCP Software License Capability Measurements MSHLP Host Link Measurements MSLCP Software License Capability Measurements MSLTP SCCP Loadshare Table Measurements MSMLP SS7 Monitor Link Measurements MSNIP Network Interface Measurements MSOGP Message Router Origin Measurements MSPCP PCM Measurements MSRAP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server Measurements MSRKP Message Router Routing Key Measurements MSRLP Remote Server Link Measurements MSSLP SS7 Link Measurements MSSRP SIGTRAN Route Measurements MSSRP SIGTRAN Route Measurements MSSTP SIGTRAN Link Measurements MSSYP System Measurements MSHRP MAP HLR Rx Measurements MSHTP MAP HLR Tx Measurements MSORP MAP MO SMS Rx Measurements MSOTP MAP MO SMS Tx Measurements MSRTP MAP Ready for SM Tx Profile Measurements MSSPP MAP Subscriber Profiling Measurements MSTRP MAP MT SMS Rx Measurements MSTTP MAP MT SMS Tx Measurements MSUPP MAP USSD Measurements 266 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operat
397. rk Context is configured in the UPART domain with a service indicator of 3 and a user configures SCCP on the Signaling Server in that Network Context bit 2 of the lt options2 gt parameter in the SCCP_CONFIG and SCCP_NC_CONFIG commands will automatically be set Setting this bit allows the Message Routing functionality to understand the point code format of messages transmitted by SCCP Syntax MROGI NC NCO OGID DOMAIN RKTAB SI OPC ANY CP NONE LABEL Example MRF_OG OGID 1 DOMAIN NETWORK SIT 5 RKTAB 1 MRF_OG NC NCO OGID 2 DOMAIN AS SI 5 RKTAB 1 CP NONE MRF_OG OGID 3 NC NCO DOMAIN USER SI 3 RKTAB 2 CP 1 Parameters NC SS7 Network Context This parameter identifies the SS7 Network Context associated with the Origin Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 When the parameter omitted a value of NCO is assumed OGID Logical identifier for the Origin A number in the range 0 4095 DOMAIN The domain a message is being received from A domain may be either NETWORK either the MTP network or M3UA when connected to a Signaling Gateway User Part UPART or AS M3UA when connected to an Application Server SI Service Indicator in the range 0 15 Received messages containing the configured SI will be considered to match the Origin If required a different Origin may be configured for each SI OPC Originating Point Code When set to a value other than the default of ANY received messages co
398. rmat SS7 Monitor link Configuration MLINK IFTYPE BPOS BLINK STREAM TS USER_ID USER_HOST OPTIONS VPI VCI LABEL 0 TDM 0 1 0 16 Oxl1d 0 0x00000003 1 TDM 0 2 1 16 Oxl1d 1 0x00000003 2 ATM 1 1 T 0x1d 1 0x00000003 0 1 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command MONITOR_LINK for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 48 CNMNI CNMNE Multi Node Configuration Command to dynamically initiate and end Nodes within in a Multi Node Cluster To dynamically add a Node first add a new MULTI_ NODE command in the config txt file and then execute the CNMNI command to load the configuration into the system To dynamically remove a Node first remove the corresponding MULTI_NODE command from the config txt file and then execute the CNMNE command to remove the configuration from the system Syntax CNMNI MNID CNMNE MNI D Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Multi Node gt Configuration 186 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites There are no startup parse or configuration errors present in the alarm log To remove a Node it must not be in use in any other configuration Example CNMNI MNID 1 CNMNE MNID 1 6 3 49 CNMNP Multi Node Configuration Print This command displays the configuration data for
399. rmat mas goniciost3 TIME 09 04 02 NTP Y OFFSET 5 30 6 3 87 CNTDS Configuration Time and Day Set This command specifies the date and time as used by the system This command can also activate or deactivate Network Time Protocol NTP on the system System time is used to indicate the time an alarm occurred or cleared and to provide timestamps for such things as measurements and data records The command also allows an OFFSET from UTC to be specified to allow the system to report the correct local time when synchronized with a NTP time server 211 Chapter 6 Management Commands Note The system will not automatically adjust for daylight savings time changes The system must be restarted in order for the new OFFSET value to take effect If the OFFSET parameter is not changed there is no need to restart the system after performing a change to the configuration of Day or Time Any subsequent requests for system restart after changing the Day or Time will however always result in the system performing a Hard restart even if a Soft one was requested A Hard restart is required to allow the systems license manager to re sync with the new date time Syntax CNTDS DATE TIME NTP OFFSET Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt System Time gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Administration Access Example CNTDS DATE 2001 10 03 TIME
400. route will be selected if no match is found in the M3UA routing tables for the DPC of a message destined for the network If bit O of the STN_ ROUTE flags is also set then the Default Route will become available as soon as the network connections become available In this case the DPC in the Route serves little purpose though must still be unique in the Routing Table A DPC of Zero could be used If bit O of the STN_ ROUTE flags is not set then the Default Route will only become available when the DPC used in the configuration message becomes available The Point Code of the Signaling Gateway through which the Route connects to the network may be used 3 15 Reserved and should be set to zero 97 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 98 e LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional SIGTRAN Route configuration is viewed using the CNSRP MMI command and its status and measurements read using the STSRP an MSRAP MMI commands After startup additional Remote Application Routes can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNSRI command Routes are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNSRE MMI command 7 7 STN_RSGLIST SIGTRAN Route Signaling Gateway List Configuration Synopsis This command attaches Signaling Gateways to a SIGTRAN Route Applicability SIU SWS
401. rrors present The SCCP GTT Translation is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNGTI GTPID 1 6 3 30 CNGTP SCCP GTT Translation Configuration This command shows GTT Translations defined on the system Refer to the config txt command SCCP_GTT for a full description of the parameters Syntax CNGTP NC GTPI D Web Management Location System Administration gt SCCP gt GTT Translations gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNGTP 175 Chapter 6 Management Commands Output Format SCCP GTT Translation Configuration GTPID NC GTT MASK PRI_GTAID SEC _GTAID GTTSRC BAK DUAL OPTIONS RIID 4 NCO R K R 4 ANY N 0x0000 0 5 NCO R K 5 ANY N 0x0000 0 1023 NC1 R K 1023 ANY N 0x0000 0 6 3 31 CNHSP Host Configuration This command displays DSI Host Configuration Note See the individual parameter definitions of the config txt command SIU_HOSTS defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters supported Warning If an entry exists in config txt then associated MMI change commands will be disabled Syntax CNHSP Web Management Location System Administration gt DSI Hosts gt Hosts gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNHSP Output Format Host Configuration NUM_H
402. rs Manual Issue 11 5 13 TCAP Configuration Commands The TCAP configuration commands include e TCAP_CONFIG TCAP Configuration e TCAP_NC_CONFIG TCAP Network Context Configuration e TCAP_CFG_DGRP TCAP Dialog Group Configuration e TCAP_TIMER TCAP Timer Configuration 5 13 1 TCAP_CONFIG TCAP Configuration Synopsis The TCAP_CONFIG command activates the TCAP protocol layer on the Signaling Server and provides the TCAP operating parameters This command should only be used when an SCCP_CONFIG command is present Note Network Context specific configuration may be done using the TCAP_NC_CONFIG command Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax TCAP_CONFIG lt BASE_ODLG gt lt NUM_ODLG gt lt BASE_IDLG gt lt NUM_IDLG gt lt OPTIONS gt lt DLG_HUNT gt lt ADDR_FMT gt Examples TCAP_CONFIG 0x0000 8192 0x8000 8192 0x0000 0 0 Parameters The TCAP_CONFIG command includes the following parameters BASE _ODLG The dialogue_id for the first outgoing dialog e NUM_ODLG The number of outgoing dialogs to support The valid range is 0 to 32767 e BASE_IDLG The dialogue_id for the first incoming dialog The most significant bit bit 15 of the dialog ID must be set to one for incoming dialogs e NUM_IDLG The number of incoming dialogs to support The valid range is 0 to 32767 Note If dialogue values are out of the permitted range TCAP will be configured with default values of 32767 nog_dialogues and 32767 nic_dialogues
403. rvice When a profile is specified Page 2 measurements are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSSPP RESET PAGE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt Subscriber gt Subscriber gt Stats 292 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSSPP MSS PP PAGE 2 MSSPP PROFILE 2 MSSPP RESET VY Output Format MAP Subscriber Profiling Measurements Page 1 of 2 MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD Location_Request 3434 0 01 00 00 Subscriber State Reqs 1231 0 01 00 00 Get_IMSI 0 0 01 00 00 MAP Subscriber Profiling Measurements Page 2 of 2 PROFILE MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 Location_Request 3434 0 01 00 00 0 Subscriber State Reqs 1231 0 01 00 00 0 Get_I MSI 0 0 01 00 00 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with the MAP service MAP_SERVICE the MAP service SUCCESS count of successes FAIL count of failures PERIOD time since measurements for the service were last reset 6 11 29 MSTRP MAP MT SMS Rx Measurements Command to display traffic measurements associated with
404. ry RLID Note SIGTRAN RLI Ds are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNRLI RLI D Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Server Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN RLID has not been initiated The SIGTRAN RLID is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present 194 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The SIGTRAN RLIDs is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNRLI RLID 1 6 3 61 CNRLP SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Configuration This command displays the assignment of SIGTRAN links to Remote Application Servers on the system Syntax CNRLP RAS Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Remote Server Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNRLP CNRLP RAS 3 Output Format SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List RLID RAS SNLINK 1 16 1 2 16 2 3 16 32 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command STN_RASLIST for a full description of the parameters used in th
405. ry host failure When using ISUP for example this mechanism allows continued use of circuits if the primary host for a circuit group were to fail Once the primary host link has been recovered messages are again sent to it from the SIU Backup hosts can be employed when configured for ISUP Backup hosts may also be used for SCCP operation they may not be used in configurations that utilize DTS DTC Both primary and backup hosts are configured and active Parameter Range BACKUP_NONE 0 When this parameter is set to BACKUP_NONE 0 or the SIU_HOSTS command is not present the system does not employ the backup host mechanism BACKUP_1 1 When set to a BACKUP_1 1 primary and backup hosts are paired 0 1 2 3 4 5 etc If the link to host 0 fails messages are sent instead to host 1 and vice versa When the link recovers normal routing resumes BACKUP_ 32 2 When set to a BACKUP_32 2 primary and backup hosts are paired 0 32 1 33 2 34 etc If the link to host 0 fails messages are sent instead to host 32 and vice versa When the link recovers normal routing resumes Use Backup route via Dual SIU BASE_IDLG The base incoming dialog id Normally expressed as a hexadecimal value Parameter Range Hex number from 0 to fffff BASE_ODLG The base outgoing dialog id Normally expressed as a hexidecimal value Parameter Range Hex number from 0 to fffff BCIC The Circuit Identification Code CIC that is alloca
406. s Any timers not configured continue to be set to the values shown in the following table I SUP Default I SUP Default I SUP Default Timer Value Timer Value Timer Value seconds seconds seconds T1 10 T15 60 T27 240 T2 180 T16 10 T28 10 T3 180 T17 60 T29 5 tenths T5 60 T18 10 T30 80 tenths T6 180 T19 60 T33 14 T7 25 T20 10 T34 3 T8 13 T21 60 T35 20 T9 45 T22 10 T36 13 T10 5 T23 60 T38 150 T12 10 T24 2 T39 10 T13 60 T25 5 T103 20 T14 10 T26 120 T104 3 Note The SIU does not perform checks on ISUP timer values 5 10 SCCP Configuration Commands The SCCP configuration commands include e SCCP_CONFIG SCCP Configuration e SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE SCCP Load Share Table e SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC SCCP Load Shared DPCs 115 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands e SCCP_GTT Global Title Translation e SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS Global Title Translation Address e SCCP_GTT_PATTERN Global Title Translation Pattern e SCCP_RSP SCCP Remote Signaling Points e SCCP_LSS SCCP Local Sub Systems e SCCP_RSS SCCP Remote Sub Systems e SCCP_CONC_SSR SCCP Concerned Sub Systems Configuration 5 10 1 SCCP_ CONFIG SCCP Configuration Synopsis The SCCP_ CONFIG command defines the global configuration parameters for SCCP either when existing in a single network or when existing in multiple Network Contexts The SCCP_CONFIG command is used to configure and activate the SCCP and TCAP protoc
407. s Configuration Read Access Example ALLI P Output Format Active Alarm List Active Alarm List Page 1 of 2 SEQUENCE CODE STATE SEVERITY ID DIAG1 DIAG2 OCCURRED TITLE TYPE CAUSE 43 34 ACT IAJ 8 0 0 2014 04 09 58 44 Sigtran link fail 2 566 42 34 ACT IAJ 7 0 0 2014 04 09 58 44 Sigtran link fail 2 566 41 34 ACT IAJ 6 0 0 2014 04 09 58 44 Sigtran link fail 2 566 40 34 ACT IAJ 5 0 0 2014 04 09 58 44 Sigtran link fail 2 566 39 10 ACT IAJ 1 0 0 2014 04 09 58 44 SS7 linkset lost 2 5 73 38 19 ACT CRT 0 0 0 2014 04 09 58 38 Parse errors 4 307 37 35 ACT IAJ 8 0 0 2014 04 09 58 38 Sigtran Assoc fail 2 566 36 35 ACT IAJ 7 0 0 2014 04 09 58 38 Sigtran Assoc fail 2 566 35 35 ACT IAJ 6 0 0 2014 04 09 58 38 Sigtran Assoc fail 2 566 34 35 ACT IAJ 5 0 0 2014 04 09 58 38 Sigtran Assoc fail 2 566 Active Alarm List Page 2 of 2 ID CONFIGURATION_ERROR 86 Parse error STN_LINK unknown parameter syntax error 144 Parse error MTP_LINK bad value BLINK 151 Parse error MTP_ROUTE data component exists C7RT 6 2 3 ALLOP Alarm Log Command to display a log of recent alarm events and where applicable the time that the alarm cleared This command displays up to 1 000 alarms 151 Chapter 6 Management Commands Syntax ALLOP Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Alarms gt Log Applicability Operating Modes ALL DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example ALLOP Out
408. s SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SS7 Link Set has not been initiated The SS7 Link Set is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SS7 Link Set is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNLSI LINKSET 1 6 3 41 CNLSP SS7 Link Set Configuration This command displays all configured SS7 Link Sets Syntax CNLSP LINKSET Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Link Sets gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNLSP Output Format SS7 Link Set Configuration LINKSET NC OPC APC NLINKS SSF OPTIONS LABEL 0 NCO 1234 5678 16 0x8 0x0000 1 NCO 1234 9876 16 0x8 0x0000 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command MTP_LINKSET for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 42 CNLTE SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration End The command removes aan SCCP Loadshare Table 182 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Note Configuration may be dynamically removed by 1 Deleting a configuration command SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE entry from the config txt file 2 Executing the CNLTE MMI command to unload it from the system Syntax CNLTE LST Web Management Location Sys
409. s reading the config txt file containing configuration data validating it and applying it to the unit Note Use of the CNURE command has been deprecated Individual objects such as circuit groups and routes have their own specific commands to remove and then add modified resources to the system Syntax CNURC UPMODE CGRP D Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Prerequisites The command will succeed only if the resource data is present in the updated configuration FILE and a valid configuration has been entered Example CNURC UPMODE CGRP D 2 6 3 94 CNURE Configuration Update Resources End This command removes the configuration of a specific resource The operation involves reading the config txt file containing configuration data validating that the resource is no longer present and removing the resource from the configuration on the unit Note Use of the CNURE command has been deprecated Individual objects such as circuit groups and routes have their own specific commands to remove resources from the system Syntax CNURE UPMODE CGRP D Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Prerequisites The command succeeds only if the resource data is not present in the updated configuration file the specified circuit group was previousl
410. s are offered by the product based on the functionality shared with the SS7G41 SIU product Message and AVP manipulation can be performed on both Diameter and non Diameter messages offering multiple logical and conditional operations This functionality can be combined to provide a flexible service creation environment Extensive protocol support includes Diameter Radius MAP HTTP and LDAP Refer to the BorderNet Diameter Services Helix User Manual for further details 1 1 1 Related I nformation Refer to the following for related information e Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Hardware Manual e Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 SIU Developers Manual e Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 SWS Developers Manual e Dialogic DSI Components Software Environment Programmer s Manual U10SSS e Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SNMP User Manual UO5EPP e Dialogic DSI SS7G41 Signaling Server Introduction to SWS Profiles GA20LGD e Dialogic DSI SS7G41 Signaling Server Introduction to Message Router Functionality GA17LGD Information about the Dialogic DSI Signaling Server products are available from the following http www dialogic com support helpweb signaling The following manuals should be read depending on the protocol options installed on the unit e ISUP Programmer s Manual U04SSS e SCCP Programmer s Manual U05SSS e TCAP Programmer s Manual U06SSS e MAP Programmer s Manual U14SSS e 1S41 Programmer s M
411. s ims Minimum RTO Rmax 1400ms ims Maximum RTO Rinit 1000ms lms Initial RTO Ck 30000ms lms Cookie lifetime Hbt 1000ms lms Time between heartbeats Tli 3000ms Ims Starting timeout of an INIT chunk T2i 3000ms Ims Starting timeout of a SHUTDOWN chunk Sackd 10ms ims SACK delayed Ack 100 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The SCTP_TIMER command may also be used to modify the number times a heartbeat or data packet may be retransmitted before an association is determined to have failed The following table provides a description of these parameter as well as indicating their default value N B Increasing the number of retransmissions before failure is determined will obviously delay any corrective action that may be taken Mnemonic Default Description RtxHb 3 The number of times a heartbeat packet may be transmitted before determining that an association has failed RtxData 3 The number of times a data packet may be transmitted before determining that an association has failed 5 7 10 M2PA_TIMER M2PA Timer Configuration Synopsis The M2PA_TIMER command provides the ability to configure the M2PA protocol timers from the configuration file Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax M2PA_TIMER NC NCO TIMID TSEC TMSEC Example M2PA_TIMER NC NC1 TIMID T7 TSEC 1 TMSEC 500 Parameters NC SS7 Network Context This parameter unique
412. s parameter described in the Configuration Request section of the SCCP Programmer s Manual e OPTIONS2 A 32 bit field that is mapped directly to the ext_1_ options field in the SCCP module Configuration message described in the SCCP Programmer s Manual Currently the following bits are significant Bito Allows the selection of automatic or local subsystem generated user in service indications When set it a user in service SCP_MSG_SCMG_REQ message is automatically send to SCCP for all configured local subsystems When not set local subsystems should send the SCP_MSG_SCMG_REQ message manually when they are available Biti When set automatic generation of UDTS messages by SCCP is disabled Other bits should be set to 0 Note When a Message Router Origin for a particular Network Context is configured in the UPART domain with a service indicator of 3 bit 2 of the lt options2 gt parameter in the SCCP_CONFIG commands will automatically be set for the particular Network Context Setting this bit allows the Message Routing functionality to understand the point code format of messages transmitted by SCCP 5 10 2 SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_ TABLE SCCP Load Share Table The SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE command is a new configuration command and is defined as follows Synopsis The SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE statement initiates a Global Title Load Share table GLST Once defined the SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_DPC command can be used to associate Destination Po
413. s tags which provide additional security by requiring transmitted URLs to use a unique key provided by the server i e data and actions can only be accessed performed by selecting operations on the web page and copying URLs using browser refresh or forward back buttons will not work Only one user may access the server when this option is selected SEVERITY The perceived severity of the active alarm CLR 1 cleared alarm IND 2 indeterminate alarm CRT 3 critical alarm MAJ 4 major alarm MNR 5 minor alarm WRN 6 warning alarm SHARE The percentage share of a license that is available to a capability For SIGTRAN capabilities this is a percentage of the throughput For the TDM capability this is the percentage of links available The share is controlled using the TDM share and M3UA share parameters on the system configuration command If the share is less than the configured values of the appropriate TDM or M3UA share then another license e g a system license or the specific configuration of a resource e g a TDM link has resulted in a reduction the of share available to the license Blank means not applicable Parameter Range Null or Number between 0 to 100 354 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued S SLAVE The Service Indicator If displayed the value in brackets represents the alternative intege
414. s which drop or insert blocks of numbers Global Title Translation is a function performed by SCCP GTT is performed in two stages First the match stage identifies which digits should be matched and which should be ignored through either single digit or variable length wildcards The second stage defines the translation operation to be performed The user can specify to keep the digits in the address being translated replace them with specified digits or drop that block of digits There are three components to a GTT rule when configured using the config txt file e The Pattern component which specifies the GT information which must be matched e The Address component which specifies the Address information to use when translating e The GTT Rule component which controls how the Address Global Title is used during the translation process The GTT Rule can additionally specify a Backup Address which is used if the first cannot be routed to at that time 7 15 1 Global Title Address I nformation GTAI digits may be split up into logical sections using the separator character Each section will contain zero or more digits Each section in the Pattern defines a set of digits which must be matched Valid digits are in the ranges 0 9 a d and f Wild cards may be used where the value of the digits is not significant The character represents a single digit wildcard and the character indicates a variable length wildcard
415. sage for the dialog being used For 1S41 the Network Context should be indicated in the Open Request message instead of using the 1S41PN_NC parameter If a Network Context is not specified the default Network Context NCO is assumed 7 4 12 2 Configuration There are no 1S41 specific options therefore there is no need for an S41 specific Network Context configuration command 374 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 7 4 13 I NAP 7 4 13 1 Applications Where a dialog is initiated remotely no change is required since INAP automatically determines which Network Context is appropriate Where the dialog is initiated locally the application must specify the Network Context to which the message is destined This effectively indicates the point code to be used as the originating point code The Network Context should be indicated in the first message for the dialog being used For 1S41 the Network Context should be indicated in the Open Request message instead of using the INAPPN_NC parameter If a Network Context is not specified the default Network Context NCO is assumed 7 4 13 2 Configuration The existing INAP_CONFIG config txt command described in Section 5 16 1 INAP_CONFIG INAP Configuration on page 139 may be used to configure the default Network Context for the first network The INAP_CONFIG command is only required to alter the INAP specific options of the signaling server from the def
416. scriber gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service The gateway address must be unique within the network context Example MASPI PROFILE 0 NAME SUBPROF_TRANS_0 GWADDR 33233232 MASPC PROFI LE 0 GWADDR 33233232 MASPE PROFI LE 0 6 7 12 MASPP MAP Subscriber Profiling Profile Print Synopsis Command to display configurations associated with MAP Subscriber service profiles Syntax MASPP PROFI LE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt Subscriber gt Subscriber gt Configuration 242 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MASPP PROFI LE 0 Output Format MAP Subscriber service profile PROFI LE 0 NAME SUBPROF_TRANS_0 NC NCO GWTON International GWNP ISDN GWADDR 666666666666 DSTTON International DSTNP ISDN RCOPT N OPTIONS 0x00000000 RIID 0 6 7 13 MATRI MATRC MATRE MAP MT SMS Rx Profile Synopsis Commands to initiate change and end configurations associated with MAP Receive MT SMS service profiles Syntaxf MATRI PROFILE NAME NC SCTON SCNP SCADDR RCOPT TXTPREF OPTIONS MATRC PROFILE NAME SCTON SCNP SCADDR RCOPT TXTPREF OPTIONS MATRE PROFILE Web Management
417. se that a unit restart is required the last transferred configuration is the one that is adopted See Section 7 9 1 Config txt Based Dynamic Configuration on page 387 for more information 5 1 3 Programming Circuit Group Configuration This feature provides an alternative method for dynamic configuration by allowing a host application program to add delete or modify ISUP circuit groups by transmitting configuration messages directly to the ISUP protocol module running on the Signaling Server Programmatic circuit group configuration does not affect the state of existing circuits and does not require a system restart 5 2 Command Sequence The configuration commands must be entered in the order specified below The command at the top of the table should be at the start of the configuration file with the remaining commands following in the order that they appear in the table Table 1 Command Summary Command Summary P_TOKEN Configure IP Hostname tokens SIU_ DUAL Configure dual resilient operation SIU_HOSTS Configure SIU host settings SS7_BOARD Configure signaling boards LIU_CONFIG Configure T1 E1 PCM network interface trunks ATM_CELL_STREAM Configure ATM Cell Streams STN_CONFIG Define network context and point code type to be used by M3UA STN_LAS Configure local application server STN_LINK Configure SIGTRAN links STN_RAS Define a remote application server STN_RASLIST Attach
418. set to zero Syntax MSLCP RESET Web Management Location System Administration gt Software gt Software Licenses gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSLCP Output Format Software License Capability Measurements CAPABILITY NC RXDATA TXDATA RXPEAK TXPEAK PEAK CONG ENFORCE PERIOD M3UA NCO 4204E5 3212E4 154 456 923 1 T 01 33 33 274 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows CAPABILITY A Licensable capability of the system This is a protocol or operating mode capability which has been purchased or is under evaluation NC A Network Context the capability is associated Blank if not applicable RXDATA The amount of data received in Kbytes TXDATA The amount of data transmitted in Kbytes RXPEAK The peak received data rate in Kbytes s averaged over a rolling thirty second time window TXPEAK The peak transmitted data rate in Kbytes s averaged over a rolling thirty second time window PEAK The peak data rate for both transmitted and received data in Kbytes s averaged over a rolling thirty second time window CONGESTION The number of times the license has exceeded its throughput threshold ENFORCE The number of times the unit has enforced the license throughput limit PERIOD Time since measurements on the route were last reset Specified in hours minutes
419. should be applied Optionally a Custom Profile may be assigned for manipulating parameters in the Routing Label When a Custom Profile is assigned to an Origin the parameter manipulation occurs before the parameters are compared with the Routing Key The Origin has its own unique identifier OGID and can optionally be assigned a text based label LABEL to assist with identification If the DOMAIN is NETWORK or AS then all traffic for the associated Service Indicator will be processed by the Message Router rather than being passed directly to ISUP or SCCP or a user module on a host configured by the MTP_USER_PART command 103 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands If the DOMAIN is UPART then all outgoing messages from the User Part e g ISUP or SCCP will be processed by the Message Router rather than being transmitted directly to the network Note When a Message Router Origin for a particular Network Context is configured in the NETWORK domain Bit 0 Bit 17 and Bit 22 of the options parameter for any associated MTP_CONFIG and MTP_NC_CONFIG commands will automatically be set These bits controls how received Route Set Test Transfer Controlled and Signaling Route Set Congestion Messages that are not destined for the MTP local point code are processed and are set to allow the Message Router to correctly processing these messages for the domains and Network Contexts under its control Note When a Message Router Origin for a particular Netwo
420. ss 334 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued IP6ADDR A IPV6 address and subnet expressed in CIDR notation where the IP address and subnet are separated by the character The subnet parameter is expressed as an integer indicating the leading i e significant 1 bits that identify the sub net mask For an Pv6 address the value can be up to 127 however common use for I Pv6 is that this value is 64 to indicate that the top 64 bits of the IP address indicates the subnet the IP address exists within and the bottom 64 bits identifies the server within the subnet Parameter Range Null or IP address entered as one of the following An IPV6 Address PACT The action to be performed when the data matches the rule Parameter Range ACCEPT Data will be accepted DROP Data will be discarded IPADDR An IP Address An IP address entered as one of the following An PV4 Address An IPV6 Address PDEST A destination IP address or network identifier Parameter Range Null or ANY command specific or IP address entered as one of the following An IPV4 Address An IPV6 Address PFW A logical reference for and entry in the IP Firewall list DEFAULT is the default rule applied when other criteria are not met Parameter Range DEFAULT or Number between 1 to 31 I PGW A logical reference for an Internet Protocol Gateway DEFAULT
421. st section of the SCCP Programmer s Manual e LSSPROT For SIU mode set to SCCP TCAP MAP 1S41 INAP DTS DTS MAP DTS INAP or DTS 1S41 depending on the layer of the protocol stack that the user application interfaces with For SWS mode set to MAP For example for SIU to configure a local sub system SSN 6 for an application with module_id 0x3d that implements an HLR by directly interfacing to MAP the following command would be used SCCP_LSS 3 0x06 0x3d 0x0000 MAP Additionally for example for SWS operation to configure a local sub system SSN 8 for use in SWS mode the following command would be used SCCP_LSS 3 0x08 0x45 0x0000 MAP Note The MAP IS41 and INAP modules currently support only a single user module each therefore all MAP 1S41 or INAP local sub systems must use the same lt module_id gt value Note Different local subsystems may specify different DTS variants however the DTS protocol and the non DTS protocol cannot be specified simultaneously e g MAP and DTS MAP may not be specified at the same time 128 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional SCCP Local Sub System configuration is viewed using the CNSSP MMI The status of DTS SCCP Local hosts can read using the STDHP MMI command 10 9 SCCP_ RSS SCCP Remote Sub Systems Synopsis
422. stem if present modcap A binary file containing a software license allowing Signaling Server operating software to function on this particular system config CF3 A binary configuration file containing dynamically configurable data that is common to all modes of operation Parameters set by the CNSYS command would for example be stored in this file config txt The text configuration file for an SWS or SIU if present Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 The files can be recovered from the syslog directory using FTP as detailed below ftp 192 168 0 1 user siguser password KKEKKKKKK cd syslog dist ascii get config txt get sgw lic bin get sgw lic get modcap get config CF3 get SDC CF4 cd dist get SS7G40 SIU tgz get SS7G40 sgw tgz ad ct ct bye The Signaling Server may be restored to the configuration and licensing stored on the portable media by inserting the portable media USB into the Signaling Server and re booting On re boot the system will install the files stored on USB onto the system Configuration files present on the portable media will overwrite any in the FTPUSER directory Note Once the system has been restored you must ensure that the USB is removed from the Signaling Server otherwise on subsequent re boot the system will again install the files stored on portable media Note You also have the ability to re install any of the previously backed u
423. supports a Network Context specific NC parameter This parameter must be used for circuit groups logically assigned to all Network Contexts with the exception of the default Network Context NCO There is no other ISUP specific Network Context configuration command 7 4 8 SCCP 7 4 8 1 Applications In the same manner as MTP3 there is one instance of SCCP for each Network Context therefore messages that are destined for a specific network must be sent to the correct SCCP module ID When TCAP or DTS is used above SCCP those modules handle the sending of messages to the correct module without further user interaction 7 4 8 2 Configuration The SCCP_CONFIG config txt command described in Section 5 10 1 SCCP_CONFIG SCCP Configuration on page 116 can be used to configure each Network Context and local point code within the system NCO must be configured before NC1 NC2 and NC3 can be configured The existing commands SCCP_LSS SCCP_RSP SCCP_RSS and SCCP_CONC_SSR include the NC parameter This parameter must be used for sub system resources logically assigned to all Network Contexts with the exception of the default Network Context NCO For the default Network Context the value NCO is optional 372 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 7 4 9 DTS 7 4 9 1 Applications DTS users should follow the instructions above which also apply when using DTS The DTS_ROUTING REQ message includes a DTSPN_n
424. t 1 10 3 BER gt 1 1075 OK Possible CLOCK STATUS values are FAULT NOT OK ACTIVE OK STAND ALONE telephony bus disabled Note When the internal telephony bus is disabled in the board the asterisk symbol is displayed in the SYNCPRI field and the CLOCK STATUS is set to STAND ALONE Possible PCM STATUS values are 310 PCM LOSS No signal sensed on the PCM input AIS The remote side sends all ones indicating that there is an error condition or it is not initialized SYNC LOSS Loss of frame alignment since no frame synchronization has been received REMOTE ALARM The remote end indicates that is it is OK but also indicates that it is detecting an error condition BER gt 1 10 3 The PCM is encountering a Bit Error Rate BER of 10 3 BER gt 1 10 5 The PCM is encountering a BER of 10 5 OK The PCM is operational Possible CLOCK STATUS values are FAULT The PCM is unable to provide clock for the SIU due to a fault on the board NOT OK The PCM is not a valid clock source ACTIVE The PCM is a valid clock source and is currently providing clock for the server OK The PCM is a valid clock source but is currently not providing clock for the SIU Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 STANDBY The PCM is a valid clock source and will provide clock for the server in the event of failure of the ACTIVE clock source STAND ALONE Telephony bus disabled 6 13 16 STRAP SIG
425. t Boards gt Cell Streams gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The ATM Cell Stream ID has not been initiated The ATM Cell Stream is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The ATM Cell Stream is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNACI CELLSTR 1 157 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 3 3 CNACP ATM Cell Stream Configuration This command displays the all configured ATM Cell Streams Syntax CNACP Web Management Location System Administration gt Boards gt Cell Streams gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNACP Output Format ATM Cell Stream Configuration CELLSTR BPOS L2ID PORTID OPTIONS IMALEN DEFVPI DEFVCI 1 0 1 1 0x0000 0 12 10 Note See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command ATM_CELL_STREAM for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 4 CNBOP Board Configuration This command displays the configuration of all Signaling boards Note The board serial number does not need to be set or changed as it is determined automatically If a board is added or replaced then the board type should be set or unset and reset when replacing and the system restarted after which
426. t Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Security Access Prerequisites The IP Firewall ID has been initiated The default rule cannot be deleted 223 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example IPFWE PFW 1 6 6 3 IPFWI IP Firewall Initiate This command defines a rule for an IP address or network accessing the System Syntax PFWI PFW I PACT MASK IPSRC IPDEST IPSVC Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt Firewall gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Security Access MMI Prerequisites The IP Firewall ID has not been initiated There must be at least one IPSRC or IPDEST If IPSRC and IPDEST are specified they must be of the same IP type IPV4 or IPV6 Example IPFWI IPFW 1 I PACT ACCEPT PSRC 172 16 1 0 24 6 6 4 I PFWP IP Firewall Configuration This command displays IP addresses and networks that may access the System If no value is shown then the server may be accessed from any network that can route to it Note The default IP Firewall ID cannot be deleted This rule is the default action to be performed when no match is made by any of the other rules Syntax PFWP PFW Web Management Location System Administration gt Access Control gt Firewall gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Prerequisites
427. t file Example MRCEE CONCI D 1 6 10 2 MRCEI Message Router Concerned Entity Initiate This command adds a new Concerned Entity Note Configuration may be dynamically added by 1 Entering an additional configuration command MRF_CE in the config txt file 2 Executing the MRCEI MMI command to load that configuration Syntax MRCEI CONCI D Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Concerned Entity gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access 256 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 MMI Prerequisites The Concerned Entity has not been initiated A value of ANY cannot be used for a DPC when dynamically adding a new Concerned Entity The Concerned Entity is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Concerned Entity is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example MRCEI CP 1 6 10 3 MRCEP Message Router Concerned Entity Configuration This command displays all configured Message Router Concerned Entitys Note See the individual parameter definitions of the config txt command MRF_CE defined in the user manual for a full description of the parameters supported Syntax MRCEP CONCID Web Management Location System Administration gt Message Router gt Concer
428. t Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MO SMS Rx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access 237 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example MAORP PROFILE 0 Output Format MAP MO SMS Rx Profile PROFILE NAME MOSMS_RECV_0 NC NCO SCTON International SCNP ISDN SCADDR 666666666666 RCOPT N OPTIONS 0x00000000 ASC MAN 6 7 7 MAOTI MAOTC MAOTE MAP MO SMS Tx Profile Synopsis Commands to initiate change and end configurations associated with MAP Transmit MO SMS service profiles Syntax MAOTI PROFILE NAME MSCADDR ORGADDR DSTSCADDR NC MSCTON MSCNP ORGTON ORGNP DSTSCTON DSTSCNP RCOPT OPTIONS RRID MAOTC PROFILE NAME MSCTON MSCNP MSCADDR ORGTON ORGNP ORGADDR DSTSCTON DSTSCNP DSTSCADDR RCOPT OPTIONS RRID MAOTE PROFI LE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MO SMS Tx gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Update Access 238 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Prerequisites The profile and name must be unique for the service The MSC address must be unique within the network context Example MAOTI PROFILE 0 NAME MOSMS_TRANS_0 MSCADDR 123456 ORGADDR 24333 DSTSCADDR 2211563456 MAOTC PROFI LE 0 MSCADDR
429. t Management The Signaling Server supports the configuration of multiple user accounts Using the management interface it is possible to initiate change or remove a user account from the server or to display the configuration data for the user account 3 4 2 User Access Profiles A user with system administration access is able to define a set of User Access Profiles On creation of a User Account the system administrator can then assign a particular User Access Profile to a User to give them the level of access they require For convenience a number of predefine profiles are created at system initialization These may be added to or deleted as required by the Administrator Within each defined profile access may be granted or denied for the following Category Description CLI Telnet Serial support for mmi management access FTP The ability to log on and read diagnostics as well as upload files via ftp sftp Support the ability to telnet in over ssh for mmi management access MWS Management Web Server The ability to access mmi sws management using Web Management Server WSS Web Services API Web Server The ability to use the Web Services API MGR The ability to read mmi sws configuration status and measurements The ability to view files in the ftpuser account using the Web Management Interface MGW The ability to change add delete mmi sws configuration 30 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Op
430. tain the following Mnemonic Function Padding ignored Separator used to split the mask into sections K or KEEP The digits in the corresponding section of the global title address information undergoing translation will be preserved Ror The digits in the corresponding section of the global title address REPLACE information will be deleted and the digits in the corresponding section of the primary or backup address will be inserted in their place e PRI_GTAID Identifies the SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS command the use as the primary translation e SEC_GTAID Identifies the SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS command the use as the secondary backup translation e GTTSRC Identifier the source to which the Global Title Translation applies When GTTSRC LOCAL the command only applies for messages generated by a local sub system i e outgoing messages When GTTSRC REMOTE the command only applies to messages passed up to SCCP from the network i e incoming messages If GTTSRC ANY or the parameter is omitted the command applies to all messages e BAK_DUAL When set to Y this causes any SCCP messages that match the GTT pattern but cannot be routed due to a network failure to be passed to SCCP on the partner unit so that it can reattempt routing OPTIONS e RIID Routing Indicator ID Reserved for future use Global Title Translation configuration is viewed using the CNGTP MMI command Global Titles can be added to the config
431. te command line in the config txt file after the SCCP_LSS command that identifies MAP as the protocol module Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax MAP_CONFIG lt OPTIONS gt Example MAP_CONFIG 2 Parameters The MAP_CONFIG command includes the following parameter e OPTIONS A 32 bit value containing run time options for passing to the MAP module Individual bit definitions are as specified for the options field in the MAP_MSG_CONFIG command as defined in the MAP Programmer s Manual Currently this includes two bits as follows Bit Mnemonic Description 0 MAPF_V2_ERRORS V3 dialogs use the V2 error format 1 MAPF_NO_PREARRANGED Dialogs are closed immediately on _END reception of CLOSE _REQ 137 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands 5 14 2 MAP_NC_CONFIG MAP Configuration Synopsis The MAP_NC_CONFIG command defines the global configuration parameters for MAP existing in an additional SS7 Network Context to that identified by the MAP_CONFIG command See Section 7 4 Configuring Multiple Network Contexts on page 368 for more information Applicability SIU Syntax MAP_NC_CONFIG lt NC gt lt OPTIONS gt Example MAP_NC_CONFIG NC1 2 Parameters The MAP_NC_CONFIG command includes the following parameter e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that MAP is being configured for Supported values are NC1 NC2 or NC3 e OPTIONS A 32 bit value containing r
432. ted to the first circuit in the circuit group Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 BCID The logical ID for the first circuit in the circuit group It must lie in the range 0 to one less than the number of circuits supported Parameter Range Number between 0 to 65535 BEST_PING 322 The time in milliseconds the best ping took to reach and return from the target IP node Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued BIND Identifier to Bind a Local Application Server to either Remote Signaling Gateway or Remote Application Server Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 BLINK The index of the logical signaling processor SP channel on the board allocated for this signaling link When the SS7 link is to be conveyed over M2PA the blink parameter identifies the SIGTRAN link Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 BOND The Bond Network Interface to be used Parameter Range NONE BONDO BOND1 BOND2 BOND3 BPOS Board position Parameter Range Number between 0 to 1 BPOS2 BRDTYPE The board the PCM is on Parameter Range Number between 0 to 1 Board Type Parameter Range NONE SS7LD SS7MD BUILDOUT Specifies the range of build out settings for a T1 interface Parameter Range Number between 0 to 12 C7RT CAUSE SS7 Route ID Parameter Range Number b
433. tem Administration gt SCCP gt Load Share Tables gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access MMI Prerequisites The SCCP Loadshare Table ID has been initiated The SCCP Loadshare Table is not present in the config txt file The SCCP Loadshare Table is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SCCP Loadshare Table is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNLTE LST 1 6 3 43 CNLTI SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration This command adds a new SCCP Loadshare Table Note Configuration may be dynamically added by 1 Entering an additional configuration command SCCP_LOAD_SHARE_TABLE in the config txt file 2 Executing the CNLTI MMI command to load that configuration Syntax CNLTI LST Web Management Location System Administration gt SCCP gt Load Share Tables gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access 183 Chapter 6 Management Commands MMI Prerequisites The SCCP Loadshare Table ID has not been initiated The SCCP Loadshare Table is present in the config txt file Example CNLTI LST 1 6 3 44 CNLTP SCCP Loadshare Table Configuration This co
434. the OPC and APC values this is the local point code of the SIU pair Links are added to the I nter SIU link set using the MTP_LINK command assigning incrementing REF and SLC values as used normally The BPOS and BLINK parameters should be set accordingly A route should be defined on each unit for the inter signaling server link set using the MTP_ROUTE command referencing the appropriate LINKSET with a DPC value set to the point code of the SIU pair The management entity within each signaling server indicates the availability of the inter signaling server links to the application running on the first host using the message based Application Programming Interface API Additional information for the protocol configuration commands and parameters may be found in the previous sections 7 6 Configuring an ANSI System This section provides additional guidelines for configuring an Signaling Server to operate in accordance with the ANSI T1 specifications The default protocol configuration for an Signaling Server specifies ITU T protocol behavior To operate in accordance with ANSI it is necessary to modify the options settings for MTP3 and the User Part held in the protocol configuration file on the Signaling Server The MTP_CONFIG OPTIONS parameter must have bits 8 to 11 set to 1 value OxOf00 to define ANSI operation The MTP_LINKSET SSF parameter must have the least two significant bits B and A both set to 1 so that all MTP3 originate
435. the Trap Format parameter The port parameter allows configuration of a destination port which is different from the default standard SNMP TRAP port 162 If the remote SNMP v1 or v2c manager has been configured to only recognize TRAPs received with a community string the TCOM parameter accommodates that value 200 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 If an SNMP v3 TRAP is to be issued then the USER parameter value is used The USER parameter is used to specify a user which has been defined with the CNUSI command For SNMP V3 TRAPs an engine identifier can be optionally specified for use with a particular remote SNMP manager The engine identifier is configured with the ENGINE parameter If an ENGINE identifier is not specified then the system will use its default ENGINE identifier the value of which can be auto discovered and viewed using the SNMP Configuration command For most use cases the default ENGINE identifier should be used rather than configuring an explicit ENGINE ID with this command Finally the LABEL parameter is used to specify an optional string identifier for the manager Syntax CNSMI MNGR IPADDR TPORT TFORMAT TCOM SNMPUSER ENGI NE LABEL i Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Managers gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The DSM
436. then read into the system using the CNRAI command Remote Application Servers are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNRAE MMI command 7 5 STN_RASLIST SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List Configuration Synopsis This command attaches a list of SIGTRAN links to a Remote Application Server The SIGTRAN links provide the SCTP associations to reach the Remote Application Server Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax STN_RASLIST RLID RAS SNLINK Examples STN_RASLIST RLID 1 RAS 16 SNLINK 1 STN_RASLIST RLID 2 RAS 16 SNLINK 2 STN_RASLIST RLID 3 RAS 16 SNLINK 32 Parameters The STN_RASLIST command has the following parameters RLID Logical identifier for a RAS to SNLINK relationship The valid range is 0 6399 RAS Remote Application Server The valid range is 0 255 SNLINK Logical reference for a SIGTRAN Link The SIGTRAN link cannot be M2PA cannot be configured for communication to a RSG and cannot be already attached to this server A RAS cannot have more than 32 snlinks 4 when loadsharing A snlink may only be associated with a single Remote Application Server The valid range is 0 255 SIGTRAN Remote Application Server List configuration is viewed using the CNRLP MMI command After startup additional Remote Application Server Lists can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNRAI command Remote Application Servers Lists are r
437. tion System Administration gt Transaction gt DTS Route Requests gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The DTS Route has not been initiated The DTS Route is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The DTS Host Route is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNDRI DRID 1 166 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 3 17 CNDRP DTS Host Routing Resource Print This command is used to display any DTS host routing that was configured using the DTS_ ROUTE command in config txt The CNDRP command is defined as follows Synopsis This command displays DTS Host Routing configuration data Syntax CNDRP DRI D NC HOSTID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt DTS Route Requests gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNDRP CNDRP DRI D 1 Output Format DTS Host Routing Configuration DRID NC HOSTID SSN CLSEQ OPTIONS LABEL 0 NCO 0 0 0 0x0000 1 NC1 1 8 0 0x0000 2 NCO 1 6 0 0x0001 User App 1 6 3 18 CNDUP Dual Operation Configuration This command displays Dual Server operation configuration Note See the individual parameter definitions of the config txt command SIU_DUAL defined
438. tion gt SS7 gt SS7 Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access 197 Chapter 6 Management Commands Prerequisites The SS7 Link has been initiated The SS7 Link is not present in the config txt file The SS7 Link has been deactivated The SS7 Link is not used in any other configuration There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SS7 Link is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNSLE LINK 1 6 3 66 CNSLI SS7 Link Initiate This command adds a new SS7 Link Note SS7 Links are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNSLI LINK Web Management Location System Administration gt SS7 gt SS7 Links gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The SS7 Link has not been initiated The SS7 Link is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SS7 Link is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNSLI LINK 1 198 Dialogic
439. tion gt Software gt Software Licenses gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STLCP Output Format Software License Capability Status CAPABILITY SIU SWS M2 PA M3UA MTP TCAP MAP IS41 INAP SNMP MONITORING EVALUATION NC NCO STATUS LINKS RATE ACTIVE INACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE 16 154 ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE DEACTIVATED INACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE The meaning of each field in the output is as follows e CAPABILITY A Licensable capability of the system This is a protocol or operating mode capability which has been purchased or is under evaluation e EVALUATION A indicates that the license capability is undergoing evaluation e NC A Network Context the capability is associated Blank if not applicable e STATUS State of the license capability on the system where e NONE This capability is not present It requires a software license e INACTIVE The license is present but not running for software reasons e g the license is for a different mode of operation or the capability is dependent on another capability that is not active CREDIT 100 e DEACTIVATED The license is present but not running due to configuration reasons 307 Chapter 6 Management Commands e ACTIVE The license is active e ERROR This license cannot be activated as it depends on another license which is not present
440. tion Update Access Prerequisites The SIGTRAN bind has not been initiated The SIGTRAN bind is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The SIGTRAN Bind is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log 196 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Example CNSBI BIND 1 6 3 64 CNSBP SIGTRAN Local Bind Configuration This command displays the association between the Local Application Server with the Remote Application Server or Remote Signaling Gateway identifying the route to reach the destination Syntax CNSBP Web Management Location System Administration gt SIGTRAN gt Local Binds gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example CNSBP Output Format Configuration SIGTRAN Bind BIND LAS RAS RSG OPTIONS 1 1 1 0x0000 2 2 2 0x0000 3 3 23 0x0000 4 3 21 0x0000 See either the individual parameter definitions or the config txt command STN_LBIND for a full description of the parameters used in the output format 6 3 65 CNSLE SS7 Link End This command removes an SS7 Link Note SS7 Links are dynamically removed by first deleting the SS7 Link from the config txt file and then executing this command to unload the SS7 Link from the system Syntax CNSLE LINK Web Management Location System Administra
441. tion Update Resources End cccceceeeee eect eens ee ee eee eaee 215 6 3 95 CNURI Configuration Update Resources Initiate 1 0 0 cece ee cere eee eee 216 6 3 96 CNUSC Configuration SNMP User Chang cceceeee eee eeeeeeee teen eee eaed 216 6 3 97 CNUSE Configuration SNMP User End ccceeeceee cece nent ee eee teen e teeter ead 217 6 3 98 CNUSI Configuration SNMP User Initiate 217 6 3 99 CNUSP SNMP User Configuration cccceceee eee eee te eaten ened 218 Database COMMANGS aenean E ee AGG SR a ae Aa 218 6 4 1 DBSVP Subscriber Database Service Configuration cccceeeeeeeee ee eee 219 6 4 2 DBSVS Subscriber Database Service Change cceceeeee eect eee e teeta teens 219 Helix Commands nia ana thes aa a R E a trig hades anaia E EE An 220 6 5 1 HDPRP Diameter Peer Configuration sssssssssssrrsrerssrrrrrrsrreserrrrirerrrrrns 221 6 5 2 HMFES Flow Environment Configuration cceceeeeee teen e ee ee ee eee nena ened 221 6 5 3 HMFEP Flow Environment Configuration cccccceeeeee eee eee ee ee eee ee teen ed 222 Contents 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 IP COMMANS siete eee ee ee deve seve edie th a in eave lil ede 222 6 6 1 IPFWC IP Firewall Change ccecce teeter ete eee nena ened 223 6 6 2 gt IPEWE lP Firewall End iiaea a ove nde aa a e ahah nha ieee ea aS eel 223 6 6 3 I PFWI IP Firewall Initiate 0 0 0 netted 224 6 6 4
442. tion is in progress the synchronizing disk will be in an indeterminate state and on restart may cause the server to fail to boot In such an event the disk should be removed from the server and any formatting on the disk manually removed The disk should be re inserted in the server and the system booted To restart synchronization use MNINI and MNINE Alternatively the system may be booted without the disk in place and the disk re inserted once the system is operational Synchronization is re activated using MNINI and MNINE Warning Attempts to reactivate disks that have failed due to hardware reasons potentially can lead to a restart of the server The server operates a watchdog to protect the operation of the server If the server becomes unstable due to a failed hardware or software component the watchdog will force a system restart to attempt to resolve the problem 9 System Backup and Restoration You can back up the system configuration software licenses and operating software to an archive which can be restored to the system at a later date At startup the system will take a copy of the following system files storing them in the syslog subdirectory of the siguser account File Description S S7g40 siu tgz A binary file contain SWS mode operating software if present Ss7g40 sws tgz A binary file contain SIU mode operating software if present sgw lic A text file containing the current software licenses active on the sy
443. tion of the link is specified by setting the stream STREAM and timeslot TS 377 Chapter 7 Configuration Guidelines 7 5 4 2 Routing Configuration A route should be defined on both Signaling Server A and Signaling Server B for the inter signaling server link set using the MTP_ROUTE command referencing the appropriate linkset LS1 with a DPC value set to the point code of the signaling server pair This route may only be specified to operate over a single link set Each DPC that may be accessed from the application must have an accompanying MTP_ROUTE declaration For dual resilient operation each route includes a preferred link set the LS1 parameter and a secondary link set specified by LS2 LS1 should reference the link set connecting the signaling server to the appropriate adjacent signaling point LS2 must be set to the linkset id assigned to the inter signaling server link set 7 5 4 3 Circuit Group Configuration For dual resilient operation each signaling server should contain identical circuit group declarations using the appropriate SUP_CFG_ CCTGRP command These circuit group configurations do not become active on either unit until an Activate Circuit Group API command API_MSG_COMMAND with cmd_type 8 has been issued to a particular signaling server 7 5 4 4 Example Configuration To define routing to the DPC 200 in the example following which is also the adjacent point code using the first E1 port on the first signaling b
444. tive string of length 0 to 31 Must not contain any spaces 337 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued LGTYPE Logging Filter Parameter Range IPADDR Outputs IP traffic associated with a configured IP Addresses Note Data associated with the management interfaces will not be logged SCTP Outputs SCTP traffic If specified the associated data can be used to limit the output to the particular local SCTP port which would normally be a local port associated with a SIGTRAN link HOST Outputs traffic send and received from RSI Hosts If specified the associated data can be used to limit the output to RSI host id REMOTE Outputs traffic send and received from a Partner Server The associated data field must be blank UDP Outputs UDP SNMP traffic If specified the associated data can be used to limit the output to the particular local UDP port WSAPI Outputs traffic send and received from Web Service Hosts The associated data field must be blank LINE For Telnet and Serial MMI the number of lines that may be displayed before being prompted to continue A value of 0 indicates that commands will output to completion without further prompting The parameter is not applicable for Web management MMI Parameter Range Number from 0 to 100 LINK SS7 link identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 LINKSET Link Set ID Parameter Range Number betwee
445. to be set to the values shown in the following table ITU T or ANSI selection is made by setting the value of the MTP_CONFIG options parameter Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 MTP2 ITU T ITU T ANSI 64k ANSI 56k HSL Timer 64k mode 48k mode mode mode T1 45s 45s 13s 13s 300 s T2 30s 30s 23s 23s 30s T3 125s 125s 11 55 11 55 125s T4N 8 25 2 35 2s 2 3 s 30s T4E 500 ms 600 ms 500 ms 600 ms 500 ms T5 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms T6 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 5 55 T7 1 75 1 75 155 155 155 Note The Signaling Server does not perform checks on MTP2 timer values 5 6 6 MTP3_ TIMER MTP3 Timer Configuration Synopsis The MTP3_ TIMER command provides the ability to configure the MTP3 protocol timers from the configuration file Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax MTP3_TIMER NC NCO TIMID TSEC TMSEC Example P3_TIMER TIMID T2 TSEC 1 TMSEC 500 P3_TIMER NC NC1 TIMID T2 TMSEC 1500 MT MT Parameters The MTP3_TI MER command includes the following parameters e NC SS7 Network Context This parameter uniquely identifies the SS7 network that the MTP3 Timer is being configured for Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 and NC3 When the parameter is not present a value of NCO is assumed e TIMID A text identifier for the timer to be configured It should be set to one of the following T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T10 T12 T
446. to match the remote SPC set for this RSP This allows configuration of a default destination sub system for example a gateway SCP Parameter Range Hex number between 0 to ffffffff PING_IPADDR IP address to ping Parameter Range Null or IP address entered as one of the following An PV4 Address An IPV6 Address PMTU POOL PORTID The current Path MTU for the peer address This is the number of bytes available in an SCTP packet for chunks The grouping identifier for a group of items PCM Port ID Parameter Range Number between 0 to 7 PRBSGEN The diagnostic loopback mode PRIV PRIVPASS Identifies the privacy protocol for an SNMP User Account Parameter Range Null or NONE DES AES Identifies the privacy password for an SNMP User Account The privacy protocol parameter must be present Parameter Range Null or Password string of length 1 to 19 349 Chapter 6 Management Commands Table 1 Command Parameters Continued PTMODE Type of MMI Port Parameter Range NONE Serial port without DTR DSR active DTRDSR Serial port with DTR DSR active TELNET Telnet port WEB Web management interface QCUR Current message queue size QMAX Maximum message queue size during the measurement period RANGE The range parameter An example of its use is specifying a range of TCAP dialogs to be displayed by the STTDP command Parameter Range Number bet
447. together with the Originating Point Code OPC uniquely identify an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 The parameter is only applicable for M3UA operation e LAS Logical reference for a Local Application Server The valid range is 0 199 e OPC Specifies an Originating Point Code OPC value for the local Application Server e RC The logical routing context of the local application server An RC may not be associated with any other LAS The valid range is 0 2147483647 TRMD The traffic mode for the local application Server Acceptable values are LS Loadshare OR Override or BC Broadcast Only Loadshare should be used when the Signaling Server is acting as part of a dual redundant Signaling Server pair e OPTIONS This is a 16 bit value used to specify run time options Bit Description 0 When set the configured routing context will be ignored and no routing context will be transmitted 1 15 Reserved and should be set to zero e LABEL A user configurable text string containing up to 32 characters used for identification purposes The parameter is optional Prerequisites SIGTRAN Local Application Server configuration is viewed using the CNLAP MMI command After startup additional Local Application Servers can be added to the config txt file and then read into the system using the CNL
448. transmitted to an application with module id 0x0d on host 0 MONITOR_LINK lt MLINK gt lt IFTYPE gt lt BPOS gt lt BLINK gt lt BPOS2 gt lt STREAM gt lt TS gt lt USER_ID gt lt USER_HOST gt lt OPTIONS gt MONITOR_LINKOTDMO 10 0 16 Ox0d 0 0x0000 MONITOR_LINK1TDMO2 0 1 16 Ox0d 0 0x0000 Once configured whenever a frame is received it is reported to the user s application on the host as an API _MSG RX_IND message or API_MSG RX_INDT if timestamps are configured by setting bit O of the flags field to 1 The following are examples of messages without timestamping enabled S7L 10000 M t8 01 i0000 00 dOd s00 pffff0103 S7L I0000 M t8f01 i0000 00 d0d s00 pffff0103 The following are examples of messages with timestamping enabled S7L I0000 M t8f0f i0000 00 d0d s00 pffff01037caa8ec4e90f2abf S7L I0000 M t8f0f i0000 00 d0d s00 pffff01037caa8ec4c3976bbf During operation the user may also read and optionally reset various statistics on a per link basis using the MSMLP MMI command and view status on the links using the STMLP command 398
449. txt file and then read into the system using the CNGTI command Global Titles are removed from the config txt file and then removed from the system using the CNGTE MMI command 120 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 10 5 SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS Global Title Translation Address Synopsis The SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS command defines the global title to be used as the primary or backup destination of a translation This command must be specified after the SCCP_GTT_PATTERN command The global title address information of this command is combined with the global title being translated by examining the mask provided in the SCCP_GTT command Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS NC NC0 GTAID AI GTT_SPC 0 SSN 0 GT GTAI_REPLACEMENT Example SCCP_GTT_ADDRESS GTAID 9 AIT 0x11 GTT_SPC 0x1234 GT 0x1104 GTAI_REPLACEMENT 0 Parameters NC SS7 Network Context The Network Context together with a Signaling Point Code SPC uniquely identifies an SS7 node by indicating the specific SS7 network it belongs to When not specified a value of NCO is assumed Supported values are NCO NC1 NC2 or NC3 e GTAID A unique ID identifying the address Values in the range 0 1023 are valid A maximum of 256 address _id s may be defined within any or each Network Context Al The Address Indicator octet is formatted according to the point code format specified in the SCCP_CON
450. ugh the entries in the destination table is specified by the HUNT parameter in the Routing Key If the Destination table cannot find an available Remote Application Server in the AS DOMAIN or Destination Point Code in the NETWORK DOMAIN the message router will pass the message onto the partner Signaling Server if available or discard the message if the partner Signaling Server is not available or had previously forwarded the message A Custom Profile can be set to modify the routing label Syntax MRF_DE NC NC0 DESTID DEST DESTSEQ DOMAIN RAS CP DPC LABEL Example MRF_DE DESTID 1 DEST 1 DESTSEQ 1 DOMAIN AS RAS 1 MRF_DE DESTID 2 DEST 2 DESTSEQ 2 DOMAIN NETWORK MRF_DE DESTID 3 DEST 3 DESTSEQ 3 DOMAIN UPART RAS NONE CP NONE Parameters DESTID Logical identifier for the Destination in the range 0 4095 DEST The Destination table ID as specified in a Routing Key in the range 0 4095 DESTSEQ The sequence number of this Destination within the Destination table in the range 0 31 105 Chapter 5 Configuration Commands DOMAIN The destination domain for a message A domain may be either NETWORK either the a MTP network or M3UA when acting as an ASP User Part UPART AS M3UA when acting as a Signaling Gateway or PARTNER when routing to the partner Message Router If the domain is set to AS the associated Remote Application Server is determined by the RAS para
451. un time options for passing to the MAP module Individual bit definitions are as specified for the options field in the MAP_MSG_CONFIG command as defined in the MAP Programmer s Manual Currently this includes two bits as follows Bit Mnemonic Description 0 MAPF_V2_ERRORS V3 dialogs use the V2 error format 1 MAPF_NO_PREARRANGED Dialogs are closed immediately on _END reception of CLOSE_REQ 5 15 1S41 Configuration Commands There are currently no supported S41 configuration commands 5 16 INAP Configuration Commands The INAP configuration commands include e INAP_CONFIG INAP Configuration e INAP_NC_CONFIG INAP Network Context Configuration e INAP_AC INAP Application Contexts e INAP_FE INAP Functional Entities 138 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 5 16 1 INAP_ CONFIG I NAP Configuration Synopsis The INAP_ CONFIG command defines the global configuration parameters for INAP when existing in a single network or for Network Context 0 NCO when existing in multiple Network Contexts See Section 7 4 Configuring Multiple Network Contexts on page 368 for more information This command should only be used if the INAP software has been licensed and configured on the Signaling Server Applicability SIU Syntax INAP_CONFIG lt OPTIONS gt Example INAP_CONFIG 0 Parameters The INAP_CONFIG command includes the following parameter OPTIONS A 32 bit value
452. units M3UA must be configured to operate in a particular network context using the STN_NC command MTP and M3UA may be configured in the same network context but must be configured to route to different Destination point Codes When a Signaling Server is using M3UA it is considered be acting as one or more Local Application Servers Using the STN_LINK command you can configure up to 256 M3UA links These links may be connected to either a SIGTRAN Signaling Gateway using the STN_LINK command or up to 256 Remote Application Servers Signaling End Points using the STN_RAS and STN_RASLIST commands When interworking to a SIGTRAN Signaling Gateway the Signaling Server can be configured to route to up to 256 Remote Point Codes in the network using the Signaling Gateway with the STN_ROUTE and STN_RSGLIST commands Finally the Local Application Server can be associated with either a Remote Application Server or Signaling Gateway using the STN_LBIND command 7 11 2 Configuration Examples SIU to Signaling Gateway Example configuration of an SIU acting as Point Code 3 communicating to point code 2 via a Signaling Gateway Signaling Server Host Configuration Change SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS BACKUP_HOST OPTIONS MIN_HOSTS DMHOST SIU_HOSTS NUM_HOSTS 1 BACKUP_HOST NONE OPTIONS 0 MIN_HOSTS 1 DMHOST 0 M3UA Options Configuration x STN_CONFIG NC NC0 SS7MODE OPTIONS 0 SHARE 100 STN_CONFIG SS7MODE ITU14
453. unt Control User Profile Initiate cece eee ee eee ee eae 148 6 1 12 ACUPP Account Control User Profile Configuration cceeeeeeeeeee eee es 148 6 2 Alarm GommMands 3 3 c 0 sider a et a a aa a E aE a a e a 149 6 2 1 ALCDP Alarm Codes cc 0 a cceresvdhes pth vader es pese deen deb aberrant ee eabea EA EEA 149 6 2 2 ALLP Active Alarm List rinman ee rere teeta aaa 151 6 23 ALLOP Alarm LOG seis ev tenet AA tea eet ead Wek EEA 151 6 2 4 ALTEE Alarim Test End smarre epa A ieee iN E eA eek bed veet 152 6 2 5 ALTE Alarm Test Initiate esda sonent ae ataa e aa caer teak 152 Contents 6 3 Configuration COMMANAG 6 ccc ne A E aa aA 153 6 3 1 CNACE ATM Cell Stream End cect teeter need 156 6 3 2 CNACI ATM Cell Stream Initiate eee netted 157 6 3 3 CNACP ATM Cell Stream Configuration ccc eee cnet eee teeta eee ee tad 158 6 3 4 CNBOP Board Configuration ccc ene etter neta 158 6 3 5 CNBOS Board Set doan e arn did ie area as 159 6 3 6 CNCGE Circuit Group End 0 eee e nena en ed 159 6 3 7 CNCGI Circuit Group Initiate eee eee rete eee ata ed 160 6 3 8 CNCGP Circuit Group Configuration 1 1 0 0 cece cece eee eee ee te ee ee nena ened 161 6 3 9 CNCRE SS7 Route Ende wcecsoa ce aie ala a eee eae 161 6 3 10 CNCRI SS7 Route Initiate ssssesssssrssrersrrerersernrrrsernnsrrerrrnernnrererrerene
454. ur bits each in the second octet 0100 Global title includes TT NP ES and NAI The lt global_title gt parameter should be three hexadecimal octets prefix Ox followed by six hexadecimal digits the TT in the first octet the NP and ES four bits each in the second octet and the NAI in the third octet Other values are undefined spares or reserved Bit 2 SSN Indicator A 1 indicates that SubSystem Number is used in addressing Bit 1 PC Indicator A 1 indicates that Point Code is used in addressing For ANSI the parameter is defined as Bit 8 Designated for national use O indicates that the address is international and 1 indicates that the address is national Bit 7 Routing indicator 0 Route on GT 1 Route on DPC and SSN Bits 6 3 Global title indicator the value in these bits indicates what data precedes address information in the global title so in the context of the SCCP_GTT_PATTERN statement which octets are expected in the lt global_title gt parameter Defined values are 0000 No Global title In this case the lt global_title gt parameter value should be O zero base10 without 0x prefix 0001 Global title includes TT Numbering Plan NP and Encoding Scheme ES The lt global_title gt parameter should be two hexadecimal octets prefix 0x followed by four hexadecimal digits the TT in the first octet the NP and ES four bits each in the second oct
455. uration This command displays Diameter peer configuration data Syntax HDPRP HDPR Web Management Location System Administration gt Diameter gt Peer gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example HDPRP HDPRP HDPR 0O Output Format Diameter Peer Configuration HDPR HOST REALM ABEL 0 dmr02 01 forlab dialogic com dialogic com London001 1 dmr02 02 forlab dialogic com dialogic com London002 2 dmr02 03 forlab dialogic com dialogic com London003 3 dmr02 04 forlab dialogic com dialogic com London004 6 5 2 HMFES Flow Environment Configuration This command sets the Flow Environment log and trace levels Syntax HMFES TRACELVL LOGLVL Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Flow Environment gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Example HMFES TRACELVL 4 LOGLVL 4 221 Chapter 6 Management Commands 6 5 3 HMFEP Flow Environment Configuration This command displays configuration of the Flow Environment Syntax HMFEP Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt Flow Environment gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes DSH ermissions Configuration Read Access Example HMFEP Output Format Flow Environment Configuration TRACELVL 4 LOGLVL 4 6 6 IP Commands PFWC IP Firewall Change PFWE
456. urements Command to display traffic measurements associated with MAP Transmit MT SMS Services Page 1 displays summary measurements associated with each MAP service Page 2 displays measurements for each profile associated with a MAP service When a profile is specified Page 2 measurements are displayed When measurements are reset values and the measurement period are set to zero Individual profile measurements are only reset when the profile ID is specified as well as the reset field otherwise the counters for the per service measurement summary are reset Syntax MSTTP RESET PAGE PROFILE Web Management Location System Administration gt MAP Services gt SMS gt MT SMS Tx gt Stats Applicability Operating Modes SWS Permissions Configuration Read Access Example MSTTP MSTTP PAGE 2 MSTTP PROFILE 2 MSTTP RESET Y Output Format MAP MT SMS Tx Measurements Page 1 or 2 MAP_ SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD Mobile_Term_TX_Req 23 1 01 29 16 Send_Routing_Info_ for SM 0 0 01 29 16 Report_Delivery_SM 0 0 01 29 16 Atomic_Mobile_Term_TX_Req 0 0 01 29 16 MAP MT SMS Tx Measurements Page 2 or 2 PROFILE MAP_SERVICE SUCCESS FAIL PERIOD 0 Mobile_Term_TX_Req 23 1 01 29 16 0 Send_Routing_Info_for SM 0 0 01 29 16 295 Chapter 6 Management Commands 0 Report_Delivery_SM 0 0 01 29 16 0 Atomic_Mobile_Term_TX_Req 0 0 01 29 16 The meaning of each field in the output is as follows PROFILE a profile associated with th
457. us of the corresponding link is displayed If the LINK parameter is not specified the status of all configured Monitor links is displayed Syntax STMLP MLINK Applicability Operating Modes SIU Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STMLP Output Format MLINK L2_LINK_STATUS SS7 Monitor Link Status 0 OUT OF SERVICE 1 IN SERVICE 2 IN SERVICE The meaning of each field in the output is as follows 308 e MLINK Shows the value of the link_id parameter for that link as configured using the MONITOR_LINK command in the config txt file e LINK_STATUS Layer 2 status possible values are e NOT APPLICABLE Status is not applicable for this type of monitor link Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 e UNKNOWN No traffic is being observed by the monitor link e OUT OF SERVICE The monitored link appears out of service e IN SERVICE The monitored link appears in service 6 13 14 STNIP Network Interface Status Reports the status of the Network interfaces Syntax STNIP Web Management Location System Administration gt Server Management gt Network Interfaces gt Status Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Read Access Example STNIP Output Format Network Interface Status Page 1 of 2 NETIF SPEED DUPLEX STATUS ETHO 100 FULL UP ETH1 100 FULL UP ETH2 DOWN ETH3 DOWN
458. used in any other configuration Local Sub System Resources other than SCCP cannot be dynamically removed There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Sub System Resource is present in the config txt file Note Circuit Groups are dynamically removed by first deleting the group from the config txt file Example CNSSE SSRID 1 6 3 78 CNSSI SCCP Subsystem Resource Initiate This command adds a new Sub System Resource Note Sub System Resources are dynamically added by first adding the configuration to the config txt file and then executing this command to load that configuration onto the system Syntax CNSSI SSRID Web Management Location System Administration gt Transaction gt SCCP SSRs gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access Prerequisites The Sub System Resource ID has not been initiated The Sub System Resource is present in the config txt file There are no startup parse or configuration errors present The Sub System Resource is present in the config txt file There are no restart or configuration failed alarms present in the alarm log Example CNSSI SSRID 1 206 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 6 3 79 CNSSP SCCP Subsystem Resource Configuration This command displays SSR configuration data Syntax CNSSP
459. valents M2PA links Up to 512 link equivalents SS7 linksets 120 SS7 links 256 SS7 routes 4096 Remote Application 256 servers M3UA routes 4096 Network contexts 4 Note For SIGTRAN links A link equivalent is the equivalent to the use of a 64kb s link at a maximum loading of 0 6 Erlang Individual user deployments may exhibit different characteristics from this in which case it may be necessary to provision more or less capacity accordingly Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 1 2 2 SS7G41 Capacities SIU Mode The table below provides the SS7G41 capacities in SIU mode Feature or Protocol Capacity ISUP BICC Up to 65 535 CICs 2048 circuit groups SCCP Up to 512 Local sub systems remote sub systems or remote signaling points TCAP Up to 1 048 576 simultaneous active dialogs MAP Up to 65 535 simultaneous active dialogs IS41 Up to 65 535 simultaneous active dialogs INAP Up to 65 535 simultaneous active dialogs Hosts Up to 128 hosts 1 2 3 SS7G41 Capacities SWS Mode The table below provides the SS7G41 capacities in SWS mode Feature or Protocol Capacity HTTP Support Web service API HTTP HTTPS RESTful API over HTTP HTTP content XML XSD provided MAP Service APIs SMS Mobile Originated Mobile Terminated USSD Location 17 Chapter 1 Overview 18 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7
460. ver Power Cycle Server Changing the IP Address of the Remote Management I nterface The remote management interface Lights Out Management IP address can be configured from within that interface itself Once logged into the default 192 168 0 2 you can change the IP address on the configuration gt network menu 50 Note Management and configuration of the Lights Out Interface is purely within the interface itself and wholly separate from Signaling Server Management Tools Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 4 8 Hard Disk Management 4 8 1 Hard Disk Drive RAID Management The SS7G41 systems are equipped with 2 mirrored hard disk drives configured in RAID 1 array Redundant Array of Independent Disks These disks will remain synchronized ensuring that an up to date copy of all data on the disk drives such as the operating system software Dialogic DSI signaling software system licenses and configuration files will be maintained on both disks In the event of failure of a single drive the Signaling Server will continue to support the capabilities of the Signaling Server When the failed disk drive is replaced with a unformatted disk drive following the procedure below the Signaling Server will mirror the operating software and data onto the new drive In the event of hard disk failure the system will alarm identifying the disk as unavailable The disk drive must be deactivated using the MNINI
461. ver with the Remote Application Server or Remote Signaling Gateway identifying the route to reach the destination The software supports M3UA IPSP Single Ended SE communication therefore the Remote Application Server must have the same routing context as the Local Application Server When communicating with multiple Remote Application Servers there must be additional Local Application Servers each having a different routing context Applicability SIU SWS DSH Syntax STN_LBIND BIND LAS RAS OPTIONS 0 STN_LBIND BIND LAS RSG OPTIONS 0 Example STN_LBIND BIND 1 LAS 1 RSG 3 Parameters The STN_LBIND command has the following parameters BIND Logical identifier for a binding between a Local Application Server and either a Remote Application Server or Remote Signaling Gateway The valid range is 0 199 e LAS Logical reference for a Local Application Server An underlying snlink may only be associated with a single LAS The valid range is 0 199 e RAS Remote Application Server The Remote Application Server must be associated with at least one SIGTRAN Link and cannot be bound to more than one Local Application Server In IPSP operation the Local Application Server and Remote Application Server must be associated with same network context The valid range is 0 255 e RSG Remote Signaling Gateway The Remote Signaling Gateway must be associated with at least one SIGTRAN Link The valid range is 0 255
462. ween 0 to 65535 RAS The SIGTRAN Remote Application Server identifier Parameter Range Number between 0 to 255 RC Routing Context Parameter Range Number between 0 to 4294967295 RCOM SNMP read only community string Parameter Range Null or String of length 0 to 12 Must not contain any spaces RCOPT Request reception of optional parameters RDEL Y Automatically send ReportSMDelivery update indication to HLR These updates are only generated for Web Service API request via the combined SMS delivery requests addressed using the MSISDN Users of the separate SendRoutingl nfo and ForwardSM request API calls can generate the ReportSMDelivery indications manually using an API call N No not automatically send ReportSMDelivery This is the default value REALM IP realm name NONE or case sensitive string length of 0 to 47 Must not contain any spaces 350 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Table 1 Command Parameters Continued RECOVERY REF The recovery mechanism to use should a database lookup fail Possible values are CONTINUE continue by forwarding the message to the original called address RETURN based on the Return on Error flag in the message either return the message to the originator as a UDTS or discard the message DISCARD discard the message The logical identity of the signaling link within the link set Parameter Range Numbe
463. where they wish the trace messages to be logged using the CNSYx command TRACELOG parameter and then configure and activate the relevant trace mask using CNTMx commands TRACELOG by default will be set to log trace messages to local FILE The user can however modify the TRACELOG configuration to either transmit the messages to the management module on the management HOST or to DUAL to log locally as well as transmit to the management host Events and errors will be logged to files of the name maint log in the syslog maintenance sub directory of the user account These files will be limited to be a maximum of 5 MB with support being provided for up to 10 files When the maint log file reaches the 5 MB limit or the system is restarted it will be renamed maint log 1 and a new maint log file will be created If there is an existing maint log 1 file that will be renamed maint log 2 other log files will consequently be renamed in a similar manner with the oldest file maint log 9 being removed MMI inputs and outputs will be logged to files of the name mmi log in the syslog mmi sub directory of the user account In the same manner as the maintenance logs these files will be limited to be a maximum of 5MB with support being provided for up to 10 files Alarm events will be logged to files of the name alarm log in the syslog alarms sub directory of the user account In the same manner as the maintenance logs these files are limited to be a
464. y configured and in an INACTIVE state 215 Chapter 6 Management Commands Example CNURE MODE CGRP D 8 6 3 95 CNURI Configuration Update Resources Initiate This command updates the configuration data of a resource on the server The operation involves reading the config txt file containing configuration data validating it and applying it to the unit Note Use of the CNURI command has been deprecated Individual objects such as circuit groups and routes have their own specific commands to add resources to the system Syntax CNURI MODE CGRP I D Web Management Location Command line only Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions System Maintenance Access Prerequisites Ensure that the appropriate resource data is present in the updated Valid configuration has been entered The specified resource was not previously configured in the unit Example CNURI MODE CGRP ID 5 6 3 96 CNUSC Configuration SNMP User Change This command allows changes to configured SNMP user accounts Syntax CNUSC SNMPUSER AUTH AUTHPASS PRIV PRIVPASS LABEL Web Management Location System Administration gt Diagnostics gt SNMP Users gt Configuration Applicability Operating Modes SIU SWS DSH Permissions Configuration Update Access 216 Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 Prerequisites This DSMI Agent must be enabled The user must be configured If AUT
465. y configuring the Message Router to send traffic through the local SCCP for Global Title Translation For further information on Message Router configuration and operation see the Dialogic DSI SS7G41 Signaling Server Introduction to Message Router Functionality SS7G41 SWS Mode An SS7G41 with the SWS Mode software license installed and enabled combines a Web Services interface and service oriented APIs with powerful message processing providing an interface to SS7 and SIGTRAN networks for one or more client applications In this mode the unit provides a high level RESTful API to MAP service functionality operating on the server allowing rapid development for mobile applications such as SMS USSD and Location Based services For a detailed description and use of the system acting as a Signaling Web Server see the Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 SWS Developers Manual and Dialogic DSI SS7G41 Signaling Server Introduction to SWS Profiles Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual Issue 11 BorderNet DSH The BorderNet DSH combines Diameter Routing Agent DRA Diameter Edge Agent DEA and Interworking Functions IWF together with flexible AVP manipulation capabilities Key Features of the product include Diameter routing security load balancing and interworking Protocol support includes any to any multi protocol interworking and service manipulation at the AVP level Flexible connections into SS7 and SIGTRAN network
466. you to add delete or modify configuration elements for example circuit groups without affecting the state of any other configuration element in the system Dynamic configuration does not require a system restart There are two forms of dynamic configuration e Config txt based dynamic configuration where the user transmits an updated config txt file to the system then executes an MMI command to load the configuration into system memory for use Since the new configuration exists within a config txt file the updated configuration is preserved over a restart See below for more information e Application based dynamic configuration where a user application transmits a configuration message directly to the protocol module Since the new configuration does not exist in a config txt file the updated configuration is not preserved over a restart and it is therefore necessary for the user application to detect any restart of the Signaling Server and reconfigure the unit as needed 7 9 1 Config txt Based Dynamic Configuration In config txt based dynamic configuration the user transmits an updated config txt file to the system then executes an MMI command to load the configuration into system memory for use Since the new configuration exists within a config txt file the updated configuration is preserved over a restart The process for config txt based dynamic configuration is as follows 1 Add delete or modify the configuration element in t

Dialogic DSI Signaling Servers SS7G41 Operators Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents